JP2018198875A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement.SOLUTION: A regular symbol win/lose lottery is performed on the basis of entry into a through-gate 35, and a regular symbol game round is performed on the basis of performance of the win/lose lottery. Also, on the basis that a result of the regular symbol win/lose lottery is based on an opening result, opening/closing control of an electric accessory 66 is performed after the regular symbol game round is performed. When no regular symbol holding information is stored, a specific period after game balls pass the through-gate 35 until the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the passage becomes shorter than a period corresponding to a shooting cycle of game balls in a game ball shooting mechanism.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a game machine that includes a ball entering part into which a game ball can enter and performs a predetermined lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entering part (for example, a patent) Reference 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-074175

  Here, there is still room for improvement in improving interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

The present invention
A launching means capable of launching a game ball;
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information based on the entrance of a game ball to the entrance part;
Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means;
First game execution means for executing a first game based on the fact that lottery processing is performed by the lottery means;
Second game execution means for executing a second game different from the first game after execution of the first game based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A holding storage means for holding and storing lottery information corresponding to the incoming ball based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered the incoming ball part during execution of the first game or the second game;
With
In a predetermined case, a first period from when a game ball enters the ball entry part to when the second game corresponding to the ball entry ends corresponds to a game ball firing cycle in the launching means. It is characterized by being configured to be shorter than the second period.

  According to the present invention, interest can be improved.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) Explanatory drawing of the positional relationship of a through gate and an electrically-driven accessory, (b), (c) The longitudinal cross-sectional view which looked at the electrically-driven accessory and the 2nd operation port from the side surface side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is the schematic which shows the success / failure table for 1st special drawings. It is the schematic which shows the success / failure table for 2nd special drawings. (A) Schematic diagram showing a normal map success / failure table, (b) Schematic diagram showing a general map fluctuation display time table for low probability mode, (c) Schematic diagram showing a general map fluctuation display time table for high probability mode. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for 1st special drawings. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. (A) Schematic showing a first special figure fluctuation display time table for low probability mode, (b) Schematic showing a first special figure fluctuation display time table for high probability mode, (c) For low probability mode It is the schematic which shows a 2nd special figure fluctuation display time table, (d) It is the schematic which shows the 2nd special figure fluctuation display time table for high probability modes. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for 2nd special drawings. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a general game game control process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual game state transfer process. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a usual game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a usual game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of change in the time difference A of the arrival timing with respect to an opening timing, and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to a closing timing. It is a state transition diagram which shows transition of a gaming state. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) Special figure success / failure table for low probability mode, (b) Special figure success / failure table for high probability mode, (c) First special figure assignment table, (d) Second special figure assignment It is the schematic which shows a table. It is the schematic which shows a common figure open | release pattern. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change start process. (A) Schematic diagram showing a first variation display time table for ordinary maps, (b) Schematic diagram showing a second variation display time table for ordinary diagrams, (c) Third variation display time table for ordinary diagrams (D) It is the schematic which shows the common figure change display time table for high frequency support modes. It is a state transition diagram which shows transition of a gaming state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. (A) The longitudinal cross-sectional view seen from the side surface side of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus, (b) The longitudinal cross-sectional view seen from the back side of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus. (A) Schematic which shows the success / failure table for 1st special figures, (b) It is the schematic which shows the success / failure table for 2nd special figures. (A) Schematic which shows a low distribution aspect, (b) It is the schematic which shows a high distribution aspect. It is the schematic which shows the allocation table for various jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows V distribution setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change start process. (A) It is the schematic which shows the usual figure change display time table for low frequency support modes, (b) It is the schematic which shows the common figure change display time table for high frequency support modes. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special effects performed by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st special effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd special effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for V prize winning. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of an effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of an effect. It is a state transition diagram which shows transition of a gaming state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the change of the number of usual maps hold | maintained. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the positional relationship of an upper variable prize-winning apparatus, a through gate, and an electrically-driven accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of opening time. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the opening / closing timing of an upper prize winning opening, and a winning easy state. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the upper and lower big winning opening and a winning easy state. In the 1st modification of 4th Embodiment, (a) Schematic which shows a distribution table, (b) It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. (A) The flowchart which shows the round production | presentation setting process performed by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus, (b)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of production. In the second modification example of the fourth embodiment, (a) a schematic diagram showing a general-purpose variable display time table for an opening / closing execution mode, (b) a flowchart showing a setting process of an opening time, and (c) a waiting time. It is a flowchart which shows a setting process. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the opening / closing timing of an upper prize winning opening, and a winning easy state. In the 3rd modification of 4th Embodiment, (a) Schematic which shows the common figure change display time table for opening-and-closing execution modes, (b) It is the schematic for demonstrating winning assistance auxiliary | assistant continuation time. It is the schematic which shows a player HP setting table. It is a flowchart which shows a round production | presentation setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of an effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of an effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of an effect. It is explanatory drawing of the positional relationship of an upper variable prize-winning apparatus, a through gate, and an electrically-driven accessory in the 4th modification of 4th Embodiment. In the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment, (a) an explanatory diagram of the positional relationship between the movable accessory, the through gate and the electric accessory, (b), (c) a longitudinal section of the movable accessory as viewed from the side surface side FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the positional relationship of a rotary body, a through gate, and an electrically-driven accessory in the 6th modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the positional relationship of a distribution valve, a through gate, and an electrically-driven accessory in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic of the rolling part in the 2nd modification of 5th Embodiment. In the 3rd modification of 5th Embodiment, (a) It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is the schematic which shows a common figure acceptance / rejection table. (A) Schematic which shows the common figure change display time table for 1st states, (b) It is the schematic which shows the normal figure change display time table for 2nd states. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the hold information by the side of a common map is acquired in a 1st state. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the hold information by the side of a common map is acquired in a 2nd state. It is a state transition diagram which shows transition of a gaming state. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in the 4th modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) Schematic diagram showing a normal map acceptance / rejection table, (b) Schematic diagram showing a general map fluctuation display time table for the first state, (c) Schematic diagram showing a general map fluctuation display time table for the second state. is there. It is a timing chart for demonstrating another example. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game board.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. Unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view ( (See FIG. 3).

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other across a predetermined gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided in the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides. A sphere lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper dish passage that leads to the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish path that leads to the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving port portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by dividing the receiving port portion into left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish passage are guided to the upper dish 33, and the game balls that have entered the front door side lower dish path are guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of bar brackets 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rotating front end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

  Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by a resin base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

  Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting the metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened by the hook metal 49 being locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 has an inner frame collar member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 58 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the key is turned counterclockwise.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed at the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers a front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 60, a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, the game board 60 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

  The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning port 61, a first operating port 62, a second operating port 63, a third operating port 64, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, and the like.

  When a ball entering the general winning port 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, and the third operating port 64 is generated, it is detected by a detection sensor, and predetermined based on the detection result. A privilege such as payout of a number of prize balls is given to the player. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 61 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 65 is entered. Is executed. When a ball enters the first operation port 62, three game balls are paid out. When a ball enters the second operation port 63, ten game balls are paid out. Is executed, and when a ball enters the third operating port 64, one game ball is paid out. Incidentally, even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out.

  An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening part, and after passing through the opening part, the game ball passes through the opening part as well as being discharged from the game area PE. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 68, the general game port 61, the operation ports 62 to 64, the variable game device 65 or the through gate 35 are entered. Also expressed as a prize.

  Further, the game board 60 is provided with a large number of nails 69 in order to disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are provided. By various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated and adjusted so that a winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  The variable display unit 67 is arranged at the center of the game board 60, and the operation ports 62 to 64 are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The first operation port 62 is disposed below the variable display unit 67, and the second operation port 63 is disposed on the left side of the variable display unit 67. The third operation port 64 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 67. Both the first working port 62 and the third working port 64 are opened upward, and the second working port 63 is opened forward.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the second working port 63 is formed as an opening having a rectangular shape in front view that opens toward the front. The vertical dimension and the horizontal dimension of the second working port 63 are slightly larger than the diameter D of the game ball, and one game ball can pass through the second working port 63 when viewed from the front (front side). It is a size. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), behind the second operation port 63, there is a ball passage 240 that guides the game ball that has entered the second operation port 63 to the back side of the game board 60 and then guides it downward. Is formed. A detection sensor 391 c that detects a game ball won in the second operation port 63 is disposed in the middle of the ball passage 240. The second working port 63 is provided with an electric accessory 66 that changes the degree of opening of the working port 63.

  The electric accessory 66 can be in a closed state (a non-accepting state, a non-support state or a non-guide state) in which a game ball cannot be won in the second operating port 63, and in the second operating port 63. Can be switched to an open state (acceptance state, support state or guide state). As shown in FIGS. 5 (b) and 5 (c), the electric accessory 66 receives an opening / closing accessory 241 that opens and closes the second operating port 63 and a receiving ball that receives a game ball flowing down the front of the second operating port 63. And an object 242.

  The opening / closing accessory 241 includes a rotation plate 243 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction with a rotation shaft 243 a provided at the upper end of the second working port 63 as a fulcrum. The rotating plate 243 has a size that allows the opening area of the second working port 63 to be smaller than the projected area of the game ball by closing at least a part of the second working port 63. The rotating plate 243 is in a standing posture to close the second working port 63 (see FIG. 5B), and pivots backward from the first position to open the second working port 63. It can be displaced to the second position (see FIG. 5C). The rotating plate 243 is switched between the first position and the second position by being driven by the driving unit 244 through a link mechanism (not shown). When the rotation plate 243 is displaced to the first position, the front surface 243b of the rotation plate 243 is substantially flush with the front surface 60a of the game board 60, and when the rotation plate 243 is displaced to the second position, the rotation plate 243 is rotated. The entire plate 243 is accommodated in the spherical passage 240. For this reason, the rotating plate 243 does not protrude forward from the front surface 60a of the game board 60 in either the first position or the second position.

  The receiving object 242 includes a plate-shaped receiving member 245 that is provided below the second working port 63 and moves forward and backward. The receiving member 245 is entirely retracted into the ball passage 240 (see FIG. 5B), and a part of the receiving member 245 moves forward from the retracted position and is partly forward of the front surface 60a of the game board 60. It can be displaced to a protruding forward position (see FIG. 5C). When the receiving member 245 is displaced to the forward movement position, the receiving member 245 can receive a game ball from above, and the game ball received by the receiving member 245 moves rearward on the upper surface of the receiving member 245 to perform the second operation. It is guided to the mouth 63. The receiving member 245 is switched between the retracted position and the advanced position by being driven by the drive unit 246 through a link mechanism (not shown).

  Under such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 5C, when the rotating plate 243 is located at the second position and the receiving member 245 is located at the forward position, the electric accessory 66 is in an open state, A receiving area RA1 in which a game ball can be received in the second operation port 63 is formed. The receiving area RA1 is formed in a specific area RA2 (see FIG. 5B) in front of the second working port 63 (in front of the rotating plate 243 when the electric accessory 66 is in a closed state). The reception area RA1 has the same shape and size as the second operation port 63 in a front view, and the formation of the reception area RA1 allows a game ball to be awarded to the second operation port 63.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the rotating plate 243 is located at the first position and the receiving member 245 is located at the retracted position, the receiving portion RA1 of the electric accessory 66 disappears. As a result, the electric accessory 66 is closed, and the winning of the game ball to the second operation port 63 is restricted. At that time, since the second operation port 63 is blocked by the rotating plate 243, even if the flow of the game ball is changed due to the collision with the nail 69 or the collision of the game balls, the game ball is unexpectedly won. Is suppressed. Further, when the electric accessory 66 is in a closed state, the game ball can pass in front of the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63) (specific area RA2).

  Note that it is not always necessary to make it impossible to win the second operating port 63 when the electric accessory 66 is in the closed state, and a configuration that makes it harder to win than in the open state may be possible. For example, the rotating plate 243 may be omitted, or the receiving member 245 may protrude forward from the front surface 60a in a state where the protruding amount from the front surface 60a of the game board 60 is smaller than the forward position at the retracted position of the receiving member 245. It can be set as the structure to do. In short, it suffices if the ease of winning the second operating port 63 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

  The through gate 35 is disposed on the left side of the variable display unit 67 and above the second operation port 63. The through gate 35 is configured as a pass-type winning opening, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 can continue to flow down the game area PE below the through gate 35. That is, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can subsequently win the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63.

  Here, the positional relationship between the through gate 35 and the second working port 63 (the electric accessory 66) will be described with reference to FIG. The through gate 35 and the second working port 63 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with a predetermined gap therebetween. In detail, both are arrange | positioned so that the center axis line of the through gate 35 and the center axis line of the 2nd operation port 63 may correspond in the vertical direction. Between the through gate 35 and the second operation port 63, a pair of left and right game nails arranged in the lateral direction are planted in two upper and lower stages.

  The distance between the upper left game nail 69a and the upper right game nail 69b is slightly larger than the diameter D of the game ball, and the lower left game nail 69c and the lower right game nail 69d are the upper left game nail 69a. And the upper right game nails 69b are arranged on the same vertical line. The distance between the lower end of the through gate 35 and the upper game nail pair 69a, 69b and the distance between the upper game nail pair 69a, 69b and the lower game nail pair 69c, 69d are smaller than the diameter D of the game ball. Yes. Therefore, the game nail 69a to 69d forms a winning route for guiding the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 toward the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63), and at the same time, the game that has passed through the through gate 35. It is suppressed that game balls other than the ball enter the winning route. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 can be stably directed to the electric accessory 66, and another game ball collides with the game ball immediately after passing through the through gate 35, or another game ball. Is prevented from going to the second working port 63.

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 and the second operation port 63 (the second operation port 63 (so that the required period from the game ball passing through the through gate 35 to reaching the specific area RA2) is a predetermined period (0.6 sec). The positional relationship with the electric accessory 66) is defined. Specifically, the through-gate 35 and the through-gate 35 are set so that the required time from the game ball passing through the through-gate 35 to the upper surface of the receiving member 245 (see FIG. 5C) in the forward position is 0.6 sec. A distance from the receiving member 245 is set. In the following description, the arrival of the game ball to the specific area RA2 may be referred to as the arrival of the game ball to the electric accessory 66.

  Incidentally, the first working port 62 and the third working port 64 are not provided with an electric accessory. In other words, these operating ports 62 and 64 are always opened upward to allow game balls to be won. The size of the opening in the first working port 62 and the third working port 64 is set to a size that allows one game ball to be won.

  Returning to the description of the game board 60 of FIG. 4, the variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 65 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 67. The variable winning device 65 is formed with a large winning opening 65a leading to the back side of the game board 60, and an opening / closing door 65b is provided as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the large winning opening 65a. The open / close door 65b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big win or a special win (so-called small win) is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 65, in the case of a big hit, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings can be set as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) can be varied as an upper limit. There is a mode in which the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened. Further, in the case of a special win, the variable winning device 65 is opened once, and a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 sec) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is shorter than that in the case where the open is a big win. It is set as the aspect which continues until it exists.

  Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a symbol display device 75 for variably displaying symbols (variation display) using a winning at the operation ports 62 to 64 as a trigger.

  The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the vertical direction. When a big win or a special win comes, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol display device 75 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

  The variable display unit 67 is provided with a center frame 76 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in this fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 are raised from the front surface of the game board 60. The gap dimension between the two is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). The route is roughly divided into the right route that detours from the left and the left route that detours from the left.

  The third operating port 64 and the variable winning device 65 described above are arranged on the right route, and for the game balls flowing down the left route, winning to the third operating port 64 and the variable winning device 65 is avoided. . On the upstream side of the third operation port 64 in the right route, a flow path (guidance route) of the game ball is formed so that most of the game balls (approximately 70%) fired in the right route are guided to the third operation port 64. Has been.

  On the other hand, the through gate 35, the first working port 62, and the second working port 63 are arranged on the left route, and the game balls flowing down the right route are the through gate 35, the first working port 62, and the second working port. Winning to 63 is avoided. When comparing the probability that a game ball launched into the left route enters the first operation port 62 and the probability that a game ball launched into the right route enters the third operation port 64, the former is more important than the latter. Is lower.

  The player can advantageously advance the game by selecting the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route / left route according to the game situation. Selection of the launch destination of the game ball can be performed by adjusting the launch force of the game ball, that is, the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41.

  The operation ports 62 to 64 are arranged at positions close to the variable display unit 67. Since a big win can be generated with a winning at the operation ports 62 to 64 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operation ports 62 to 64 and to determine whether or not a big win will occur. It is considered that attention is paid to the display device 75. Providing the operation ports 62 to 64 near the variable display unit 67 is a device for concentrating a portion that the player wants to focus on around the variable display unit 67.

  In the present embodiment, the upper left portion of the center frame 76 has a downward slope that goes downward to the lower left, and the left end portion of the portion protrudes toward the through gate 35. With such a configuration, a guiding portion 77 that guides the launched game ball to the through gate 35 is configured. A cushioning member 78 such as rubber is disposed over the entire top surface of the guiding portion 77, that is, the portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer member 78 suppresses the rebound of the game ball colliding with the guide portion 77 and the damage of the guide portion 77 due to the impact. The upper surface of the buffer member 78 is flat, and the flow of the game ball rolling on the buffer member 78 is not easily obstructed. The gap between the left end portion of the guiding portion 77 and the through gate 35 is larger than the diameter D of the game ball, and the game ball can pass between them. For this reason, there remains room for the game ball guided by the guide portion 77 to deviate from the winning route to the through gate 35. Thereby, it is easy to maintain the expectation for winning through the through gate 35 until the game ball wins through the through gate 35.

  Note that the game balls that win the through gate 35 include game balls that are directed to the through gate 35 in addition to the game balls that are guided by the guiding portion 77. In other words, in the upper region of the through gate 35, there are provided a plurality of obstacles (not shown) such as a game nail and a protruding member that define or change the flow direction of the game ball. The flow path of the game ball is constructed by the obstacle member so that the contact can reach the through gate 35 even by contact. In the present embodiment, most of the game balls launched to the left route (for example, 80% or more) win the through gate 35.

  A main display unit 81 is disposed below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60 to the pachinko machine 10. The front surface of the main display unit 81 is opposed to the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the game area PE to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the rear glass panel 23. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the main display unit 81. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like are provided in a portion of the main display unit 81 facing the glass unit 22. About each of these display parts 43 and 44, while being visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, it is avoided that a game ball moves in front of these various display parts 43 and 44. The visibility is ensured by being done. The main display unit 43 is based on a first result display unit AS that displays a lottery result performed based on winning in the first working port 62 or the second working port 63, and on winning in the third working port 64. And a second result display section BS for displaying the result of the lottery performed.

  In the first result display section AS, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning of the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 as a trigger, and the first operation port 62 or the second operation is performed as a stop result of the variation display. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the mouth 63 is clearly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is displayed on the first result display section AS. After stopping and displaying a predetermined pattern as a stop result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section BS, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning of the third operation port 64 as a trigger, and the internal display performed based on the winning of the third operation port 64 as a stop result of the variation display. The result of the lottery will be specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the third operating port 64 is a winning result corresponding to the big win or special win, the variable display is stopped in the second result display unit BS, and a predetermined result is given as the stop result. After the picture is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  In the following, in order to distinguish between a picture that is displayed in a variable manner when a winning is made to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and a picture that is displayed in a variable manner when a winning is given to the third operating port 64, The former may be referred to as a first special symbol or a first special figure, and the latter may be referred to as a second special symbol or a second special figure.

  Here, on the basis of winning in any one of the operation ports 62 to 64, the variation display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS and BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variation display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning to any of the operation ports 62 to 64 occurs, the single game area In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped once in a state where a predetermined stop result is displayed. And

  A main display unit 43 of the main display unit 81 is provided with a hold number display unit AM. The number-of-holds display unit AM corresponds to the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63. The number of times that the game ball has won the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the reservation number display section AM. It should be noted that the number of times that the game ball has won the third operating port 64 is not held, and the holding number display portion corresponding to the third operating port 64 is not provided.

  The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the support state in which the electric accessory 66 is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44. After being displayed and changing display stopped, it shifts to the support state. In the support state, the electric accessory 66 provided in the second working port 63 is opened in a predetermined manner. Note that the pattern that is displayed in a variable manner upon winning through the through gate 35 may be referred to as a normal symbol or a normal symbol.

  Here, based on the winning to the through gate 35, the display of variation is started in the display portion 44 for an accessory, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above-mentioned variation display is stopped. This is equivalent to one game in the game. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the game times in the result display units AS and BS, the game times in the accessory display unit 44 are also referred to as general game times, and the games in the main display unit 43 (result display units AS and BS). The times are also referred to as special figure game times (first special figure game times, second special figure game times).

  The accessory display unit 44 is provided with a general-purpose number-of-holds display unit FM. The usual figure hold number display portion FM corresponds to the through gate 35. The number of times that the game ball has won the through gate 35 is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by turning on the usual figure number display section FM.

  Each result display section AS, BS and accessory display section 44 in the main display section 43 is composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display device may be used.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first special figure game times based on winning in the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 and the second special figure game times based on winning in the third working port 64 are overlapped. Thus, the configuration can be implemented. Specifically, a winning is generated at the third operating port 64 while the first result display unit AS is performing the variable display based on the winning at the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. In this case, the variable result display is started in the second result display unit BS while the variable display of the first result display unit AS is continued. On the other hand, when a winning to the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 occurs while the variation display is performed on the second result display unit BS based on the winning to the third working port 64. In FIG. 5, the variable result display on the first result display unit AS is started while the variable display on the second result display unit BS is continued. However, it is won in the open / close execution mode when winning in the internal lottery based on winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 and in the internal lottery based on winning in the third operating port 64. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode is not duplicated. These controls will be described later in detail.

  The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 2. A game ball is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 so that the resin base 50 is fixed. On the other hand, it is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

  In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion that is open to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an outlet portion that is located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball can be divided into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is possible.

  In the game board 60, a reverse prevention member 106 for preventing the game ball reaching the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board 60.

  A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return to the inside of the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing base 112 in the resin base 50 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14). A passage forming member is formed in the through hole. 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper dish path and a main body side lower dish path. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

  An opening / closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper dish path and the main body side lower dish path is attached to the resin base 50 below the passage forming member 121. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction, and further includes an urging member that urges the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path to a front position. Is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and closes the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage or the main body side lower dish passage, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the stored balls spill out. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing bracket 132 is formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

  A plurality of locking fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by the locking fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

  A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 disposed in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification / production control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification / production control device unit 142 includes a notification / production control device 143 and a mounting table 144, and the notification / production control device 143 is mounted on the mounting table 144.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of the display control device in accordance with instructions from a main control device, which will be described later. It is accommodated in a substrate box 145 made of, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the back surface of the game board 60. The collective board 150 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a detection mechanism for detecting the entering of game balls into various winning ports, and the like.

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with a collecting passage corresponding to each of the various ball entering portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages go down along the back surface of the game board 60 from these entrances, and define the fall path of the game balls. The collection paths meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and any game balls that have passed through the ball-entry portion such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection path. It becomes. The exit portion of each recovery passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 68 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any prize opening is led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

  The detection mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors that individually correspond to various ball entering portions such as the general winning a prize opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage that is connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball falls in a state where the collection path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a ball entering a ball entrance such as the general winning award 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage, Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in a magnetic field that occurs when a game ball passes through the detection area is employed.

  These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (specifically, a main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and the configuration associated therewith will be described.

  The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collective plate 150 from the rear side, and includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any structure can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened.However, the box base and the box cover can be connected by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing part. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of sealing portions. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is called.

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the retaining pins are inserted into bearing fittings 132 (specifically, bearing portions) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastening tool for fastening with respect to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating front end portion of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool is fitted into the fastening hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

  The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. The upper dish passage and the front door side upper dish path communicate with the upper dish 33, and the outer opening is formed so as to communicate with the main body side lower dish path and front door side lower dish path. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board 203, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply / launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 includes a power supply / launch control board housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is fired by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604 may be included as another element.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 602 are a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, various detection sensors and the like provided in the main control device 162. The power failure monitoring board 605 is connected to a power supply / emission control device 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. In addition, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the first operation port 62, a detection sensor 391c for the second operation port 63, and a detection for the third operation port 64 A sensor 391d, a detection sensor 391e for the through gate 35, and a detection sensor 391f for the variable winning device 65 are connected. Based on detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors 391a to 391f, the main controller 162 The MPU 602 executes a winning determination (entering determination) or the like for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a lottery generation lottery based on winnings to the first operation port 62, the second operation port 63, and the third operation port 64, and executes support generation lotteries based on a winning to the through gate 35. To do.

  On the output side of the MPU 602, a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / production control device 143 (specifically, a notification / production control board 651) are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when a prize ball command is output. When the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is output, and when the winning to the big winning opening 65a is specified, 15 gaming balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the first game port 62 is specified and a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output. When the winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the third operation port 64 is specified, the winning ball corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output. The command is output.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes various special command production commands such as special command game times variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, opening commands and ending commands, Various command commands such as a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, a variable winning drive unit 65c that opens and closes the open / close door 65b of the variable winning device 65, driving units 244 and 246 that open and close the electric accessory 66 of the second operating port 63, and a main display unit. 43 and the display part 44 for an accessory are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 65c in the variable winning device 65 so that the large winning opening 65a is opened and closed. In each special figure game round, the MPU 602 executes display control of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43 of the main display unit 81. Then, at the time of the usual game game, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 602, and the support state is displayed in the accessory display unit 44 in the support state in which the electrified state of the electric accessory 66 is won. Display control indicating winning is executed.

  Furthermore, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. When the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power / fire control device 191, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 191. The payout control device 181 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41 are connected to the power source / launch control device 191. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects an operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and based on information from the operation level detection sensor, the game ball launch mechanism 110 emits a strength of the game ball (launch speed). ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41, and the player touches the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information in the power / fire control device 191. It is the structure which can grasp | ascertain whether it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is operated, the game ball is fired. Will be allowed.

  Note that information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, and thus the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 660, via the power supply / launch control device 191.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control board 651 on which an MPU 652 is mounted. The MPU 652 includes a ROM 613 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 613. A RAM 614 or the like, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing, is incorporated.

  The notification / production control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162 and controls the display control device 660. Is. Specifically, in the notification / production control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 75 and the symbol stop display mode (for example, the symbol of the symbol to be finally stopped) are displayed. The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach, the content of reach production, and the like are determined, and the determined content is assigned to the command and transferred to the display control device 660.

  The display control device 660 has a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. RAM, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM, and the like are incorporated. Yes. In the MPU, display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) is executed based on a command input from the notification / production control device 143.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 75 will be described. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are set. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

  Further, the display screen 75a is configured such that one symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of three symbols are stopped and displayed. If the display of fluctuation stops in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row, and if the variation display of all symbol rows ends with the predetermined symbol combination formed on the effective line, the jackpot result or special hit result will be displayed. A moving image showing the transition to the corresponding special gaming state is displayed.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). Column), the middle symbol row can be referred to as the third symbol row (or the third symbol row).

  Incidentally, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, the number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol columns, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be vertically arranged, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the horizontal direction.

  A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The hold display area is a hold display in which the unit hold display areas of the same number as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 are lined up in the horizontal direction. It consists of a number display area.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, the maximum number of reserves is four, and correspondingly, the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 is used. In the hold number display area, a first unit hold display area, a second unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set. For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is 1, the predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area, and the game When the number of holds when the ball wins the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 is four, a predetermined holding image is displayed in all of the first unit holding display area to the fourth unit holding display area. The configuration is displayed.

<About various counters>
Next, a configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 602 uses various counter information in the game to perform a lottery to transition to a special gaming state, set display on the main display unit 81 (main display unit 43), set symbol display on the symbol display device 75, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for lottery for generating big wins or special hits, a hit type counter C2 used for determining the type of win (specifically, big hit), Reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery of the reach display when the display device 75 fluctuates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the main display unit 43 of the main display unit 81 A variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time of the pattern in the symbol and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75; It is set to be used. Further, an open random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 66 is in the support state (open state), and a variable display time of the pattern in the accessory display unit 44 of the main display unit 81 are determined. The figure variation type counter C5 is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 641 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. In the lottery counter buffer 641, information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, or the third operating port 64. Is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 as the acquisition information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 642 includes a first result display holding area Ra for storing holding information based on winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and a first special figure execution area AE1. Is provided. The reserved area Ra for the first result display section includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, and a fourth area Ra4, and a winning history to the first working port 62 or the second working port 63. Accordingly, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 641 is stored as hold information in any area. . Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4, when a winning to the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4. Since each of the four areas is provided in this manner, a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 are held and stored.

  The first special figure execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area Ra when the variable display on the main display unit 43 is started. At the start of the game round, a determination of success or failure is made based on various numerical information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1. The on-hold information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1 is erased when the game times being executed and the opening / closing execution mode based thereon are completed.

  Further, in the reserved ball storage area 642, a second special figure execution area AE2 is provided as an area for storing hold information based on winning in the third operating port 64. In the second special figure execution area AE2, when a winning to the third operating port 64 occurs, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS is stored on the second special figure side. Stored as hold information. Using the stored hold information, determination of whether or not one game time is related to the second special figure and distribution determination are performed. The on-hold information stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 is erased when the game times being executed and the opening / closing execution mode based thereon are completed.

  In the present embodiment, the winning number to the third operating port 64 is configured not to hold the number of winning prizes, so the third operating port 64 is being executed during the execution of the second special figure game times and the opening / closing execution mode based thereon. Even if a new winning is generated, the hold information is not stored in the second special figure execution area AE2. That is, the second special figure execution area AE2 is configured to store the numerical information only once. For this reason, in the execution area AE2, the hold information is stored only when a winning to the third operation port 64 occurs in a situation where the game times on the second special figure side and the opening / closing execution mode based on the game times are not performed. Will be. Note that the second special figure execution area AE2 can determine whether or not the hold information is based on the hold information and erase the hold information independently of the first special figure execution area AE1.

  Further, the reserved ball storage area 642 is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area stores the number of winning records for the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63 that are stored on hold. The information for specifying is stored.

  Specifically, each counter is configured such that the hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of “0” to “199”, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = “0” to “199”). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation ports 62 to 64. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and the timing when the game ball wins in the third operating port 64 Is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the RAM 604.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit or the value of the random number for winning the special winning is stored in the result table storage area 621 as the result information storage unit 621 in the ROM 603 as a result table (result information group). Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. As the success / failure tables, there are provided a success / failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 8) and a success / failure table for the second special figure (see FIG. 9). In the lottery based on the entry into the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63, the success / failure table for the first special drawing is referred to, and in the lottery based on the entry into the third operation port 64, the second special drawing. The success / failure table is referenced.

  In the success / failure table for the first special figure that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 8A, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”. It is a piece. That is, “7” among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from “0” to “199” corresponds to the jackpot result, and the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/200. The random number corresponding to the special hit result (so-called small hit) is not provided in the low probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the first special figure, and the lottery result is excluded except for the random number value that is the big hit result. It corresponds to the result.

  In the success / failure table for the first special figure that is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 8B, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are “7” to “ 11 ”. That is, “7” to “11” among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0” to “199” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 5/200. The high probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the first special figure does not have a random number value corresponding to the special hit result, and the lottery result corresponds to the result that the lottery result other than the random value that is the big hit result. Yes.

  In the success / failure table for the second special chart that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 9A, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”. It is a piece. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of “0 to 199”, “7” corresponds to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/200. In the success / failure table for the second special figure, “0” to “6”, “12” to “198” correspond to the special hit results, and the probability of the special hit result is 194/200. . It should be noted that the lottery result is configured to be a result other than the random value that is the jackpot result and the random value that is the special hit result.

  In the success / failure table for the second special chart that is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 9B, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot result are “7” to “ 11 ”. That is, “7” to “11” among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0” to “199” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 5/200. In the success / failure table for the second special figure, “0” to “6”, “12” to “198” correspond to the special hit results, and the probability of the special hit result is 194/200. . That is, regardless of whether the lottery mode is the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode, the probability that the special winning result is the same in the determination of success or failure based on the winning to the third operating port 64 is the same. It should be noted that the lottery result is configured to be a result other than the random value that is the jackpot result and the random value that is the special hit result.

  As described above, regardless of whether the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 and the third working port 64 are won, the probability of a jackpot result is common. However, when the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 is compared with the third working port 64, the third working port 64 is set to be more likely to have a special hit result. In other words, the third working port 64 is more preferential than the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 when compared with a probability that some balls can be expected.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 7 again, the hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of “0” to “99”, and after reaching the maximum value (ie, “99”), returns to 0. Yes. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the lottery mode in the success / failure lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In the present embodiment, although the electric accessory 66 is provided, the function of the high-frequency support mode (so-called electric chew support mode or short-time gaming state) that shifts when the opening / closing execution mode ends is not provided.

  The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation ports 62 to 64. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and the timing when the game ball wins in the third operating port 64 Is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the RAM 604.

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 622 as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 603. In this embodiment, 16R normal jackpot results and 16R probability variable jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. Each of these jackpot results is executed with 16 rounds. However, the 16R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the 16R probability variable jackpot result. Is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In the present embodiment, both the probability of allocating to the 16R normal jackpot result and the probability of allocating to the 16R probability variation jackpot result are set to 50%.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation ports 62 to 64. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and the timing when the game ball wins in the third operating port 64 Is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the RAM 604. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state).

  Here, the reach display is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and changes in game times in which the game result is a game result corresponding to the open / close execution mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after display can be a special display result, before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 75 is started, This means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a stage before the end of the symbol display, the combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents on the display screen 75a will be described in more detail. First, when the symbol variation display is finished in the left symbol row and the symbol variation display is finished in the right symbol row, Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the numbers that make up the combination, and reach is achieved by displaying the symbols in the middle symbol row in the situation where the reach lines are formed Display. When a big hit occurs, the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination of winning symbols together with the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. Is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS includes a symbol variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 81 (main display unit 43) and a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 75. This is used for determination in the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS (when the variation of the symbol is started by the symbol display device 75).

  In the lottery counter buffer 641, the information corresponding to the open random number counter C 4 and the common figure variation type counter C 5 is stored as an electric role reservation area as an acquisition information storage means on the normal figure side when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. 643.

  The electric role reservation area 643 includes an electric role reservation area Rc and an ordinary execution area AE3. The reserved area Rc for electric roles includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer 641 in accordance with the winning history to the through gate 35. Each numerical information of the open random number counter C4 and the normal fluctuation type counter C5 is stored as holding information in any area.

  In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, the first area Rc1 → the second area Rc2 → the third area Rc3 → the fourth area when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs a plurality of times continuously. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of Rc4. Since each of the four areas is provided in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the through gate 35 are stored on hold.

  The execution area for AE3 AE3 is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the reservation area Rc when starting the variable display of the accessory display unit 44. At the start of the game round, release determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the general-purpose execution area AE3.

  For details of each counter on the normal side, the open random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 999). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role reservation area 643 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 66 is controlled to be in an open state is performed based on the stored value of the open random number counter C4.

  The random number value that is the release result that sets the electric accessory 66 in the open state is stored in the pass / fail table storage area 621 serving as the pass / fail information group storage means in the ROM 603 as a normal pass / fail table (pass / fail information group). Here, the contents of the common-use win / loss table will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the random number value corresponding to the release result is 999 values from “0” to “998” in the normal-use determination table. That is, among the values of the open random number counter C4 of “0” to “999”, “0” to “998” correspond to the release result, and the probability of the release result is 999/1000. In other words, the probability of the release result is set to about 1/1, and most of the winnings of game balls to the through gate 35 are related to the release result that the electric accessory 66 shifts to the support state. Yes.

  Here, in the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 66 in the support state, the electric accessory 66 is opened and closed once. Specifically, from the start to the end of the support state, the electric accessory 66 is opened only once, and the opening is continued until 0.1 sec or a prize is awarded to the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63). Continue until the number reaches 5.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the game ball launch handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 110 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PE every 0.6 sec. Be controlled. That is, the opening period of the electric accessory 66 is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. For this reason, even if the electric accessory 66 is released, the game ball does not always win the second operating port 63, and the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2). Only when the timing matches well, the winning is generated. In addition, since the opening period is a very short period of 0.1 sec, it is extremely difficult to generate a plurality of winnings even if winning. In other words, although up to 5 winnings are allowed internally, the number of winnings to the second operating port 63 in the support state is substantially limited to 1.

  By the way, the general figure opening period, which is a waiting period after the end of the general game game, until the electric utility 66 is switched to the open state, is set to 0 sec. For this reason, if the result of the lottery win / fail lottery is an open result, the electric accessory 66 is controlled to be released immediately after the end of the general plan game round (specifically, after the end of the stop display time in the base figure game round). The In addition, the usual ending period, which is a waiting period until the next ordinary figure game round is started after the electric accessory 66 is switched from the open state to the closed state, is set to 0 sec. For this reason, if the general-purpose holding information is stored in the first area Rc1 of the electric-serving holding area Rc, the next general-purpose game game is started immediately after the electric utility item 66 is switched to the closed state. . Note that if the holding information is not stored in the first area Rc1 at the closing timing of the electric accessory 66, that is, the end timing of the support state, the general winning until the next winning to the through gate 35 occurs. Figure game times are not started.

  A lottery result other than the opening result and the losing result is not set in the usual-time winning / failing table, and a value other than the random number value that is the opening result corresponds to the losing result. However, as already explained, since the probability of the normal lottery lottery opening result is set to 999/1000, it is rare that the result of the lottery lottery is lost. In addition, this common figure winning / failing table is used in common when the winning / losing lottery mode is in the low probability mode and in the high probability mode.

  For example, the normal variation type counter C5 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 999, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 999) and then returns to 0. The usual figure variation type counter C5 is used when the MPU 602 determines the usual figure variation display time in the accessory display section 44 of the main display unit 81. The general fluctuation type counter C5 is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the universal variation type counter C5 is acquired when determining the variation display time at the start of the variation display in the accessory display unit 44.

  The distribution destination of the general map variation display time for the general map variation type counter C5 is stored as a general map variation display time table (variable display time information group) in the distribution table storage area 622 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. Has been. As a normal fluctuation display time table, a normal fluctuation display time table for low probability mode (see FIG. 10B), a normal fluctuation display time table for high probability mode (see FIG. 10C), and Is provided.

  In the map change display time table for the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the map display time associated with the map reservation storage number FN and the map change type counter C5 at the start of map change is displayed. It has been established. Specifically, the variable display time and the number of types that can be selected depending on the case where the number of reserved maps FN is 1 to 3 and the number of stored maps FN is 4 (upper limit). , And the selection modes thereof are different. In addition, the case where the number of usual figure reservation memory | storage FN is four means the case where common figure pending | holding information is memorize | stored in all the 1st area Rc1-4th area Rc4 in the reservation area Rc for electronic roles.

  In the case where the number of stored customary maps FN is 1 to 3, two types of variable display times of 0.05 sec and 10 sec are prepared as selectable variable display times, and one of those variable display times is the normal map variable type. It is selected and set according to the value of the counter C5. Specifically, when the common chart fluctuation type counter C5 is “0” to “998”, the fluctuation display time is set to 0.05 sec, and when the common chart fluctuation type counter C5 is “999”, The variable display time is set to 10 seconds. That is, the probability that the variable display time is 0.05 sec is 999/1000, and the probability that it is 10 sec is 1/1000. In other words, in the case where the ordinary figure storage number FN is 1 to 3, the ordinary fluctuation display time is set to 0.05 sec, which is mostly short-time fluctuation, and is rarely set to 10 sec, which is long-term fluctuation. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the usual figure storage number FN is 4, one type of 0.6 sec is prepared as a selectable variable display time. That is, when the usual figure reserved storage number FN is 4, the fluctuation display time of 0.6 sec is always selected and set regardless of the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter C5.

  In addition, the stop display time (determined display period) in the general game play times, that is, the duration of the state in which the general map is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the general map win / fail lottery, depends on the length of the variable display time. It is uniformly set to 0.4 sec.

  On the other hand, in the common map variable display time table for the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10B, one type of 20.0 sec is prepared as a selectable variable display time. That is, when the winning / no-win lottery mode is the high probability mode, the variable display time of 20.0 sec is always selected and set regardless of the value of the normal fluctuation type counter C5. Note that the stop display time in the high probability mode is uniformly set to 0.4 sec as in the low probability mode.

<Various types of processing executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 602 in the main controller 162 advances the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 602 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors, for example (the detection sensors 391a to 391f) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, if it is determined that a ball has entered the first working port 62, a winning detection flag for the first working port is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 604, and a ball enters the second working port 63. When it is determined that a winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas, and when it is determined that a ball has entered the third operating port 64, the various storages are stored. A winning detection flag for the third working port is stored in the flag storage area. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the storage flag storage area.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 35 is executed. After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and the winning process for the activated ball part associated with winning in the operating ports 62 to 64 is performed in step S105, and this timer interrupt process Exit. The through winning process and the winning opening process will be described in detail below.

<Winning winning process>
First, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the through gate 35. If it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35, the main winning process is terminated. If it is determined that the ball has entered the through gate 35, in step S202, an external signal is output to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 to the management control device on the game hall side. Perform the setting process.

  In step S203, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area for storing the number of general-purpose hold information in the reserved role area Rc is read, and the general-purpose hold storage number FN is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S203, the main winning process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S203, the common figure reserved storage number FN is incremented by 1 in step S204. In step S205, a process of storing each value of the open random number counter C4 and the normal fluctuation type counter C5 is performed, and then the main winning process is terminated.

<Winning process for working port>
Next, the winning process for the operation port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the first operation port 62. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operation port 62, the process proceeds to step S302, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls is set.

  In subsequent step S303, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is read out, and the first special chart start-up stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is stored. Set the reserved storage number RaN. In step S304, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation port 62 to the management control device on the game hall side. Thereafter, in step S305, an information acquisition process for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  In the information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the number of start pending storages RaN set in step S303 is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), and if it is less than the upper limit value, the first result display unit The start hold storage number N of the hold area Ra for use is incremented by one. Then, each value such as the hit random number counter C1 is stored in the first storage area in the free storage area area of the first result display section reservation area Ra. If the start pending storage number RaN is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated without incrementing the start pending storage number N and storing each value such as the hit random number counter C1.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not entered the first operation port 62, it is determined in step S306 whether or not the game ball has entered the second operation port 63. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the second operating port 63, the process proceeds to step S307, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out 10 game balls is set. Then, the process of said step S303-S305 is performed and this prize winning process is complete | finished.

  If it is determined in step S306 that the game ball has not entered the second operation port 63, it is determined in step S308 whether or not the game ball has entered the third operation port 64. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the third operation port 64, the process proceeds to step S309, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball is set. Thereafter, the processes of steps S304 and S305 are executed, and the main winning process is terminated. In the information acquisition process of step S305, if each value such as the random number counter C1 is already stored in the second special figure execution area AE2, the information acquisition process is performed without changing (overwriting) those values. finish.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S308, that is, if no ball is entered in any of the operation ports 62 to 64, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, when a special-effects effect command such as a change command, a type command, or a change end command, or a normal-use effect command is set, it is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143. Further, output setting for the external terminal board 213 is performed according to information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

  Next, in step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS and the normal fluctuation type counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the variation type counters CS and C5 are incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S403, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game number is executed. In this game times control process, determination of success / failure of jackpot or the like and allocation determination of jackpot type are performed, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 75, and result display section AS in the main display unit 81 (main display section 43). , BS display control and the like.

  Thereafter, in step S404, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S405, an electric role support process for controlling a game in the ordinary game game is executed. In this electronic support support process, the support determination on the normal side, the setting of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display device 75, the display control of the display part 44 for the accessory, the electric accessory 66 provided in the second operation port 63 The drive control is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined operation is performed on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch controller 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once in the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area. That is, when an irregular hit such as a so-called stop hit is not performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the launch operation is performed.

  In a succeeding step S407, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602 and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes to be executed repeatedly has been completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S408, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S409, and the fluctuation type counter CS and the normal fluctuation type counter C5 are updated in step S410.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Each variation type counter CS, C5 can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S407 that the power failure flag has been set, a power shutdown has occurred, and therefore the power interruption process from step S411 is executed. That is, in step S411, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S412. After the access to the RAM 604 is prohibited in step S413, the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Here, with reference to FIG. 15 to FIG. 21, a supplementary description will be given of the game times control processing in step S <b> 403. As shown in FIG. 15, in the game times control process shown in the present embodiment, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in an opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S501, a game times control process (first special figure control process) for game times related to winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is performed in step S502. After executing and executing a game turn control process (second special figure control process) for a game turn related to winning in the third operating port 64 in step S503, the game turn control process is terminated. The basic flow is common to these two control processes. Hereinafter, first, the first special chart control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, and then, with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the second special feature control process will be mainly described. The special figure control process will be described.

<Control processing for the first special figure>
As shown in FIG. 16, in the first special chart control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is being performed on the first working port 62 or the second working port 63 (first special figure). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit AS of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the variable display flag (variable display information) for the first special figure is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it has been done. The variable display flag for the first special figure is stored when the variable display is started in the first result display section AS, and is erased when the design is stopped and the fixed display ends.

  If the game is not being played according to the first special figure, a negative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the game is related to the third operating port 64 (second special figure). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the variable display flag (variable display information) for the second special figure is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it has been done. The variable display flag for the second special figure is stored when the variable display is started in the second result display section BS, and the display corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and the final display is completed. It is erased when you do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game times according to the second special figure corresponds to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the first special figure control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S603 or step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the total number-of-holds storage area of the hold-ball storage area 642 is referred to and it is determined whether the number of hold information related to the first special figure is “0”. When the number of the hold information related to the first special figure is “0”, the first special figure control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the number of the hold information related to the first special figure is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

  In the data setting process according to the first special figure, first, the number of the hold information according to the first special figure is decremented by one. Thereafter, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reserved area Ra is moved to the first special figure execution area AE1, and the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reserved area Ra. Execute the process of shifting.

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area. Then, one LED that is lit on the main display unit 43 is turned off.

  After the above data setting process is performed, in step S606, a variation start process for the first special figure for starting the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 ( After executing the first special figure variation start process), the first special figure control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the first special chart variation start process in step S <b> 606 will be described.

<First special figure variation start processing>
In the first special figure variation start process, first, in step S701, a success / failure determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, with reference to the first special figure success / failure table (see FIG. 8), the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1, that is, the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the acquired numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information described above. In step S701, if the current winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning / non-winning determination is performed with reference to the high probability mode determining table (see FIG. 8B) according to the first special chart, and the high probability is determined. When the mode is not the mode, that is, when the mode is the low probability mode, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode according to the first special figure (see FIG. 8A). If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination out of the information stored in the first special figure execution area AE1, that is, numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, whether the above-described type determination information corresponds to information corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, or the 16R normal jackpot Specify whether it corresponds to the result.

  In step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603, a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 (first result display unit AS) of the main display unit 81 in the game round. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, a plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set. In step S704, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. In step S704, the MPU 602 stores information for specifying in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 whether the current game result is the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result. Specifically, a 16R probability variation flag is stored when the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result, and a 16R normal flag is stored when the result is a 16R ordinary jackpot result.

  After executing the setting process of step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game times according to the second special figure are being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the second forced end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. The second forced end flag is a flag indicating that the change display of the second special figure should be forcibly ended.

  Returning to the description of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is an outlier result, a negative determination is made in step S702, and the process proceeds to step S707. In step S707, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed. Specifically, the first special figure (picture) to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 (first result display unit AS) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current change is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. The information is specified from the stored stop result table for the detachment result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

  After performing the processes of steps S706 and S707, or when a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S708. In step S708, a variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the variable display time setting process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of any probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  When it is determined that the mode is not the high probability mode, that is, the mode is the low probability mode, the first special figure variation display time table for the low probability mode stored in the variation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 in step S802. , The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the first special figure fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the current lottery result is a jackpot result, the fluctuation display time is 16 to 20 seconds, and the result is an outlier result. In relation to the result of the lottery lottery, the relationship between the general-purpose variation type counter C5 and the variation display time is defined so that the variation display time is 3 to 20 seconds. Specifically, when the game time this time corresponds to reach display, it is 16 to 20 seconds, and when it does not support reach display, it is 3 to 8 seconds. When the reach display is not supported, the variable display time is shortened as the number of hold information of the first special figure increases. As a result, the game progress is facilitated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the first special figure variable display for the high probability mode stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 in step S803. By referring to the time table, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In the first special figure variable display time table for the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 19B, when the current lottery result is a jackpot result, the variable display time is 16 as in the low probability mode. ~ 20 sec. However, when the current lottery result is an outlier result, the variable display time is set to be 3600 sec, which is much longer than that in the low probability mode.

  After execution of steps S802 and S803, in step S804, the variable display time acquired in steps S802 and S803 is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604. The value of the variable display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. Thereafter, the process for setting the fluctuation display time is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the first special figure variation start process of FIG. 17, after execution of step S708, the variation command and the type command are set in step S709. The change command and the type command include information indicating that these commands correspond to the first special figure. The change command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The notification / production control device 143 determines the contents of the effects in the special figure game times based on the received change command and type command, and controls various devices so that the contents of the determined effects are executed. . The contents of this effect include a symbol variation display mode on the symbol display device 75. Further, the variation command is transmitted to the display control device 660 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 660 receives the variation command, so that the symbol corresponding to the special figure game times is received. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that the variable display is performed.

  The change command includes information on the change display time. Here, since the variable display time when the reach display is supported as described above is different from the variable display time when the reach display is not supported, information on whether or not reach has occurred is included in the change command. Even if not, the notification / production control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can specify the presence or absence of reach from the information of the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  After executing the setting process of step S709, the process proceeds to step S710, and after the variable display of the first result display unit AS in the main display unit 81 is started, the first special figure change start process is ended. In the process of step S710, the variable display flag for the first special figure is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, variable display) according to the first special figure are being executed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 16, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game is being played according to the first special figure, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S708 of FIG. 17 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S607, it is determined in step S608 whether or not the first forced end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. The first compulsory end flag is a flag indicating that the variable display according to the first special figure should be compulsorily terminated, and the game times according to the second special figure correspond to the jackpot result or the special hit result. And stored when the game times according to the second special figure is started during the execution of the game times according to the first special figure (see step S1106 in FIG. 21 described later).

  If the first forced termination flag is not stored, the variable display process is executed in step S609, and then the first special figure control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S608, that is, if the first forced end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604, in step S610, a special hit is made at the game times related to the second special figure. It is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the result. If a negative determination is made in step S610, it is determined in step S611 whether or not it is the game turn start timing corresponding to the jackpot result, according to the second special figure. If a negative determination is made in step S611, the process proceeds to step S609 to execute the above-described variation display process.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S610 or step S611, a variation end process is executed in step S612. In the variation end process, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed in the first result display unit AS so as to be in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, a fixed display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the variable display flag for the first special figure stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 is erased when the final display is completed.

  In step S613, after setting the change end command, the first special figure control process is ended. The change end command set in step S613 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The notification / production control device 143 executes a process for ending the production in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted to the display control device 660 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 660 receives the change end command to respond to the game result of the game time, etc. The combination of the symbols that have been displayed is confirmed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game rotations independently by the alerting / production control device 143 or the display control device 660 without transmitting the change end command.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S607, that is, if the variable display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S612, where the above-described change end process and the change end command setting process in step S613 are sequentially performed. 1 The special figure control process is terminated.

<Second special figure control process>
Next, the second special figure control process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the second special figure control process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game is being performed on the third operation port 64 (second special figure). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the variable display flag (variable display information) for the second special figure is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it has been done. The variable display flag for the second special figure is stored when the variable display is started in the second result display section BS, and is erased when the display is stopped and the final display is finished.

  If the game is not being played according to the second special figure, a negative determination is made in step S901, and the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the game is related to the first special figure. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit AS of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed.

  If a positive determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not the game times according to the first special figure corresponds to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, the second special figure control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S903, or if a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the second special figure holding information (each value such as the hit random number counter C1) is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2 of the holding ball storage area 642. When the hold information of the second special figure is stored in the second special figure execution area AE2, the second special figure control process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the second special figure holding information is not stored in the second special figure execution area AE2, the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, data setting processing is performed. In the data setting process, a process of setting the hold information stored in the second execution area AE2 as the hold information for determination of success / failure is performed. In the present embodiment, since the same process as the data setting process is performed when winning the second operating port 63, this process can be omitted.

  In the subsequent step S906, the variation start process for the second special figure (the second special figure variation start process) for starting the symbol variation display on the second result display unit BS and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 75. Is executed, the second special figure control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special chart variation start process in step S906 will be described.

<Variation start processing for second special drawing>
In the second special figure variation start process, first, in step S1101, a success / failure determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, with reference to the second special figure success / failure table (see FIG. 9), the information for success / failure determination among various information stored in the second special figure execution area AE2, that is, the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the numerical information according to the above matches the jackpot numerical information described above. In step S1101, if the current winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the winning / not-judging determination is performed with reference to the high-probability mode corresponding to the second special chart (see FIG. 9B). When the mode is not the mode, that is, when the mode is the low probability mode, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode according to the second special figure (see FIG. 9A). If the determination result in step S1101 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, and the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, the information for type determination among various information stored in the second special figure execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2, and the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 are stored. With reference to the distribution table, it is specified whether the grasped type determination information corresponds to the information corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result.

  In step S1104, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603, the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 (second result display unit BS) of the main display unit 81 in the game round. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, a plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set. In step S1104, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S1104, information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the current game result is the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, a 16R probability variation flag is stored when the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result, and a 16R normal flag is stored when the result is a 16R ordinary jackpot result.

  After executing the setting process in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the game times according to the first special figure are being executed. If a positive determination is made in step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the first forced end flag is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. The first forced end flag is a flag indicating that the variable display of the first special figure should be forcibly ended.

  Returning to the description of step S1102, if the determination result in step S1101 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S1102 and an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, and the flow proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, a special hit result stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, a special hit result stop result table preliminarily stored in the ROM 603 for a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 (second result display unit BS) of the main display unit 81 in the game round. And the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In the stop result table for the special hit result, a plurality of pictures to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set. In step S1108, information indicating the picture corresponding to the special hit result is stored in the RAM 604. If the current game result is a special hit result, the special hit flag is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. After executing the process of step S1108, the processes of steps S1105 and S1106 described above are executed.

  If the determination result in step S1101 is an outlier result, a negative determination is made in step S1102 and step S1107, and the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed. Specifically, an off-result stored in advance in the ROM 603 for a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 (second result display unit BS) of the main display unit 81 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

  After performing the process of step S1106 or step S1109, or when a negative determination is made in step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1110. In step S1110, a variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed.

  The variable display time setting process in step S1110 is performed in the same manner as the variable display time setting process (FIG. 18) for the first special figure already described. The process of setting the variable display time for the second special figure will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18. In this process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, the second special figure variation for the low probability mode stored in the variation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is determined in step S802. With reference to the display time table, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired.

  In the second special figure fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 19 (c), when the current lottery result is a jackpot result, the fluctuation display time is 16 to 20 seconds, and the special hit result or miss If the result is 3600 sec, the relationship between the universal variation type counter C5 and the variation display time is defined in association with the result of the lottery determination. That is, in the first special figure fluctuation display time table for low probability mode (see FIG. 19A) and the second special figure fluctuation display time table for low probability mode, the winning result is a jackpot result. Although the variable display time is common, the variable display time when the winning result is a result other than the jackpot result is set to be extremely longer for the second special figure than for the first special figure. ing.

  As has already been described, the success / failure lottery of the second special drawing has a special winning result as one of the lottery results, and is preferentially given over the success / failure lottery of the first special drawing without the special winning result. Under such a configuration, when the variation display time of the first special figure and the second special figure is set as described above, the first lottery figure is more than the second special figure when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. The special drawing is adjusted so that it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery.

  That is, in the second special figure, the variable display time in the case of the special winning result is 3600 seconds, which is very long, so the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 is determined from the winning timing to the third operating port 64. It is a big delay. For this reason, even though the variable winning device 65 is opened for 1.8 seconds, it is difficult for the player to receive profits. In addition, the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200 common between the 1st special chart and the 2nd special chart, and in any of the winning lotteries, most of the results will be other than the jackpot result. The fluctuation display time of the second special figure is extremely longer than that of the first special figure. For this reason, when the execution frequency of the success / failure lottery per unit time (for example, 1 hour) is compared, the second special figure is much inferior to the first special figure. In other words, it is easier to win a big hit in a shorter time and the time efficiency is better when receiving the lottery with the first special figure than when receiving the lottery with the second special figure.

  With such a configuration, it is always possible to win a game ball to the third operation port 64 and many of the game balls fired to the right route are guided to the third operation port 64, but the lottery mode However, in the low probability mode, the player is prevented from aiming to win the third operating port 64.

  By the way, under the above configuration, there is a case where a game ball is unintentionally awarded to the third operation port 64 when the winning / raft lottery mode is the low probability mode. At this time, if the game times of the first special figure are started after the game times of the second special figure are finished, the game times of the first special figure until the game times of the second special figure of 3600 sec are finished. Is not started, and the state in which the game progress is substantially stopped continues for a long time. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the game times of the first special figure and the second special figure can be executed in parallel, the game times of the second special figure are being executed during the execution. The game times of one special figure can be started, and the occurrence of the inconvenience is preferably suppressed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 18, when an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 801, i.e., when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S <b> 803, for the high probability mode stored in the variable display time table storage area 623. The second special figure fluctuation display time table is referred to, and the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired.

  In the second special figure fluctuation display time table for the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), when the current lottery result is a jackpot result, the fluctuation display time is 16 to 20 sec. If the result is 1 sec, the relationship between the normal map fluctuation type counter C5 and the fluctuation display time is defined in association with the result of the success / failure lottery. That is, when the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the variable display time when the result is a result other than the jackpot result is set shorter than that when the lottery mode is the low probability mode.

  With this setting, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the winning / losing lottery with the second special figure than with the first special figure. That is, in the high probability mode situation, in addition to being able to digest the second special figure game times per time in a relatively short time, most of the results of the lottery results will be special win results, so special win results The opening / closing execution mode corresponding to is likely to occur frequently. In other words, it is possible to increase the number of possessed balls by continuing to receive the winning / failing lottery on the second special figure side.

  Incidentally, in the variable display time table of the first special figure in the case of the high probability mode (see FIG. 19B), the variable display time in the case of an outlier result is 3600 sec. It is disadvantageous compared to the second special figure when the special winning result is not included in the result of the lottery of the first special figure, and it is also disadvantageous compared to the second special figure in terms of variable display time. By doing so, the difference in the degree of advantage between the first special figure and the second special figure can be further clarified.

  After execution of steps S802 and S803, in step S804, the variable display time acquired in steps S802 and S803 is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21, after the variable display time setting process in step S1110 is executed, a variable command and a type command are set in step S1111. The change command and the type command include information indicating that these commands correspond to the second special figure. The change command and type command set in step S1111 are transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14).

  After executing the setting process in step S1111, the process proceeds to step S1112, and after the variable display of the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 81 is started, the second special figure variation start process is ended. In the process of step S1112, the variable display flag for the second special figure is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, variable display) according to the second special figure are being executed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 20, if an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if it is determined that the game is being played according to the second special figure, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S1110 of FIG. 21 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S907, it is determined in step S908 whether the second forced end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. The second forced end flag is a flag indicating that the variation display according to the second special figure should be forcibly ended, and the game times according to the first special figure correspond to the jackpot result and This is stored when the game times according to the first special figure is started during the execution of the game times according to the second special figure (see step S706 in FIG. 17).

  If the second forced end flag is not stored, the variable display process is executed in step S909, and then the second special figure control process ends. In the variable display processing in step S909, the pattern is changed by performing display control (light emission control of the display segment) so that the display segments are turned on and off in a predetermined order in the second result display unit BS. Display. On the other hand, if the second forced end flag is stored, it is determined in step S910 whether or not it is the game time start timing corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times according to the first special figure. If a negative determination is made in step S910, the process proceeds to step S909 to execute the above-described variation display process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911 to execute a rewrite process of the stop result. In the stop result rewriting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current game result according to the second special figure corresponds to the special hit result. When it does not correspond to the special hit result, that is, when it corresponds to the outlier result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the outlook result) determined in the second special figure variation start process in step S906 is written. Replacement is avoided.

  On the other hand, if the current game result relating to the second special figure corresponds to the special hit result, the stop picture determined in the second special figure variation start process (corresponding to the special hit result) Rewrite the pattern to the pattern corresponding to the result. By such processing, the special hit result of the second special figure is invalidated, and the stop result (stop result corresponding to the jackpot result) displayed on the first result display unit AS is given priority. That is, while the stop pattern corresponding to the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the first result display section AS, the stop pattern corresponding to the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is also displayed on the second result display section BS. Is avoided. Along with this, both the opening / closing execution mode based on the fact that the result of the lottery of the first special figure is a jackpot result and the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the lottery of the second special figure being a special hit result Is avoided from being executed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, whether or not it is the start timing of the game times when the result of the lottery of the opponent's game times is a big hit between the first special figure and the second special figure (See step S910 and step S611 in FIG. 16), and when it is the start timing, it is configured to immediately end its own game times (see step S912 and step S612 in FIG. 16). For this reason, if a jackpot result is obtained in one of the first special figure and the second special figure, after the start of the one game round, the other game round will not start during the execution. Both the 1st special drawing and the 2nd special drawing lottery will not result in a jackpot. Therefore, if the result of the lottery of the second special figure is a special winning result, the game corresponding to the result of the outage of either the first special figure or the second special figure is subject to forced termination. This is a case where the other lottery lottery results in a jackpot while the times are executed. In this case, the variation display time is shortened in the game times corresponding to the above-described one outage result, and the game ends. However, since the result of the lottery determination is the outage result, the stop result rewriting process is not required. There is no stop result rewriting process in the first special figure control process of FIG. 16, and the current game result relating to the second special figure is changed to a special hit result in the stop result rewriting process in step S910. This is why it is determined whether or not it corresponds (in other words, whether or not it corresponds to an outlier result). In addition, the configuration of forced termination is not limited to the above configuration, and it may be configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the game time when the result of the opponent's game time winning lottery is a big hit Good.

  After execution of step S911, a change end process is executed in step S912. In the variation end process, the main display unit 81 is configured to stop and display the pattern on the second result display unit BS in a manner determined in advance or a mode determined in the rewriting process in step S911. Perform display control. In step S913, after setting a change end command, the second special figure control process is ended. The change end command set in step S913 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, if the fluctuation display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S912, where the fluctuation end processing and the setting process of the fluctuation end command in step S913 are sequentially performed. The graphic control process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S404 in FIG. 14 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the present embodiment, there are provided a non-special game state in which a game proceeds based on a ball entering the operation ports 62 to 64 and a special game state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is opened. ing. The non-special gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and an advantageous gaming state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. The normal game state / advantageous game state is switched. The advantageous gaming state has a higher probability of being a big hit compared to the normal gaming state, and since the special winning can be repeated at a relatively short cycle, it is possible to obtain a payout of the game ball. It is a game state advantageous to.

  In the game state transition process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1202, and is it the timing at which one special figure game round ends (timing at which the variation display of the picture in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS ends)? Determine whether or not. If it is not the time when the special figure game times have ended, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If the game round has ended, the process proceeds to step S1203, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round (the result of the above-mentioned lottery determination) corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation flag, the 16R normal flag, and the special hit flag is stored in the RAM 604. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S1204. In the start processing, first, an opening standby time (start standby period) is set for waiting for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode without starting the opening of the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604.

  In a succeeding step S1205, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206, and “16” is set to the round number counter RC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, it means that the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the special winning result, and therefore, in step S1207, the round number counter RC is set to “1”.

  After executing the processing of step S1206 and step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, an opening command setting process is performed. The set opening command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 660 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed. The contents of the effect include a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 143 to the display control device 660 as a display content command. In the display control device 660, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / production control device 143, the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that the moving image display of the character or the like, the background image, etc. are switched.

  After executing the opening command setting process in step S1208, the external signal setting process is executed in step S1209, and the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process in step S1209, it is determined whether or not any of the various jackpot correspondence flags and special hit flags is stored in the RAM 604. If any of the flags is stored, the game hall A signal indicating that a big hit or special hit has occurred is output to the management control device on the side. By receiving this external signal, the management control device recognizes that it has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Returning to the description of step S1201, if the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, in step S1211, a special winning opening / closing process is executed.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 65a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 65c is set to the driving state on condition that the round number counter RC is “1” or more. The mouth 65a is opened. When the special winning opening 65a is open, a predetermined time (30 sec or 1.8 sec in the present embodiment) has passed since the opening of the special winning opening 65a or a predetermined number (this implementation) On the condition that 10 game balls have won in this form, the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 65c is stopped and the special winning opening 65a is closed.

  After executing the special winning opening / closing process in step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, the process proceeds to step S1213. In step S1213, it is determined whether the ending waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S1214, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, End the state transition process.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. When the 16R probability variation flag is stored, if the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604, the high probability mode flag is stored. If not stored, the high probability mode flag is stored. In addition, when the 16R normal flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604, if the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604, these are deleted. Keep it up. Thereafter, various flags (16R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, special hit flag) related to the opening / closing execution mode are deleted. Note that the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result is returned to the gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the winning / losing lottery mode is not changed.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power support process in step S405 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the electric role support process, first, the general game game time control process is executed in step S1301, and then the general game state transition process is executed in step S1302, and the support process is terminated. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described in detail.

<General game play control processing>
First, the general game play control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the general game play control process, it is determined in step S1401 whether or not it is in a support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a support state flag is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. The support state flag is stored when shifting to a support state in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 66 is controlled in a general game state transition process, which will be described later. Similarly, when the support state is ended in the general game state transition process. Will be erased.

  If it is in the support state, the ordinary game play control process is terminated. That is, when the player is in the support state, the usual game game is not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred.

  If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S1402 whether the normal game is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not the normal-variation display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. The normal fluctuation display flag is stored when the variable display of the accessory display unit 44 is started, and is deleted when the fluctuation display ends.

  If it is not during the usual game play, it is determined in step S1403 whether the universal figure storage number FN is zero. If the ordinary figure storage number FN is 0, the ordinary figure game times control process is terminated.

  If the usual figure reserved memory number FN is not 0, a usual figure data setting process for setting the data stored in the reserved role area Rc for electric role for variable display is executed in step S1404. In the usual data setting process, the usual figure reserved storage number FN is decremented by one, and the data stored in the first area Rc1 of the electronic character reservation area Rc is moved to the usual figure execution area AE3. And the process which shifts the data stored in each memory | storage area of the electric power holding area Rc is performed. That is, the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side, and the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared and the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1. The data in each area is shifted such that the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2 and the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3. Then, one LED that is lit is extinguished on the general-purpose reservation number display section FM in the accessory display section 44.

  After the execution of step S1404, the usual figure variation start process is executed in step S1405, and then this ordinary figure game times control process is terminated. Here, the common map change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the usual figure change start process, first, a usual figure determination process is executed in step S1501. In the common-use determination processing, the value of the open random number counter C4 stored in the general-use execution area AE3 matches the numerical information corresponding to the release result with reference to the general-use determination table (see FIG. 10A). Determine whether you are doing it. If the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is determined in step S1501 is an open result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 and the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, a stop result setting process for the release result is executed. Specifically, a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44 in the game round is specified from the stop result table for the release result stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. To do. In step S1503, an opening flag is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604 as information for the MPU 602 to specify that the current game result is an opening result.

  On the other hand, if the determination result in step S1501 is an outlier result, a negative determination is made in step S1502, and the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1504, a stop result setting process for an outlier is executed. Specifically, a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44 in the game round is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. To do.

  After execution of step S1503 or S1504, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When a negative determination is made in step S1505, in step S1506, refer to the normal fluctuation display time table for the low probability mode stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 (see FIG. 10B). Then, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current normal map fluctuation type counter C5 is acquired. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the normal map variable display time table for the high probability mode stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 in step S1507 (see FIG. 10C). The fluctuation display time corresponding to the current value of the normal fluctuation type counter C5 is acquired.

  After execution of step S1506 or S1507, in step S1508, the normal map display time obtained in steps S1506 and S1507 is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604. The value of the normal map display time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

  In the subsequent step S1509, a common map change command and a general map type command are set. The common map change command includes information on the general map change display time, and the general map type command includes information on the game result (whether it is a release result). These set commands are transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 14). In the notification / production control device 143, the contents of the production in the usual game game times are determined based on the received common figure change command and the common figure type command, and various contents are executed so that the decided contents of the production are executed. Control the equipment. The contents of this effect include a variable display mode of symbols on a general-purpose display unit (not shown) of the symbol display device 75. In addition, the command for changing the normal map is transmitted to the display control device 660 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 660 receives the command for changing the normal map to cope with the general game game times. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that the symbol variation display is performed.

  After that, in step S1510, the display of change in the pattern is started on the accessory display unit 44, and the normal figure change start process is ended.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, that is, if it is determined that the normal game game is currently being played, whether or not the current variable game game variable display time has elapsed in step S1406. Determine whether. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S1407, and then the ordinary game play control process is terminated. In the variable display process, display of the accessory display unit 44 is controlled so that the display segments are turned on and off in a predetermined order in the accessory display unit 44.

  On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed, the variable end process is executed in step S1408, and then the common figure game times control process ends. In the change end process of step S1408, the information stored in the RAM 604 in the process of step S1503 or S1504 of FIG. 25 is specified, and the symbol corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44. The accessory display unit 44 is controlled.

<Normal game state transition processing>
Next, the general game state transition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the usual game state transition process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the support state is in effect. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display of the symbol of one ordinary game game is finished. If it is not the end timing of the usual map change display, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  When it is the end timing of the normal map display, the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the current general map game time corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether an open flag is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. If the release flag is not stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If the release flag is stored, a support state start process is executed in step S1604. In this process, a waiting time for the usual figure opening is set. As already described, in this embodiment, 0 sec is set as the waiting time. In the subsequent step S1605, “1” is set to the second round number counter RC2. The second round number counter RC2 is used to count the number of times the electric combination 66 is opened, and is decremented by 1 every time the electric combination 66 is opened.

  Thereafter, in step S1606, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that the support state has occurred to the management control device on the game hall side. After execution of step S1606, the gaming state transition process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1601 that it is in the support state, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the standby time for the ordinary figure opening has elapsed. If the standby time has elapsed, the accessory opening / closing process is executed in step S1608.

  In the accessory opening / closing process, when the electric accessory 66 is closed, the driving units 244 and 246 are set in the driving state on the condition that the second round number counter RC2 is “1” or more. The accessory 66 is switched to the open state. Further, when the electric accessory 66 is being opened, a predetermined time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the opening of the electric accessory 66 or a predetermined number (in the present embodiment). On condition that five (5) game balls have won the second operating port 63, the drive state of the drive units 244, 246 is stopped and the electric accessory 66 is switched to the closed state. In the accessory opening / closing process, when the electric accessory 66 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the standby time for the usual ending is set. As already described, in the present embodiment, the standby time is 0 sec. Set.

  After the execution of the accessory opening / closing process in step S1608, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the value of the second round number counter RC2 is 0, that is, whether or not one opening of the electric accessory 66 has been completed. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1609, it is determined in step S1610 whether the ending waiting time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1610, a support state end process is executed in step S1611, and then the gaming state transition process ends. In the process of step S <b> 1611, the release flag stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 is deleted. If a negative determination is made in step S1607, S1609, or S1610, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, since the waiting times for the ordinary map opening and the ordinary ending are both set to 0 sec, the processes in steps S1607 and S1610 may be omitted.

<About the flow of ordinary games>
Next, a general game flow will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the flow of a general game.

  In the present embodiment, the game flow differs depending on the presence or absence of the general map hold information when the normal variable display is started. Here, a description will be given separately for the case where the number of common map hold FN is 0 (when there is no general map hold information) and the case where it is 1 or more (when there is general map hold information). Here, for the sake of convenience, it is assumed that all of the game balls launched on the left route win the through gate 35.

  Here, the number FN of the reserved figure storage FN means that the first area Rc1 of the same area Rc regardless of whether or not the reserved information exists in the execution area AE3 for the reserved figure in the reserved role area Rc. This means a state in which the usual map hold information is not stored in the fourth area Rc4. In addition, the case where the number-of-pending-storing memory number FN is 1 or more means that, in a situation in which a general-purpose game round is being executed, the general-plot information that is not yet the execution target of the general-purpose game round is the first It means a state stored in at least one of the area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4. It should be noted that, as in the case where a winning to the through gate 35 occurs in a situation in which the usual game game is not executed and there is no holding information in any of the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, When the usual figure reserved memory number FN becomes 1 only for a moment, it is included in the state where the ordinary figure reserved memory number FN is zero.

<Regarding the case where the ordinary figure storage number FN is 0>
First, with reference to FIG. 27 (a), a description will be given of a case where the common figure reserved storage number FN is zero. Here, in FIG. 27A, the numbers in square brackets indicate the order of the game balls. For example, [1] in FIGS. 27 (a1) and (a4) indicates that the first (first ball) game ball passes through the through gate 35 at timing t1, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35 at time t4. 66 (specific area RA2). As already explained, since the variable display time in the ordinary game game time is almost set to 0.05 sec (see FIG. 10B), the variable display time in FIG. 27A is 0.05 sec. Suppose that In addition, since most of the results of the lottery win / fail lottery result in an open result (see FIG. 10 (a)), it is assumed that the results of the lottery win / fail lottery in FIG. 27 (a) are all open results.

  When the first game ball wins the through gate 35 at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. After the elapse of 0.05 sec which is the variable display time, the normal map is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the release result, and the state is maintained for 0.4 sec which is the stop display time.

  When the stop display time elapses at timing t2, the usual opening period is 0 sec. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (a3), the electric accessory 66 is immediately switched from the closed state to the open state. After the state is maintained for 0.1 sec which is the opening time, the state is returned to the closed state again. In other words, after 0.45 seconds after the game ball has won the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 is shifted to the open state, and 0.55 seconds after the game ball has won the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 is in the closed state. (Timing t3).

  On the other hand, the required period until the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2) is set to 0.6 sec as described above (see FIG. 5A). . For this reason, as shown in FIG. 27 (a4), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 at a timing t4 that is delayed by 0.05 sec from the timing t3 at which the electric accessory 66 returns to the closed state. To do. That is, the time difference (phase difference) A of the arrival timing of the game ball with respect to the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 is 0.15 sec, and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing is 0.05 sec. That is, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 cannot reach the specific area RA2 (acceptance area RA1) during the opening of the electric accessory 66 and does not win the second operation port 63.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the one-time general game game period (a period from the start of the general game game time to the start of the next general game game time) based on the winning to the through gate 35 is: The sum of the variable display time (0.05 sec) in the ordinary game times, the stop display time (0.4 sec) in the game times, and the release time (0.1 sec) in the electric utility 66 is 0.55 sec. (See FIG. 27 (a3)). On the other hand, the winning cycle (winning interval) from when the first game ball (preceding ball) wins the through gate 35 until the second game ball (following ball) wins the through gate 35 is a game. It approximates to 0.06 sec, which is the sphere launch cycle (launch interval), and is the same or substantially the same as the same cycle (see FIGS. 27A1 and 27A4).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-time ordinary game period is shorter than the winning cycle (game ball firing cycle) to the through gate 35. For this reason, in the ordinary game (a series of games consisting of ordinary game times and a support state) started based on the winning of the first game ball to the through gate 35, the second game ball is placed in the through gate 35. Finish faster than winning. Therefore, after the first game ball wins the through gate 35, the second game ball is not won in the through gate 35 until the support state of the electric accessory 66 based on the win ends. No common map hold information is added. As a result, after the electric accessory 66 returns to the closed state at the timing t <b> 3, a standby time for waiting for the second game ball to win the through gate 35 occurs.

  Then, when the second game ball wins the through gate 35 at timing t4, the normal drawing winning / losing lottery and the normal game play are executed based on the winning, and after the elapse of 0.45 sec from the winning, the electric accessory 66 is set to 0. Open for 1 sec. After the electric accessory 66 is closed, as in the case of the first game ball, it waits for the third game ball to win the through gate 35. This flow is the same for winning the third and subsequent game balls. In any win, the general game based on the winning of the preceding ball ends earlier than the winning of the succeeding ball to the through gate 35. Relationship is maintained.

  That is, under the situation where the usual figure storage number FN is 0, the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 always depends on the winning timing to the through gate 35. For this reason, the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 (a period from one opening timing to the next opening timing) is 0.6 sec in accordance with the winning cycle to the through gate 35 (see FIG. 27 (a3)). On the other hand, the arrival period (arrival interval) of the game ball passing through the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2) is 0.6 sec which is a winning period (game ball firing period) to the through gate 35. Approximate and the same or substantially the same period (see FIG. 27 (a4)).

  As described above, since the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 is equal to the arrival cycle of the game ball, the time difference A with a delay of 0.15 sec and the time difference B with a delay of 0.05 sec described above are in any winnings. It occurs in the same way. Accordingly, when the usual figure storage number FN is 0, although the electric accessory 66 is released each time, the second operation port 63 continues to be in a state where no game ball is won.

<Regarding the case where the number of ordinary reserved memories FN is 1 or more>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27 (b), a case will be described in which the common figure reserved storage number FN is 1 or more. Here, for the sake of convenience, the description is advanced on the assumption that the number-of-common-use storages FN is 3 or less, and the common-variation display time is set to 0.05 sec as in FIG. In this case, the flow from timing t1 to timing t3 is the same as in the case of FIG.

  When the electric accessory 66 returns to the closed state at the timing t3, since the usual figure holding memory number FN is 1 or more, as shown in FIG. 27 (b2), the winning of the second game ball to the through gate 35 is won. The next ordinary game game will start without waiting. In the present embodiment, since the usual figure ending period is set to 0 sec, the next usual figure game round is started as soon as the closing of the electric accessory 66 is completed. For this reason, when the general-purpose reserved memory number FN is 1 or more, the next general-purpose game number of times FN is advanced by the waiting time (0.05 sec) compared to the case where the general-purpose reserved memory number FN is 0. Will be started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27 (b3), the opening cycle of the electric utility item 66 is 0.55 sec, in which the waiting time is shortened. On the other hand, the arrival period (arrival interval) of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 66 is 0.6 sec as in the case of FIG.

  As described above, when the usual figure reserved storage number FN is 1 or more, a deviation of 0.05 sec occurs between the release cycle of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival cycle of the game ball. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 27 (b4), the time difference A of the arrival timing of the game ball with respect to the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing are as follows: As in the case of FIG. 27A, the delay is 0.15 sec and 0.05 sec, respectively, whereas the second game ball is 0.2 sec and 0.1 sec respectively. Become. That is, the arrival timing is further delayed by 0.05 sec with respect to the opening timing and closing timing, and the time differences A and B change according to the difference (0.05 sec) between the opening period and the arrival period.

  Such changes in the time differences A and B are generated and accumulated by 0.05 sec each time the ordinary game is repeated. For this reason, the release period and the arrival timing are eventually matched in the repetitive process of the ordinary game, and the game ball wins the second operation port 63. Incidentally, in the case shown in FIG. 27 (b), the change width per game time (difference between the release period and the arrival period) in the time differences A and B is 0.05 sec, so the ordinary game is played 11 times. As a result, a change of the same amount as that of one cycle of the open cycle (0.55 sec) occurs, and it makes a round. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 66 is 0.1 sec, which is twice the above-mentioned change width, the specific region RA2 (acceptance region) during the opening of the electric accessory 66 is twice in 11 changes. The game ball can reach RA1). In other words, the game ball can win the second operating port 63 with a probability of 2/11 (about 1/6).

  By the way, in the above configuration, a game ball can be won in the second operation port 63 by repeating the game in the state in which the number of reserved drawings FN is 1 or more, so that an opportunity to win the second operation port 63 is given. In order to provide it appropriately, it is desirable that there is an opportunity to reliably store the figure reserved memory number FN, and that the figure reserved memory number FN stored by the opportunity can be stably maintained thereafter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by appropriately devising the normal map variable display time in relation to the general-purpose reserved memory number FN, appropriate securing of the opportunity to increase the general-purpose reserved memory number FN and the general-purpose reserved memory number FN It is possible to maintain stable. Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 10, 28 and 29. FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing the flow of a general game, and FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change in the time difference A of the arrival timing with respect to the opening timing and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing. In FIG. 29, the case where the arrival timing is a leading phase with respect to the opening timing or the closing timing is positive, and the case where the reaching timing is a lagging phase is negative.

  As already described, in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode, when the number of stored common map FN at the time of displaying the map variation is 1 to 3, the map variation display time with a probability of 1/1000. Is set to 10 sec (see FIG. 10B). If the general map variable display time is set to 10 seconds, the one general game game period (the period from the start of the general map game time to the start of the next general game game time) is the variable display time. A total of 10 seconds, 0.4 seconds that is the stop display time, and 0.1 seconds that is the opening time of the electric utility item 66 is 10.5 seconds. During this time, the winnings to the through gate 35 are put on hold with an upper limit of 4 pieces, and the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec. That is, about 17 game balls can be launched in the above period, and the usual figure reserved memory number FN can be increased up to the upper limit number (4) (see FIGS. 28A and 28B). (See timing t11 to t12).

  In this way, by setting the normal figure variation display time so that the normal figure game period is longer than four times the game ball launch period (winning period to the through gate 35), An opportunity to increase FN can be suitably provided. In addition, it is usually configured as a structure that does not store (or is difficult to store) ordinary maps on hold, and a configuration that stores (or facilitates storing) ordinary maps on hold due to the prolonged variable display time, whether or not ordinary map reservations are stored. It is possible to control these by probability setting using random numbers. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the expected winning value for the second operation port 63 at the design stage of the gaming machine, and it becomes possible to easily adjust the ease of winning.

  After the common figure reserved storage number FN is maximized as described above, the common figure fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec with a probability of 1000/1000 (see FIG. 10B). For this reason, as shown in FIG. 28, after the variable display time of 10 sec is set, the variable display time is set to 0.6 sec without exception. In FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, for the sake of convenience, the start timing of the first game round and the winning timing of the game ball to the first through gate 35 coincide with each other after the end of the game round in which the variable display time is 10 sec. It is supposed to be.

  When the usual figure fluctuation display time is set to 0.6 sec, as shown in FIGS. 28C and 28D, the one-time usual figure game period is 0.6 sec. The total is 1.1 sec, which is 0.4 sec, which is the time, and 0.1 sec, which is the open time of the electric accessory 66. Since the winning cycle (game ball firing cycle) to the through gate 35 is 0.6 sec, one or two game balls can be awarded to the through gate 35 in the above-mentioned 1.1 sec normal game period. Yes, it is possible to replenish the usual map hold information. In other words, after the number of memorandum reserved FN reaches four, the one-time phantom game period is longer than the winning cycle for the through gate 35, so Can be supplemented with a cycle shorter than the execution cycle). As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game while maintaining the usual figure reserved memory number FN at the upper limit only by continuing the natural launch operation.

  Since the stop display time and the release time are fixed, the opening period when the normal figure change display time is 0.6 sec is the same as the above normal figure game period as shown in FIG. 28 (d). 1.1 sec. On the other hand, the arrival period of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2) is 0.6 sec. Therefore, the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 in this case is shorter by 0.1 sec than the two arrival cycles (1.2 sec) of the game balls.

  For this reason, the time difference A of the arrival timing of the game ball with respect to the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 and the time difference B of the arrival timing with respect to the closing timing are each 0 in the case of the first game ball as shown in FIG. .4 sec advance and 0.5 sec advance, whereas the third game ball advances 0.3 sec and 0.4 sec, respectively. That is, when the usual figure change display time is 0.6 sec, the time differences A and B change every 0.1 second by 0.1 sec every time the ordinary figure game is played once. In this case, the ordinary game is played 11 times, so that the time differences A and B change by one period of the opening period (1.1 sec), and the required number of game balls required at that time is 22 ((( 1.2 sec × 11) /0.6 sec).

  However, as shown in FIG. 29, the time difference A of the ninth game ball and the time difference A of the twenty-second game ball are both the same 0 and equal. Such a relationship occurs similarly in the case of the seventh game ball and the case of the 20th game ball, for example. That is, the time differences A and B in the odd-numbered game balls are the same as the time differences A and B in the even-numbered game balls after the change for the half period of the release period has occurred. For this reason, the change for the half period of the open period occurs, so that the changes of the time differences A and B are completed. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 66 is 0.1 sec, which is the same as the change width per game time in the time differences A and B, a change corresponding to a half cycle of the opening cycle occurs (11 games). It is possible for the game ball to reach while the electric accessory 66 is released only once while the ball reaches the electric accessory 66). That is, on the condition that the usual figure reserved storage number FN is maintained at 4, the game ball continues to win the second operation port 63 with a probability of 1/11 (about 1/10).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28D and 28E, the opening cycle (general figure game period) of the electric accessory 66 when the common figure reserved memory number FN is four. The two arrival cycles (longer side time) of the game balls reaching the electric accessory 66 are configured to be a non-integer multiple of the open cycle (shorter side time). For example, if one of the long sides is an integer multiple of the other of the short sides, the time difference A and B may not change even if the normal game is repeated because both are synchronized. However, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately suppress this, and to appropriately secure a winning opportunity for the second operation port 63.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 27B, such a relationship can be established even in the case where the number of reserved maps FN is 1 to 3. In other words, in the release cycle of the electrically-powered object 66 in the case where the number of usual reserved memories FN is 1 to 3, and the arrival cycle of the game ball to the electrically-powered object 66, the arrival period is a non-integer multiple of the release period It is comprised so that.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the normal drawing hold occurs so that the second operation port 63 can easily win a prize, the stable storage in the drawing hole is unexpectedly considered in consideration of the stable operation in the game hall. In order to avoid that FN becomes 1 or more, it is ideal to make the winning interval to the through gate 35 constant. For example, such a configuration can be realized by making the flow of game balls winning the through gate 35 regular, such as unifying the winning route to the through gate 35. However, the flow of game balls becomes uniform, which may lead to monotonization of the game and excessively narrow the room for the player's technical intervention. For this reason, it may be more practical to give a certain amount of irregularity to the flow of the game ball, and it may be necessary to allow variation in the winning interval.

  That is, in the description of FIGS. 27 to 29, the winning interval of the game balls to the through gate 35 is assumed to be a constant period, but the present invention is not limited to this and has a certain degree of variation (indefiniteness). It may be. Even in such a situation, it is possible to reduce the risk that the number of reserved figure FN will increase against the design intent by shortening the one-time figure game period shorter than the game ball firing cycle. , It is possible to suppress the transition to an unexpected winning easy state.

  Moreover, in the said structure, although 10 sec was illustrated as a variable display time for making the usual figure pending | holding memory | storage number FN into four, it is not limited to this. That is, any time can be set as long as the usual game period is longer than four times the winning cycle (game ball firing cycle) to the through gate 35. Further, the probability that the variable display time is selected does not have to be 1/1000, and can be an arbitrary probability.

  Furthermore, it is not always necessary to maintain the number of reserved numbers after increasing the usual number of reserved numbers FN to the upper limit. That is, it is sufficient that at least one hold is generated as an opportunity to shift to the easy-to-win state. For example, a configuration is possible in which the number of holds can be maintained after one normal hold is generated. In this case, when the usual figure reserved storage number FN is 0, for example, a variable display time of 0.2 sec with a predetermined probability (a variable display time in which the normal figure game period is 0.7 sec longer than the game ball firing cycle). ) Is selected, and a variable display time of 0.6 sec may be set when the number of common reserved storage FN is one. At this time, the variable display time in the case where the number of stored common charts FN is two or more may be a time that can maintain or easily maintain the stored number of stored charts FN, as in the case of one, The memory number FN may be a time that cannot be maintained or is difficult to maintain.

  However, if the number of reserved figure FN, which is a trigger for the transition to an easy-to-win state, is reduced, for example, if the winning ball is placed in the through gate 35 with the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball shortened, the winning of the following ball is suspended. Thus, there is a risk of shifting to an easy winning state regardless of the length of the variable display time. Considering this point, as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to secure a margin by setting the maximum number of reserved memory FN that becomes a trigger for transition, or by using a plurality even if it is not the upper limit. It is good to set it as the structure which can suppress shifting to a prize winning easy state by holding | maintenance generate | occur | producing.

  In addition, the variable display time for maintaining the number-of-pending-storing memory number FN is not limited to 0.6 sec, and one time of the usual-type game period is a winning cycle for the through gate 35 (game ball firing cycle). ) Longer than) is sufficient.

<About the overall game flow>
Next, the flow of the entire game including both the ordinary game and the special game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the gaming state.

  In the normal gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, as described above, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the winning / losing lottery in the first special figure than in the second special figure. For this reason, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, a game ball is launched to the left route (see FIG. 4), and the through gate 35, the second operating port 63 (the electric accessory 66), and the first operating port 62 are connected. The game will be aimed at winning.

  Here, in the present embodiment, most of the game balls (for example, 80% or more) launched toward the left route win the through gate 35. 66 can be reached (see FIG. 5A). Further, on the downstream side of the electric accessory 66, the game balls that have passed in front of the electric accessory 66 (the game balls that have not won the second operating port 63) flow down toward the first operating port 62 side. In addition, a flow path is formed by the nail 69 or the like. That is, the game ball can flow down in the order of the through gate 35 → the electric accessory 66 → the first operation port 62. For this reason, in a situation where a game ball is being fired toward the left route, a prize is awarded to the second operating port 63 or the first operating port 62 while receiving a lottery drawing based on winning for the through gate 35. It is possible to receive a winning lottery of the first special figure based on it.

  In the normal gaming state, when the number of reserved maps FN is 0, as described above, each time the game ball wins the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 is opened, but the second operating port 63 is opened. Is in the first normal gaming state (no winning support state) in which the game ball is not won or won. In the first normal gaming state, the winning at the second operating port 63 is not expected, so for the special figure game, the first special figure winning lottery based on the winning only at the first operating port 62 is substantially performed. While receiving, you will play with the aim of winning the jackpot.

  Here, the probability that the game ball launched to the left route wins the first working port 62 is suppressed to be lower than the probability that the game ball launched to the left route wins the through gate 35. Specifically, when 10 to 15 game balls are fired toward the left route, one game ball is set to be able to win the first operation port 62 (winning probability = 7). -10%). The number of game balls to be paid out when a winning to the first working port 62 occurs is 3, so in the first normal game state, the number of payout balls continues to be smaller than the number of balls to be fired. The person advances the game while reducing the ball.

  It is also possible to launch a game ball to the right route when in the first normal game state. As already explained, most of the game balls launched to the right route (70% or more) will win the third operating port 64. However, since the number of game balls to be paid out when a winning to the third operation port 64 occurs is 1, the decrease rate of the holding ball is suppressed, but it is not changed. Moreover, since the variable display time is set to the special time (36000 sec) for the game times related to the third operation port 64 in the normal game state, the execution frequency of the lottery determination of the second special drawing is greatly reduced. Merits for players are becoming scarce.

  In the first normal game state, the game time variation display time related to the first operating port 62 is 3 seconds at the shortest (see FIG. 19A), whereas the normal game related to the through gate 35 Is 0.55 sec (see FIG. 27 (a3)). That is, the required period of the above-mentioned ordinary game is sufficiently shorter than the game display variation display time related to the first operation port 62. In addition, since the winning probability for the through gate 35 is higher than the winning probability for the first operation port 62, in the first normal gaming state, the normal game based on winning through the through gate 35 is performed at high speed. On the other hand, the lottery for the first special figure relating to the first working port 62 is performed at a frequency less than that.

  By the way, since the execution cycle of the general-purpose game times when the general-purpose reserved memory number FN is 0 (see FIG. 27A), all of the game balls fired on the left route are through. Assuming that the gate 35 has been won, 1000 games can be executed in 10 minutes. Since the probability of selecting the 10-second normal map display time is 1/1000 (see FIG. 10 (a)), the normal map is held with a probability of approximately 65% while the game ball is fired for 10 minutes. The storage number FN can be four.

  When the usual figure storage number FN is 4, as described above, the game ball can be won (or easily won) in the second operation port 63 (see FIG. 29). In other words, in addition to the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63 shifts to the second normal gaming state (winning support state) that makes it easier to receive the first lottery drawing. In this case, the game ball can be won in the second operation port 63 with a probability of about 1/10, and the number of game balls to be paid out when a winning in the second operation port 63 occurs is 10. . For this reason, the player can continue the game in a state where the ball is not decreased or the decrease of the ball is suppressed.

  The second normal gaming state can be continued as long as the number of reserved memory FN is one or more. In the present embodiment, after the number of stored customary drawings FN becomes four, the variable display time is set to 0.6 sec, which is longer than the case of the number of stored customary drawings FN = 0. As a result, it is possible to maintain the usual figure reserved memory number FN at 4 (1 or more) only by continuously firing the game ball by a natural launch operation (FIG. 10 (b), (See FIG. 29).

  In the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, when the winning / losing lottery result of the first special figure becomes a jackpot result, the state shifts to a special gaming state where the variable winning device 65 is opened. The variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 67 and is configured to be able to win on condition that the game ball flows down the right route. For this reason, the player launches the game ball on the right route and plays the game, and accordingly, the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35 is avoided. In this case, in order to encourage the release of the game ball to the right route, notification (right-handed notification) of an aspect that suggests that the right route should flow down may be performed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when a transition is made to the special game state, the round game is repeated 16 times regardless of the jackpot type allocation result. For this reason, the operation of launching the game ball to the right route is continued for a period longer than the period in which the four-time ordinary game is performed, and the ordinary figure storage memory number FN becomes 0 and becomes the second normal The gaming state (winning support state) ends. In other words, once the state is shifted to the second normal gaming state, the state can be continued until the result of the special figure winning / losing lottery results in the jackpot result.

  If the jackpot type distribution result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the special gaming state is ended, the winning lottery mode shifts to an advantageous gaming state in which the high probability mode is set. In the advantageous gaming state, as described above, the variation display time of the game times of the second special figure related to the third operation port 64 is shortened (see FIG. 19D). Moreover, many of the game balls fired on the right route win the third operation port 64, and most of the results of the lottery of the second special drawing related to the third operation port 64 are special hit results. Become. For this reason, if the game is advanced aiming at winning a prize to the third operation port 64 in the advantageous gaming state, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result frequently occurs. In other words, the right route is more advantageous than the left route, and the player launches a game ball on the right route to play. The variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side in the same manner as the third operating port 64, and game balls that have not won the third operating port 64 can be won. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the firing direction during the advantageous gaming state, and it is sufficient to continue the firing operation to the right route side.

  In the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special hit result, the variable winning device 65 is opened for 1.8 sec. However, since the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec, two to three game balls are won. Is expected. When the number of game balls to be paid out when a winning to the variable prize winning device 65 is 15, every time the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result is performed, 30 to 45 game balls are to be paid out. Is possible. In the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to increase the number of holding balls by repeating the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result, and to aim for the winning lottery result of the second special figure to be a big hit result.

  In the advantageous gaming state, it is assumed that the launch operation to the right route is continued, so that the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66 do not substantially function. However, it is also possible to launch a game ball on the left route in the case of shifting to the advantageous game state, and in this case, the game ball can win the through gate 35. In such a case, if the electric accessory 66 is frequently released as in the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, it is confusing for the player and there is a risk of misleading the launch operation to the left route. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the advantageous gaming state, the normal figure display time is set to a long time of 20.0 sec so as to keep the frequency of opening the electric utility item 66 per unit time low. .

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the reserved figure number FN is 0, a specific period from when the game ball wins the through gate 35 until the support state of the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the win ends is determined from the game ball launch cycle. In addition, the required period until the game ball winning the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 is longer than the specific period. As a result, under the situation where the number of stored general map hold FN is 0, unless a specific condition (a change display of 10 sec is selected with a probability of 1/1000) is not established, a general map hold does not occur (or In such a situation, it is possible to maintain a state in which a winning to the second working port 63 does not occur (or hardly occurs) under such a situation. Then, when the usual figure storage number FN is 1 or more, the electric accessory 66 is released regardless of the winning timing of the game ball to the through gate 35. As a result, the release period of the electric accessory 66 and the game ball are released. It is possible to adapt the arrival timing to the specific area RA2 and to make it possible to generate an easy winning state (second normal gaming state) to the second operating port 63. In other words, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a gameability that allows the player to shift to an easy-to-win state even if a big win result is not obtained. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to play a game in an easy-to-win state even for a player who has not won a jackpot, and it is possible to improve ease of play and friendliness.

  In addition, in the above configuration, when the usual figure holding memory number FN is increased, not only is the number of lotteries corresponding to the increased amount secured, but also the advantage of being changed to an easy winning state that is advantageous to the player is also provided. be able to. As a result, the interest of increasing the number of ordinary reserved memories FN is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably arouse the desire to win the through gate 35.

  Further, in the case where the usual figure storage number FN is 0, the required period until the game ball won in the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 is set to be longer than the specific period, so that The effect can also be expected. In such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 after the electric accessory 66 is switched from the open state to the closed state. It is possible to make the entry into the operation port 63 impossible (or difficult to enter). For this reason, although it is the structure which pays out a game ball based on winning a prize to the 2nd operation slot 63, and performs the right-and-left lottery of the 2nd special figure, the opportunity of opening of the electric accessory 66 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to give an impression that a winning is likely to occur to the player while suppressing the trouble in operation at the game hall. In addition, since the electric accessory 66 (the rotating plate 243 and the receiving member 245) continuously moves, it can be used as a lively element, and a production effect can be expected. By these, it becomes possible to incite the player's interest or to arouse game motivation.

  Under the situation where the general figure hold memory number FN is 0, the general figure hold does not occur (or does not occur well), and if the state persists, the same game will be repeated endlessly, and the game will become monotonous There is a fear. In view of this point, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that a predetermined condition (winning a lottery of 1/1000 in the normal map display time) is established, the normal map display time is set to 10 sec and the specific period is set. Is configured to be longer than the launch period of game balls. For this reason, even if it is considered as a game where it is difficult to increase the usual number of reserved storage FN, the increase opportunity can be appropriately secured. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no suspension, and to suppress the monotonization of the game.

  In the case where the number of general-purpose reserved memory FN is 4, the general-purpose variable display time is set to 0.6 sec, and the specific period is set longer than the game ball firing cycle. In this case, when the usual figure pending storage number FN becomes a predetermined number or more, it becomes possible to maintain such a state stably thereafter. Thereby, it is suppressed that the case where the opening timing of the electric accessory 66 depends on the winning timing of the game ball to the through gate 35 and the case where it is not so are frequently switched. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to calm down and advance the game, or to proceed with the game with peace of mind, and to easily play the game.

  In the case where the number of reserved memory is one or more, the length of the opening cycle of the electric utility 66 and the arrival cycle of the game ball to the specific area RA2 are different, and one of the longer side of them is Is a non-integer multiple of the other on the short side. In this case, a series of ordinary games from the winning of a game ball to the through gate 35 to the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 66 is repeated, so that the opening timing (or closing timing) of the electric accessory 66 and the specific region RA2 are reached. The time difference A (or time difference B) with the arrival timing of the game ball can be changed. Thereby, the ease of winning a game ball to the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63) can be made different depending on whether or not the usual figure storage number FN is one or more, It is possible to realize a gameability that closely associates the usual figure reserved storage number FN and the easy winning state.

  The length (0.1 sec) of the opening time of the electric accessory 66 is longer than the difference (0.05 sec or 0.1 sec) between the opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival period of the game ball to the specific area RA2. The configuration is as follows. The difference is the change width for one time in the process of the time differences A and B changing cumulatively, and the length of the opening time of the electric accessory 66 is longer than the change width. The arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area RA2 is suppressed from changing over the opening time of the electric accessory 66. As a result, when the usual figure storage number FN is 1 or more, it becomes possible to appropriately secure a chance to win a game ball on the electric accessory 66.

  In the case where the number of stored customary drawings FN is 4, the normal display change display time (0.6 sec), the stop display time (0.4 sec) immediately after that, and the opening time (0.1 sec) of the electric accessory 66 are set. The configuration is such that the opening interval of the electric accessory 66 is fixed to be uniform. For example, when the opening intervals of the electric utility item 66 are diversified, the time differences A and B change irregularly while the series of games are repeated. In this case, it becomes difficult to grasp the winning rate of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63) at the design stage, which not only increases the design burden, but also increases the winning rate unexpectedly during the game. There are concerns about such inconveniences. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the opening interval of the electric accessory 66 can be stabilized, the time differences A and B can be regularly changed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the winning rate of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63), and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

  By arranging the through gate 35 on the left route side and arranging the variable winning device 65 on the right route side, when the game ball is launched aiming at the variable winning device 65, winning to the through gate 35 is avoided. The configuration is as follows. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result (jackpot game) is performed, so that the number of usual figure holding memory FN can be reduced naturally, and the winning combination state of the electric accessory 66 (second normal game state) Can be terminated. Thereby, it becomes possible to avoid suitably that the said winning a prize easy state becomes permanent. At that time, the winning easy state ends in exchange for the jackpot game, so it becomes easier for the player to gain an understanding than when the same state only ends, and it is possible to reduce dissatisfaction and discouragement of the player become.

  The winning rate of the game ball to the through gate 35 is set to be higher than the winning rate to the first working port 62. In this case, the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35 is simplified more than that to the first operation port 62, so that the former is made daily and the player's attention to the through gate 35 is reduced. it can. As a result, the player's consciousness can be easily directed to the first operation port 62. As a result, the usual figure storage number FN has become a predetermined number or more, and the player is less likely to notice the process up to that point. can do. Thereby, it becomes easy to give the player the impression that the second normal gaming state suddenly occurs, and it is possible to suitably realize the surprise and joy of the player.

  In that case, it is possible to enhance the above-described effect by further configuring the through gate 35 to be less noticeable than the first operation port 62. As such a configuration, for example, the through gate 35 may be transparent (translucent), or the through gate 35 may be smaller than the first operation port 62 in front view. Further, the color of the through gate 35 is made the same as or similar to the color of the arrangement region or the peripheral region of the through gate 35 on the front surface of the game board 60, and both are assimilated, while the first operation port 62 and the arrangement region thereof are Different colors may be used. In order to make the through gate 35 smaller than the first operation port 62, it is not always necessary to change the size of the winning opening, and the overall size including the decorative body provided in each operation port 35, 62 is compared. It is sufficient if the through gate 35 is smaller than the first working port 62.

<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the support mode of the electric utility item 66 shifts to the high frequency support mode in response to the jackpot. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 60 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 31, in the present embodiment, the third operation port is not provided on the right route, and the lottery start ports related to the special symbol are the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63. It has become. In the present embodiment, the second working port 63 corresponds to the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43. That is, the first operation port 62 is the lottery start port of the first special drawing, and the second operation port 63 is the lottery start port of the second special diagram. Note that a lottery starting port related to special symbols is not arranged on the right route.

  The number of game balls to be paid out when winning to the second operating port 63 occurs is one less than in the case of the first embodiment (10). The number of payouts for the prize winning ports other than the second operating port 63 is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  The main display unit 43 of the main display unit 81 has a first holding number display unit AM for displaying the number of holdings according to the first special figure and a second holding for displaying the holding number according to the second special figure. A number display section BM is provided. The number of times that the game ball has won the first operation port 62 and the number of times that the game ball has won the second operation port 63 are each held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of hold is displayed by lighting each of the hold number display sections AM and BM. It has come to be.

  Next, the reserved ball storage area 642 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, in the present embodiment, in the holding ball storage area 642, a second result display area holding area Rb for storing holding information based on winning in the second working port 63 is provided. The second result display area reservation area Rb is the same as the first result display area reservation area Ra according to the first embodiment, and includes the first area Rb1, the second area Rb2, and the third area Rb3. The fourth area Rb4 is provided.

  The reserved ball storage area 642 is provided with a special drawing execution area AE. The special figure execution area AE is an area for moving the hold information (numerical information) stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the hold areas Ra and Rb when starting the variable display on the main display unit 43. At the start of one special figure game round, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the special figure execution area AE. One special-purpose execution area AE is provided for the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb. That is, in this embodiment, unlike the case of the first embodiment, the game times according to the first special figure and the game times according to the second special figure are performed one by one.

<About the judgment of special charts and distribution of jackpot type>
Next, the success / failure determination for special drawings and the distribution of jackpot type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 33A is a special figure success / failure table for the low probability mode, FIG. 33B is a special figure success / failure table for the high probability mode, FIG. 33C is a distribution table for the first special figure, and FIG. It is the schematic which shows the allocation table for special drawings.

  When the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the probability of the jackpot result is 1/200, and when the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, FIG. As shown in (b), the probability of a jackpot result is 5/200. In both cases of the low probability mode and the high probability mode, all results except for the jackpot result are outliers. These both success / failure tables are commonly used in each success / failure lottery of the first special figure and the second special figure. That is, in this embodiment, no special hit result is set in the success / failure table of the second special drawing.

  When a jackpot result is obtained in the first special figure winning / losing lottery, the types of jackpot results are sorted using the sorting table shown in FIG. As types of jackpot results of the first special figure, a 5R probability variable jackpot result, a 5R normal jackpot result A, and a 5R normal jackpot result B are set. In both cases, the number of rounds to be executed is five.

  The 5R probability variation jackpot result is that the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support mode in the electric accessory 66 of the second operating port 63 after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high frequency support mode (high frequency support state) (Or a high-frequency guide state). In this case, the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won after the transition to the support mode.

  The 5R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the 5R normal jackpot result B is determined after the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode (the low frequency support state or the low frequency guide state). The high-frequency support mode in the case of 5R normal jackpot result A is the number of executions of the special figure game times after the support mode transitions (for example, the total number of the first special figure game times and the second special figure game times) ) Until the end reference number of times (specifically, 50 times) is reached. When the number of executions of the special figure game times reaches the end reference number, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric component open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is the same (both about 1/1), In the support mode, the period during which the electric utility item 66 is in the open state when the electric role is released is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, in the case of the low frequency support mode, the open time is 0.1 sec (similar to the first embodiment), whereas in the case of the high frequency support mode. The opening time is 3.0 sec. When the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec, in the high-frequency support mode, 4 to 5 game balls can be expected to be won for each opening of the electric accessory 66. In the case of the high frequency support, the usual figure opening period and the usual figure ending period are shorter than the opening time (for example, 0.2 sec).

  In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the usual map change display time is uniformly 0.1 sec (see FIG. 38D). This fluctuation display time is longer than the normal fluctuation display time of 0.05 sec, which is mainly selected in the low frequency support mode, but considering that the launch period of the game ball is 0.6 sec, It is a relatively short time. That is, in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to repeat the transition of the electric accessory 66 to the support state in a relatively short cycle.

  For this reason, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a winning to the second operation port 63 occurs is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 62 than in the second operating port 63, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 62. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 63 increases. When a winning is made to the second operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of possessed balls. be able to.

  As already described, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls based on winning in the second operating port 63 is one. That is, the same number of game balls as the number of winning prizes to the second operating port 63 are paid out, and the number of held balls does not increase due to winning of the second operating port 63. For this reason, even if it is assumed that the electric accessory 66 picks up a considerable number of game balls, it is possible to suppress an excessive benefit to the player. Note that the number of prize balls for winning a prize at the second operating port 63 is not limited to one, but a range in which benefits are not excessive (for example, game balls in which the total number of game balls to be paid out per unit time has been launched) The range can be arbitrarily changed.

  When the jackpot result is determined by the lottery of the second special drawing, the type of jackpot result is sorted using the sorting table shown in FIG. As types of jackpot results in the second special figure, 16R probability variable jackpot results and 5R normal jackpot results C are set. Of these, the 16R probability variation jackpot result is that the number of rounds to be executed is 16.

  The 16R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is a jackpot result in which the mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode in the case of 16R probability variable jackpot result continues until the next jackpot is won, and the high-frequency support mode in the case of 5R normal jackpot result C is the special figure game times after the support mode transitions This is continued until the number of executions reaches the end reference number.

  In this embodiment, the probability of the success / failure lottery mode shifting to the high probability mode is 50/100 which is the same for both the first special figure and the second special figure, but the jackpot result of the second special figure Includes a 16R jackpot result with a large number of rounds. In addition, the probability of the support mode shifting to the high frequency support mode is higher in the second special figure than in the first special figure. That is, the success / failure lottery of the second special drawing is favored over that of the first special drawing, and the second operation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than the first operation port 62. For this reason, the player plays a game while expecting a winning to the second operation port 63.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 in this embodiment will be described.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing game times (special game times) control processing in the present embodiment. The processing in the figure is performed in place of the game times control processing of FIG. 15 according to the first embodiment.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, the first special figure game times and the second special figure game times are performed one by one. For this reason, unlike the steps S502 and S503 in FIG. 15, the control processes for the first special figure and the second special figure are not provided separately, and the processes are common to the first special figure and the second special figure. The game times control process of FIG. 35 is provided. In addition, it is not necessary to grasp the result or execution status of the mutual success / failure lottery in the first and second special figure game times, and those processes are omitted. Except for these points, the game times control process in the present embodiment is substantially the same as in the case of the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the game times control process, it is first determined in step S1801 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the game turn control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the number of reserved storages of the first special figure and the second special figure, is “0”. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the game turn control process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area is determined in step S1804. A data setting process for setting the data stored in Rb for variable display is executed. In a succeeding step S1805, a special figure variation start process is executed. Here, the special figure variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure change start process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. If it is not the high probability mode, in step S1902, it is determined whether or not it is correct by referring to the low probability mode determination table (see FIG. 33A). On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S1903 with reference to the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 33B).

  After execution of step S1902 or step S1903, it is determined in step S1904 whether the lottery result in step S1902 or step S1903 is a jackpot result. If it is a big win, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. The second special figure flag is information for specifying that the current game time is the game time of the second special figure, and is stored in the storage area 634 based on winning in the second operation port 63. Is.

  If the second special figure flag is not stored, it means that the current game time is the game time of the first special figure. In step S1906, the distribution table for the first special figure (FIG. 33 ( Refer to c)) and perform the distribution determination. Specifically, the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE is included in any of the numerical ranges in the 5R probability variable big hit result, the 5R normal big hit result A, and the 5R normal big hit result B. It is determined whether or not. On the other hand, if the second special figure flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 33D) in step S1907. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE is included in each numerical range in the 16R big hit result or the 5R normal big hit result C.

  After execution of step S1906 or step S1907, it is determined in step S1908 whether or not the distributed game result is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, in step S1909, a stop result corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is set as a stop result in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS. In step S1909, the 5R probability variation flag or the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604 as information for identifying which probability variation jackpot result is the current jackpot result.

  On the other hand, when the distributed game result is not the probability variation jackpot result, in Step S1910, the stop result in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS corresponds to the normal jackpot result (non-probability variation jackpot result). Set the stop result. In step S1910, any one of the 5R normal flags A to C is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying which normal jackpot result is the current jackpot result.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1904, the stop result corresponding to the disconnection result is displayed as the stop result in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the stop result setting process for disconnection in step S1911. Set.

  After executing any of the processes of step S1909, step S1910, and step S1911, in step S1912, the variable display time of the current special figure game times in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is set. The process of setting the variable display time for the purpose is executed. In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected from the variation display time table stored in the ROM 603. In the subsequent step S1913, the special figure change command and the special figure type command are set as commands to be transmitted to the notification / production control device 143. The special figure change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The special figure type command includes information on game results.

  After that, in step S1914, the variation display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, if the second special figure flag is not stored in the RAM 604, the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times is identified as the first result display unit AS, and the second special figure flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 35), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, in step S1806, the variable display of the current special figure game times is displayed. Determine whether the time has passed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S1807, and then the game turn control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable display time has elapsed, a variable end process is executed in step S1808, and then a variable end command is set in step S1809. In the variation end process in step S1808, the main display unit displays the stop result set in any one of steps S1909 to S1911 in the variation start process (FIG. 36) so that the pattern is stopped and displayed based on the result. 43 is controlled. After execution of step S1809, the game times control process is terminated.

<Normal map change start processing>
Next, the universal change start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed in place of the universal change start process of FIG. 25 according to the first embodiment.

  The processes in steps S2101 to S2104 in FIG. 37 are the same as steps S1501 to S1504 in FIG. These processes will be briefly described. First, in step S2101, the general-purpose determination result table (see FIG. 10A) is referred to, and the value of the open random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose execution area AE3 is used. Execute the normal / no-go decision processing. If the result of the normal figure determination is an open result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2102 and the process proceeds to step S2103, where a stop result corresponding to the open result is set as a stop result in the accessory display unit 44. On the other hand, if the result of the normal / unusual determination is a losing result, a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2104, and a stop result corresponding to the detachment result is set as a stop result in the accessory display unit 44.

  After execution of step S2103 or step S2014, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of reserved maps FN is four. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, that is, if the number of stored customary drawings FN is 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2107, the current value of the normal map fluctuation type counter C5 is referred to with reference to the first variable display time table for normal maps (see FIG. 38A) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Fluctuation display time corresponding to is acquired. This first variable display time table has 1 to 3 general-purpose reserved storage numbers FN in the low-probability mode normal map variable display time table (see FIG. 10B) according to the first embodiment. It is similar to a certain case. That is, a fluctuation display time of 0.05 sec is set with a probability of 999/1000, and a fluctuation display time of 10 sec is set with a probability of 1/1000. For this reason, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, as long as the variable display time of 0.05 sec continues to be set, there is no (or difficult to) hold of the ordinary map, and the electric game is operated at each time of the ordinary game. Although the accessory 66 is opened, the state where the winning to the second operating port 63 does not occur (or is not likely to occur) continues. Then, by setting the variable display time of 10 sec, the usual figure reservation is accumulated, and a transition to the winning easy state for the second operation port 63 is made.

  Here, the winning probability for the second operating port 63 in the easy-to-win state based on the occurrence of the usual figure hold is lower than the winning probability for the second operating port 63 in the high frequency support mode. In other words, in the former winning easy state, the degree of advantage for the player is suppressed lower than the latter. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish between the two, the easy winning state based on the occurrence of the usual figure hold may be referred to as a medium frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, that is, if the number of common figure pending storage FN is four, it is determined in step S2108 that the jackpot result is determined in the special figure success / failure determination process, and the type is the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not it is distributed to the jackpot result that does not shift to the high frequency support after the end of. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 5R normal jackpot result B is won in the winning lottery related to the first special figure. This process is performed by determining whether or not the 5R normal flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2108, in step S2109, the second variable display time table (see FIG. 38 (b)) for normal use stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referred to. Fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current normal fluctuation type counter C5 is acquired. In the second variable display time table, when the number of common figure pending storage FN in the common figure variable display time table for the low probability mode according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 10B) is four. Is the same. That is, when the usual figure reserved storage number FN is 4, the fluctuation display time of 0.6 sec is uniformly set regardless of the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter C5. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the state where the number of usual reserved memories FN is four, and it is possible to continue the medium frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the third variable display time table for ordinary use stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 in step S2110 (see FIG. 38C). The fluctuation display time corresponding to the current value of the normal fluctuation type counter C5 is acquired. In the third variation display time table, two types of variation display times of 200 sec and 0.6 sec are prepared. Among these, the variable display time of 200 sec is set in consideration of being longer than the execution period (digestion time) of the open / close execution mode corresponding to at least 5R normal jackpot result B. The advantage when the variable display time of 200 sec is set will be described later.

  When the value of the normal fluctuation type counter C5 is “0” to “499”, the fluctuation display time is set to 200 sec, and when the value of the normal fluctuation type counter C5 is “500” to “999” The variable display time is set to 0.6 sec. That is, the probability that each variable display time of 200 sec and 0.6 sec is selected is 500/1000.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, that is, if the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 in step S2111. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation fluctuation type counter C5 is acquired with reference to the normal fluctuation fluctuation display time table (see FIG. 38D). In the usual figure fluctuation display time table for the high frequency support mode, a fluctuation display time of 0.1 sec is uniformly set regardless of the value of the usual figure fluctuation type counter C5.

  After one of the processes in steps S2107 and S2109 to S2111, in step S2112 the common map variable display time acquired in the above steps is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604. . In the subsequent step S2113, the common map change command and the general map type command are set as commands to be transmitted to the notification / production control device 143. After that, in step S2114, the normal map change display start process is executed, and the normal map change start process ends. Note that the processing in steps S2112 to S2114 is the same as steps S1508 to S1510 in FIG.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the operation ports 62 and 63 and the through gate 35 are arranged on the left route side, and the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side (see FIG. 31). For this reason, in a game state other than the special game state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is opened, a game ball is launched to the left route, and the through gate 35, the second operating port 63 (the electric accessory 66), and the first A game is played with the aim of winning a prize in the first operating port 62.

  In the normal gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, when the number of reserved figures FN is 0, each time a game ball wins the through gate 35 as in the first embodiment. Although the electric accessory 66 is opened, the first normal gaming state (low frequency support mode) is entered in which the game balls are not won or won in the second operating port 63. In the first normal gaming state, the winning at the second operating port 63 is not expected, so for the special figure game, the first special figure winning lottery based on the winning only at the first operating port 62 is substantially performed. While receiving, you will play with the aim of winning the jackpot.

  When the variable display time of 10 sec is set in the ordinary game game times, the ordinary figure storage number FN can be increased to four. When the number of usual reserved memory FN is 4, as described in the first embodiment, the second normal gaming state (in which the game ball can be won (or easy to win) in the second operation port 63) Frequency support mode). By shifting to the second normal gaming state, it is possible to receive both the lottery determination of the first special figure by the first operation port 62 and the lottery determination of the second special drawing by the second operation port 63. That is, while receiving the winning support to the second operating port 63, it is possible to continue to play the game by winning the game ball in the first operating port 62.

  In the present embodiment, since the second operation port 63 is more advantageous than the first operation port 62, the shift to the second normal gaming state only increases the chances of winning or failing the special drawing. In addition, a chance to receive (or become easier to receive) the winning side winning lottery is also provided. Such a state is continued as long as the usual figure reserved storage number FN is 1 or more, and is continued until the special game state is substantially executed.

  When the winning lottery result of the first special figure or the second special figure becomes a big hit result in the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, the game shifts to a special gaming state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened. At this time, under the situation where the number of reserved memory FN is 4 (under the condition of the second normal gaming state), the 5R normal jackpot result B (the jackpot result that does not shift to the high frequency support after the opening / closing execution mode ends) In the case of winning, the normal map change display time of 200 sec is set with a predetermined probability (500/1000). Here, the flow in the case where the normal map change display time of 200 sec is set will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  At the start of the fluctuation display of the first special figure at the timing t21, if the big win result is determined in the first special figure's winning / losing lottery, and the type of the big hit result is distributed to the 5R normal big hit result B, the subsequent ordinary game This is grasped at the timing t22 which is the start timing of the rotation. The grasp of the occurrence of the 5R normal jackpot result B is performed based on the fact that the 5R normal flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604, as described above.

  At the timing t22, the third variable display time table for normal maps (see FIG. 38C) is referred to as the normal map variable display time table, and the normal map variable display time of 200 sec with a predetermined probability (500/1000). Is set. If the 200-second normal map change display time is set, the normal map change display is continued for 200 sec from this timing, and no new normal-game game is executed during this period. In other words, the usual-pending storage number FN does not decrease and four states are maintained.

  After the timing t22, at the timing t23 when the variation display time of the first special figure game times has elapsed, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R normal big hit result B is started. In the present embodiment, since the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side, during the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, a game ball is fired on the right route to play. That is, the game ball does not win the through gate 35, and the new normal hold information is not replenished.

  During the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, five round games are performed, and the execution period per round is 30 sec, which is the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65 (except for the round interval period). The 200-second normal map display time is set based on this, and a predetermined margin time (50 sec) is added to 150 sec, which is an open time for five rounds. In addition to the opening period, the ending period, and the interval period (standby period) between the rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, the margin time is the variable display time of the first special figure that results in the jackpot (the variable display time at timings t21 to t23). Is considered. That is, the margin time is set to be longer than the total time.

  With such a configuration, the opening / closing execution mode ends earlier than the timing t25 when the normal map variation display ends (timing t24), and the state where the general map hold memory number FN is set to four remains unchanged. It is possible to end the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, the player can continue to play in the second normal gaming state even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the second normal gaming state can be continued across the opening / closing execution mode (transition route 401 in FIG. 39). See).

  The specific time length of 200 sec is only an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. That is, it suffices if the ordinary game times can cross the opening / closing execution mode, and the number of round games executed in the opening / closing execution mode, the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 65, and the upper limit to the variable winning device 65 are sufficient. It can be arbitrarily set according to various parameters such as the number of winnings.

  Incidentally, even if the 5R normal jackpot result B is won in the situation of the first normal gaming state, the third variable display time table is not referred to (see step S2106 in FIG. 37), so the variable display time of 200 sec is set. Never happen. That is, the variable display time of 200 sec can be set only when the 5R normal jackpot result B is won in the second normal gaming state.

  In this way, by limiting the opportunity to shift to the second normal gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode to the case where the big win is won under the second normal gaming state, the difference in the degree of advantage from the first normal gaming state Can be further clarified, and the attractiveness of the second normal gaming state can be further improved. In addition, in the second normal gaming state, not only the disadvantaged first special figure (first operation port 62) but also the advantage side second special figure (second operation port 63) can receive the winning / failing lottery. When the game state is an unfavorable game state, it can be utilized as a device that enables re-games in the second normal game state when a big win is won in the disadvantaged lottery against the expectation.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 39, when the normal fluctuation display of 0.6 sec is set when the 5R normal jackpot result B is set in the second normal gaming state, and the 5R normal jackpot result B is set in the first normal gaming state. In this case, as described in the first embodiment, the game ball does not win the through gate 35 during the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes. In other words, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the state shifts to the first normal gaming state (transition route 402, 403).

  On the other hand, if the 5R probability variation jackpot result (first special figure) or the 16R probability variation jackpot result (second special figure) is reached, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Shifts to the first advantageous gaming state in which the high-frequency support mode is set (transition route 405). In this case, even if a 16R probability change jackpot result is obtained in the second normal gaming state, the normal execution time of 0.6 sec (0.05 sec or 10 sec with the decrease in the number of reserved memory FN) is 0.6 sec during execution of the open / close execution mode. Since the figure variation display time is set, the second normal gaming state is ended during execution of the opening / closing execution mode. That is, the high frequency support is started after the medium frequency support for the winning to the second working port 63 is finished and the support mode is reset.

  Since the operation ports 62 and 63 and the through gate 35 are arranged on the left route side, in the first advantageous game state, the game ball is returned to the left route and played. The high frequency support mode in the first advantageous gaming state is set such that the degree of support for winning in the second operating port 63 is higher than the medium frequency support mode in the second normal gaming state. For this reason, in the first advantageous gaming state, it becomes possible to play with the ratio of receiving the lottery determination in the second special figure on the advantageous side higher than in the second normal gaming state. This will continue until the next jackpot is won.

  Also, when the 5R normal jackpot result A (first special figure) or the 5R normal jackpot result C (second special figure) is reached, the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Transition to the second advantageous gaming state (transition route 404). In this case as well, as in the first advantageous game state, the game ball is returned to the left route and played. The second advantageous game state is continued until the specified number of times (50 times) of the special figure game is completed.

  After the end of the second advantageous gaming state, the state shifts to the normal gaming state (transition route 406), or the state shifts to the first normal gaming state according to the number of reserved memory FN at the end of the second advantageous gaming state, It branches whether to shift to the second normal gaming state. The closer to the end of the specified number of times, the easier it is to give up and the concentration on the game tends to be interrupted. However, by adopting the above configuration, the second advantageous game state is ended in a state where the number of usual reserved memories FN is increased. Motivation increases and it becomes easier to concentrate on the game until the end of the second advantageous gaming state. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the transition destination after the end of the advantageous state is not uniform, and the transition destination changes based on the end state of the advantageous state even during the transition to the disadvantaged state. This not only reduces the disappointment of the player with respect to the end of the advantageous state, but also makes it possible to diversify the gameplay.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As a transition route to a gaming state that facilitates winning to the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63), apart from the first route triggered by the fact that the reserved figure number FN becomes a predetermined number or more, It was set as the structure which provides the 2nd route triggered by the result of a lottery lottery becoming a jackpot result. This makes it possible to diversify the mode of transition to the easy-to-win state, and to expand the range of ways to enjoy. In this case, the advantage of the easy winning state (medium frequency support mode) transferred through the first route is set lower than that of the easy winning state (high frequency support mode) transferred through the second route. As a result, it is possible not only to suppress excessive advantage, but also to expand opportunities for shifting to an easy-to-win state while suppressing reduction in attractiveness of jackpots.

  In the second normal gaming state, when the 5R normal jackpot result B is won and won by a predetermined lottery process (selection of the normal variable display time), the game ball is won after winning through the through gate 35 and corresponding to the winning. The specific period until the support state of the electric accessory 66 to be completed is longer than the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot result B. In this case, the decrease in the common figure reserved memory number FN during execution of the opening / closing execution mode is suppressed, and the common figure reserved memory number FN can be maintained across the open / close execution mode. As a result, the second normal gaming state can be continued even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the second normal gaming state can be continued.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that it has a function of generating a jackpot result (V jackpot) based on the winning of a game ball to the V winning opening. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the structure similar to the said 2nd Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 60 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, a second variable winning device 500 is provided separately from the variable winning device 65. In order to distinguish the two, hereinafter, the former may be referred to as a first variable winning device 65.

  The second variable winning device 500 is provided below the variable display unit 67 and between the first operating port 62 and the out port 68 (lower center of the game board 60). Game balls flowing down the route are reachable. Incidentally, in the configuration of FIG. 41, the game ball can reach the second variable prize-winning device 500 even from the right route side, but this may be made impossible or difficult. Hereinafter, the configuration of the second variable winning device 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the second variable prize-winning device 500 has a distribution inlet 501 that is opened in the front-rear direction and has a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. There is provided a sorting member 502 that switches between a closed state where the ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass, and an open state where the game ball can pass. The distribution member 502 is opened by being driven by a distribution inlet drive unit 503 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 501 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 504, and the game balls that have flowed in from the distribution entrance 501 flow down the guide passage 504 to the downstream side.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the guide passage 504 is bifurcated from the middle position, and constitutes an upstream region 505 that constitutes an upstream side from the branch position and one that is downstream from the branch position. A V winning area (or a use area) 506 and a discharge area (or a nonuse area) 507 constituting the other downstream side of the branch position. Further, a shutter 508 is provided at the branch position as a distribution unit that distributes the game ball that has reached the branch position from the upstream area 505 to either the V winning area 506 or the discharging area 507. When the shutter 508 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 509, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 507, and when the shutter 508 is driven by the shutter drive unit 509. The game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 506 (V winning).

  A detection sensor 511 for counting is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the upstream area 505 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count detection sensor 511, the payout of the winning ball corresponding to the winning to the second variable winning device 500 is executed. The number of winning balls when the winning to the second variable winning device 500 occurs is a predetermined number (for example, three) smaller than that of the first variable winning device 65. Further, a V winning detection sensor 512 is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the V winning area 506 always passes.

  Based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 512, the opening / closing execution mode is started again after the opening / closing execution mode. More specifically, the opening / closing execution mode in which the second variable prize-winning device 500 is opened is a so-called small hitting opening / closing execution mode in which one round game is performed. By being detected by the detection sensor 512, a jackpot opening / closing execution mode in which a predetermined number of round games are performed is executed after the opening / closing execution mode. Hereinafter, the opening / closing execution mode executed based on the detection of the game ball (V detection) by the V winning detection sensor 512 may be referred to as an opening / closing execution mode for V big hit.

  In addition, a discharge detection sensor 513 is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the discharge area 507 always passes. Based on the detection results from the discharge detection sensor 513 and the V winning detection sensor 512, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the second variable winning device 500.

  The shutter drive unit 509 is periodically driven and controlled from a predetermined timing. Specifically, the shutter drive unit 509 is driven and controlled at a predetermined cycle from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 500 is opened. As a result, the timing at which the game balls won in the second variable prize winning device 500 are distributed to the V winning area 506 side and the timing at which the game balls are distributed to the discharging area 507 side are periodically switched.

  In the opening / closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 500 is opened, a plurality of opening / closing execution modes having different periods during which the sorting member 502 is opened are set. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the probability that the winning game balls are distributed to the V winning area 506 is relatively high by changing the period during which the sorting member 502 is in the open state. Has been. Hereinafter, the open mode with the higher probability of being distributed to the V winning area 506 is referred to as a high distribution mode (high expectation mode), and the open mode with the low probability is the low distribution mode (low expectation mode). That's it.

  It should be noted that the total probability that the game ball passes the V winning area 506 in the low allocation mode opening / closing execution mode and the high allocation mode opening / closing execution mode in which the game ball can win the second variable prize-winning device 500. Is set to be a predetermined probability (1/10) or less. That is, although the probability of passing through the V winning area 506 in the high allocation mode opening / closing execution mode is increased, it is combined with the probability of passing through the V winning area 506 in the low allocation mode opening / closing execution mode. The winning rate to the second variable winning device 500, the passing rate of the V winning area 506, and the second variable winning device 500 in the opening / closing execution mode of the high allocation mode and the low allocation mode so that the predetermined probability is less than the predetermined probability. The distribution ratio of the high distribution mode and the low distribution mode when the open / close execution mode is executed is set.

  The second variable winning device 500 is preferably formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to which of the V winning area 506 and the discharging area 507 the winning game balls are distributed. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the second variable prize-winning device 500 is formed to be colored transparent or colorless and transparent.

<Regarding whether or not a special figure is appropriate>
Next, the determination as to whether or not the special figure is appropriate according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a schematic diagram showing a first special figure success / failure table, and FIG. 43B is a second special figure success / failure table.

  In the present embodiment, there are a first special figure and a second special figure, and each game round is executed one by one in the same way as in the second embodiment, but the winning lottery mode is It does not have a function for shifting from the low probability mode to the high probability mode (so-called probability variation function). That is, the probability of winning the jackpot result due to the winning / failing lottery is set to one probability (1/200). For this reason, there is no distinction between low-probability and high-probability tables for each of the first special chart and the second special chart, and one each is stored in the corresponding table storage area 621 of the ROM 603.

  In each success / failure table, as a result of the success / failure lottery, a jackpot result, a special winner result, and a miss result are set. The random number resulting in the jackpot result is 1 in any special chart success / failure table, and the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as 1/200 on the first special chart side and the second special chart side.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the special special hit result is provided in the success / failure table for the first special figure. The unfavorable special winning result is a kind of special winning result. When the unfavorable special winning result is obtained, a one-round opening / closing execution mode by the second variable winning device 500 is executed. Specifically, the second variable prize-winning device 500 is controlled to open and close in a low-distribution manner in which game balls won in the second variable prize-winning device 500 are difficult to be distributed to the V prize-winning area 506. In the success / failure table for the first special figure, the probability of an unfavorable special hit result is set to 198/200.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), in the second special figure success / failure table, in addition to the disadvantageous special hit result, the advantageous special hit results A and B are provided as the special hit result. For convenience, here, the advantageous special hit results A and B are collectively described as the advantageous special hit results. The unfavorable special hit result is the same as the unfavorable special hit result according to the above-mentioned first special chart rejection table, but the advantageous special hit result is more advantageous than the unfavorable special hit result. That is, when an advantageous special winning result is obtained, the second variable prize-winning apparatus 500 is controlled to open and close in a high-distribution manner in which game balls won in the second variable prize-winning apparatus 500 are easily distributed to the V prize-winning area 506. In the success / failure table for the second special chart, the probability of an advantageous special hit result (the combined probability of the advantageous special hit result A and the advantageous special hit result B) is set to 99/200, and the probability of an unfavorable special hit result is set. It is set to 99/200. In other words, if a special winning result is obtained in the lottery of the second special drawing, an advantageous special winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/2.

  Here, the low distribution mode and the high distribution mode will be described with reference to FIG. Incidentally, since the operation of the shutter 508 is the same in both the low distribution mode and the high distribution mode, the operation of the shutter 508 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 44 (a3), at timing t31, which is the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode, the shutter 508 is in a position to distribute the game balls won in the second variable winning device 500 to the discharge area 507 (outside). positioned. Then, at time t34 when a waiting period of 1.0 sec has elapsed from time t31, the shutter 508 is displaced to a position where game balls won in the second variable winning device 500 are distributed to the V winning area 506. After that, the state is maintained until the distribution period of 2.0 sec elapses from the timing t34, and the position returns to the above-mentioned position at the timing t35 when the distribution period elapses.

  In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low allocation mode executed based on the disadvantageous special hit result, as shown in FIG. 44 (a2), 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after the start of the opening / closing execution mode. (Timing t32), after the opening period, the second variable prize-winning apparatus 500 is in an open state for 0.1 sec (timing t33). That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low distribution mode, the opening time (0.1 sec) of the second variable prize-winning device 500 is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), and is extremely short. Even if the second variable winning device 500 is in an open state, it is difficult for the game ball to win. Even if the game ball wins, in the low-allocation mode opening / closing execution mode, the opening and closing of the second variable prize-winning device 500 during the timing t31 to t34 when the shutter 508 is located on the discharge area 507 side. Is completed, the winning game balls are distributed to the discharge area 507. That is, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a2) and (a3), the period in which the shutter 508 is located on the V winning area 506 side and the period in which the second variable winning device 500 is in the open state do not overlap. Therefore, the game ball cannot pass through the V winning area 506.

  On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode of the high distribution mode executed based on the advantageous special hit result, as shown in FIG. 44 (b2), 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after the start of the opening / closing execution mode. (Timing t42) After the opening period, the second variable prize-winning device 500 is in an open state for 1.8 seconds (timing t43). Therefore, in the high-allocation mode opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b2) and (b3), the shutter 508 is on the discharge area 507 side at the timing t43 when the second variable winning device 500 is being opened. Will be displaced to the V winning area 506 side. As a result, the period in which the shutter 508 is located on the V winning area 506 side overlaps with the period in which the second variable winning device 500 is opened, and the period is 1.3 sec. Since the launch period of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, approximately two game balls can be awarded to the second variable prize-winning device 500 during the period, so that one or more game balls can enter the V prize area 506. It can pass.

  In addition, in the high-allocation mode opening / closing execution mode, a period (0.5 sec) from when the second variable prize-winning device 500 is opened to when the shutter 508 starts to move toward the V prize winning area 506 side is The period is shorter than the product of the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit winning number (10) in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, before the second variable winning device 500 is opened and before the shutter 508 is displaced toward the V winning area 506, the upper limit winning number is reached and the open / close execution mode ends (V winning). The opening / closing execution mode is terminated without being distributed to the use area 506).

  Note that, regardless of the advantageous special winning result A and the advantageous special winning result B, the mode of opening / closing control of the second variable winning device 500 in the opening / closing execution mode based on those results is the same.

<About distribution of jackpot type for special figure>
Next, the special jackpot type allocation according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first special figure, FIG. 45B is a distribution table for the second special figure, and FIG. 45C is a distribution table for V big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), 5R jackpot result A and 5R jackpot result B are set as the types of jackpot results of the first special figure. Both of these are executed rounds of 5. In the 5R jackpot result A, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the end reference count in the high frequency support mode is set to 50 times. On the other hand, the 5R jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The allocation probability to the 5R jackpot result A and the allocation probability to the 5R jackpot result B are both 50/100.

  When the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, the probability that a winning to the second operation port 63 occurs is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, as in the second embodiment. In the form, a V jackpot function based on V winning is installed. As described above, the winning lottery result relating to the second special drawing (second operating port 63) includes the advantageous special winning result that is likely to cause the V winning, so that it is in the high frequency support mode. Is likely to generate a V jackpot. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the probability of an advantageous special winning result in the second lottery drawing lottery is 99/200 (about 1/2) (see FIG. 43B). In the high frequency support mode, the above-mentioned advantageous special hit result is obtained until the number of executions of the special figure game times reaches the end reference number (50 times), and it is possible to almost certainly acquire the V jackpot. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), 16R jackpot result and 5R jackpot result C are set as the types of jackpot results of the second special figure. The former is executed 16 rounds, and the latter is 5. The 16R jackpot result indicates that the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (the end reference number is 50 times), and the 5R jackpot result C indicates that the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a result. The distribution probability to the 16R jackpot result is 60/100, and the distribution probability to the 5R jackpot result C is 40/100.

  When a V jackpot result is obtained in the V prize, the type of V jackpot result is sorted using the V jackpot distribution table shown in FIG. As types of V jackpot results, 16 RV jackpot results and 5 RV jackpot results are set. The former is executed 16 rounds, and the latter is 5. The 16RV jackpot result indicates that the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (the end reference number is 50 times), and the 5RV jackpot result indicates that the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a result.

  In the V jackpot allocation table, a V winning flag type, which will be described later, and a V jackpot result type are associated with each other. As will be described in detail later, the type of the V winning flag corresponds to the type of the advantageous special winning result that triggered the V jackpot. For this reason, the type of the V jackpot result is distributed based on the type of the advantageous special hit result that has substantially become the trigger for the V jackpot. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode that is executed when the V prize is generated is based on the result of the lottery of the second special drawing being the advantageous special win result A, the 16RV big win When the opening / closing execution mode that is distributed to the result and executed when the V winning is generated is based on the advantageous special winning result B, it is distributed to the 5RV jackpot result. Therefore, the distribution probability to the 16RV jackpot result is 60/100 which is the same as the probability of the advantageous special hit result A among the advantageous special hit results, and the distribution probability to the 5RV jackpot result is the advantageous special hit result B. 40/100, the same probability as

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the lottery determination of the second special drawing includes the advantageous special winning result, which can be expected to win the V jackpot, and further shifts to the high frequency support mode. The probability of the second special figure is higher than that of the first special figure. That is, the success / failure lottery of the second special drawing is favored over that of the first special drawing, and the second operation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than the first operation port 62. For this reason, the player plays a game while expecting a winning to the second operation port 63.

  The opening / closing execution modes corresponding to the 16R jackpot result, the 5R jackpot results A to C, the 16RV jackpot result, and the 5RV jackpot result are performed by controlling the first variable winning device 65 to open / close. Since the first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right route side, while the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, the player launches a game ball on the right route to play.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 in this embodiment will be described. In the following description, the description of the same processing as that in each of the above embodiments will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing normal processing in the present embodiment. This process is performed in place of the normal process of FIG. 14 according to the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, a V distribution setting process (a process for controlling the position of the shutter 508) in step S2306 is added to the normal process of FIG. Details of the V distribution setting process will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, since the first special figure game times and the second special figure game times are performed one by one as in the case of the second embodiment, the game in step S2303 is performed. As the turn control process, the game turn control process of FIG. 35 according to the second embodiment is executed.

<Special map start processing>
Next, the special figure variation start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed in place of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 36 according to the second embodiment.

  In the special figure variation start process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. The second special figure flag is information for specifying that the current game time is the game time of the second special figure, and is stored in the storage area 634 based on winning in the second operation port 63. Is.

  If the second special figure flag is not stored, whether the second special figure flag is stored is determined by referring to the first special figure determination table (see FIG. 43A) in step S2402. If yes, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the second special figure (see FIG. 43 (b)) in step S2403. After execution of step S2402 or step S2403, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not each of the above-described determination results is a jackpot result.

  If it is a big win, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first special figure (see FIG. 45A) in step S2406, and the second special figure flag is set. If stored, in step S2407, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 45B).

  After execution of step S2406 or step S2407, it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the distributed game result is a 16R jackpot result. If it is a 16R jackpot result, a stop result corresponding to the 16R jackpot result is set as a stop result in the main display unit 43 in step S2409. In step S2409, the 16R flag is stored in the various flag storage area 634 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying the type of the current jackpot result.

  When the distributed game result is not a 16R jackpot result, it means that the game result is one of 5R jackpot results AC. In this case, a stop result corresponding to the 5R jackpot result is set as the stop result in the main display unit 43 in step S2410. In step S2410, any one of the 5R flags A to C is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying the type of the jackpot result of this time.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2411 whether or not the determination result in step S2402 or step S2403 is a special hit result. If it is a special hit result, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the type of the special hit result is an advantageous special hit result A or B. If any of these advantageous special hit results is obtained, a stop result corresponding to the advantageous special hit result is set as a stop result in the main display unit 43 in step S2413. Further, in step S2413, as information for specifying the type of the special hit result this time, the advantageous special hit flag A (corresponding to the advantageous special hit result A) or the advantageous special hit flag B (corresponding to the advantageous special hit result B). Are stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  When the type of the special hit result is not the advantageous special hit result A or B, that is, when the special hit result is an unfavorable special hit result, in step S2414, the stop result corresponding to the unfavorable special hit result is displayed as the stop result in the main display unit 43. Set. In step S2414, an unfavorable special hit flag is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying the type of the special hit result this time.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2411, that is, if the result of the current determination is neither a jackpot result or a special winning result, in step S2415, the stop result in the main display unit 43 is handled as a stop result. Set the stop result.

  After execution of steps S2409, S2410, and S2413 to S2415, the same processes as steps S1912 to S1914 of FIG. 36 are executed in steps S2416 to S2418, and then the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed in place of the gaming state transition process of FIG. 22 according to the first embodiment.

  In this gaming state transition process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2502, and any of the 16R flag, 5R flags A to C big hit flag, advantageous special hit flags A and B, and disadvantageous special hit flag are stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. It is determined whether or not the special winning flag or one of the V winning flags A and B is stored. The V winning flag is a flag stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the occurrence of a V prize in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result. Based on the storing of the V winning flag, a new opening / closing execution mode is executed after the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the game state transition process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the end timing of the corresponding game time variation display or the corresponding opening / closing execution mode is set. It is determined whether it is the end timing. Specifically, if any jackpot flag or any special hit flag is stored, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the corresponding game round, and the V winning flag is stored Determines whether it is the end timing of the corresponding opening / closing execution mode. If it is not at any end timing, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If it is one of the end timings, the process proceeds to step S2504, and the opening / closing execution mode start process is executed. This process is the same as step S1204 in FIG. In the subsequent step S2505, the presence / absence of a special hit flag is checked to set the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode. That is, it is determined whether any one of the advantageous special hit flags A and B and the disadvantageous special hit flag is stored.

  If none of these special winning flags is stored, it is determined in step S2506 whether the 16R flag or the V winning flag A is stored. If any of these flags is stored, “16” is set in the round number counter RC in step S2507, and if neither is stored, “5” is set in the round number counter RC in step S2508. Set. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, that is, if any of the advantageous special winning flags A and B and the disadvantageous special winning flag is stored, "1" is set to the round number counter RC in step S2509. .

  After executing any one of steps S2507 to S2509, an opening command setting process in step S2510 and an external signal setting process in step S2511 are executed. In the external signal setting process, whether or not the special hit signal output state is set may be changed depending on the type of the special hit result. For example, among the advantageous special hit results and disadvantageous special hit results, the signal output state of the special hit signal output terminal provided on the external terminal board 213 is changed to the special hit signal output state based on the advantageous special hit results. Based on the special hit result, the special hit signal output state may not be set. In this way, in the management control device on the game hall side, it is possible to grasp that the opening / closing execution mode based on the advantageous special hit result has occurred, while the opening / closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special hit result that occurs frequently is set. There is no need to grasp, and it is possible to avoid the complexity of data management and the increase in processing load due to frequent signal output.

  Returning to the description of step S2501, if the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, and the flow proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a big winning opening / closing process is executed in step S2513.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 65a or the distribution entrance 501 is closed, the variable for the first variable prize winning device 65 is set on condition that the round number counter RC is “1” or more. The prize winning drive part 65c or the driving part 503 for the second variable prize winning device 500 is set in the driving state to open the large prize winning opening 65a or the distribution entrance 501. In addition, when the big prize opening 65a or the distribution entrance 501 is open, a predetermined time (30 seconds at the big prize opening 65a, at the distribution entrance 501) from the opening of the special prize opening 65a or the distribution entrance 501. 0.1 sec or 1.8 sec) has elapsed or a predetermined number (all 10) of game balls have won a prize, and the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 65c or the driving unit 503 is stopped. Then, the special winning opening 65a or the distribution entrance 501 is closed.

  Further, in the big winning opening / closing process, it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred based on a detection result of the V winning detecting sensor 512 provided in the second variable winning device 500. Thereby, when the game ball wins the second variable winning device 500 in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the advantageous special winning result and the game ball flows into the V winning area 506, it is detected. If it is determined that a V winning has occurred, the V winning flag is stored in various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  After execution of the special prize opening / closing process, the determination processes of steps S2514 and S2515 are executed, and then the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S2516. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, first, in step S2601, various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604 are stored in the 16R flag, any one of the 5R flags A to C, and any one of the V winning flags A and B. It is determined whether or not a winning flag is stored. If any of them is stored, it is determined in step S2602 whether the 5R flag A, 16R flag, or V winning flag A is stored in the storage area 634.

  As a result, when none of these flags is stored, the 5R flag B, C or V winning flag B (a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends) is stored in the storage area 634. Means stored. In this case, the 5R flag B, C or V winning flag B in the storage area 634 is erased in step S2603, and then the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the 5R flag A, 16R flag or V winning flag A in the storage area 634 is deleted in step S2604, and then a high frequency support flag is set in the area 634 in step S2605. set. Thereby, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the subsequent step S2606, the value of the high frequency game number counter is set to “50”. The high frequency game number counter is for counting the number of executions of the special figure game times in the high frequency support mode. Each time the game time of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed, the high frequency game number counter is incremented by one. It is incremented. When the value of the high frequency game number counter becomes “0”, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Next, in step S2607, a high frequency support command (high frequency support setting information), which is information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, is notified to the notification / production control device 143. Set as a command to be sent to. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if the 16R flag, any of the 5R flags A to C, and the V winning flags A and B are not stored in the various flag storage areas 634 of the RAM 604. , It means that advantageous special hit flags A and B or disadvantageous special hit flags are stored. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2608, and it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the storage area 634. As described above, the V winning flag is stored when it is determined that a V winning has occurred in the large winning opening / closing process of step S2513 in FIG.

  If the V winning flag is stored, in the following step S2609, the advantageous special winning flag A, B or the disadvantageous special winning flag stored in the storage area 634 is erased together with the V winning flag, and then, in step S2610. The V winning flag A or B is stored in the same area 634. At this time, if the advantageous special hit flag A is stored in the storage area 634 before the execution of step S2609, the V winning flag A is stored, and the advantageous special hit is given to the storage area 634 before the execution of step S2609. If the flag B is stored, the V winning flag B is stored. Thereafter, in step S2611, a V winning command (V winning command) that is information for allowing the sub-side control device to recognize that the V winning has occurred, in other words, that the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the V jackpot is performed. Information) is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification / production control device 143. Note that the process of step S2611 may be executed when it is determined that a V prize has occurred in the big prize opening / closing process of step S2513. After execution of step S2611, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2608, that is, if it is determined that the V winning flag is not stored in the storage area 634, the advantageous special winning flags A and B stored in the same area 634 or the special disadvantage winning special The flag is deleted, and the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 48, after executing the transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S2516, the termination processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S2517, and then the gaming state transition processing is terminated.

  In the above game state transition processing, when a game ball passes the V winning area 506 during the one-round opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the V winning flag is stored based on that and then the V winning flag is stored. As a result of the rewriting process, a new opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the V jackpot is started after the opening / closing execution mode. In the new opening / closing execution mode, “16” or “5” is input to the round number counter RC in step S2507 or S2508, and 16 or 5 round games are performed on the first variable winning device 65 side. It will be. Since the number of winning balls when winning to the first variable winning device 65 occurs is 15 more than in the case of the second variable winning device 500 (three), the new opening / closing execution mode is described above. It is possible to expect a large amount of game balls to be obtained. On the other hand, if the V winning area 506 cannot be passed during the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the opening / closing execution mode is terminated as it is, and then a new opening / closing execution mode is not started.

<V distribution setting process>
Next, the V distribution setting process in step S2306 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V distribution setting process.

  In the V distribution setting process, first, in S2701, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode. If it is the start timing, “500” (that is, 1.0 sec) is set to the timer counter TC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 in step S2702. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. In a succeeding step S2703, “1” is set to the distribution number counter HC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604. The distribution number counter HC is a counter for the MPU 602 to grasp the number of operations of the shutter 508.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after executing the process of step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S 2704, it is determined whether or not the shutter 508 is positioned on the side of distributing to the V winning area 506 by grasping the driving state of the shutter driving unit 509. If the shutter 508 is located on the side of distribution to the discharge area 507, it is determined in step S2705 whether or not the timer counter TC is “0”.

  If the timer counter TC is not “0”, the distribution setting process ends. If it is “0”, it is determined in step S2706 whether the distribution counter HC is “0”. . If a negative determination is made in step S2706, that is, if the distribution counter HC is “1”, the shutter 508 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the V winning area 506 in step S2707. In subsequent step S2708, "1000" is set to timer counter TC. As a result, the period during which the shutter 508 is positioned on the distribution side to the V winning area 506 is set to 2.0 sec. After execution of step S2708 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, the distribution setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, that is, if the shutter 508 is positioned on the side for distributing to the V winning area 506, it is determined in step S2709 whether or not the timer counter TC is “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the period during which the shutter 508 is positioned on the side for distributing to the V winning area 506 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, after the shutter 508 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the discharge area 507 in step S2710, a process of subtracting 1 from the distribution number counter HC is executed in step S2711. After executing step S2711, or when making a negative determination in step S2709, the distribution setting process is terminated.

<Normal map change start processing>
Next, the universal change start process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed in place of the universal change start process of FIG. 25 according to the first embodiment. Specifically, steps S2805 to S2807 are executed instead of steps S1505 to S1507 in FIG.

  Explaining these processes, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S 2805, in step S 2806, the normal map change display time table for the low frequency support mode stored in the change display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the current normal map change is determined. The variable display time corresponding to the value of the type counter C5 is acquired. Here, with reference to FIG. 52 (a), the common map display time table for the low frequency support mode will be described.

  The usual figure change display time table for the low frequency support mode is the same as the usual figure pending storage number FN in the usual figure change display time table (see FIG. 10B) for the low probability mode according to the first embodiment. It is the same as the case where it is 1-3. That is, a fluctuation display time of 0.05 sec is set with a probability of 999/1000, and a fluctuation display time of 10 sec is set with a probability of 1/1000. For this reason, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, as long as the variable display time of 0.05 sec continues to be set, there is no (or difficult to) hold of the ordinary map, and the electric game is operated at each time of the ordinary game. Although the accessory 66 is opened, the state where the winning to the second operating port 63 does not occur (or is not likely to occur) continues. Then, by setting the variable display time of 10 sec, the usual figure reservation is accumulated, and a transition to the winning easy state for the second operation port 63 is made.

  However, in the common map variable display time table for the low frequency support mode according to the present embodiment, unlike the general map variable display time table of FIG. 10B according to the first embodiment, the common map hold The storage number FN and the variable display time are not associated with each other. That is, the variable display time is not distinguished by the usual figure reserved memory number FN, and even when the usual figure reserved memory number FN is four, the number of memorized numbers FN is 1 to 3 as in the case where the number is stored. A variable display time is selected. That is, when the usual figure storage number FN is four, a variable display time of 0.05 sec is basically set. For this reason, in this embodiment, after the variable display time of 10 sec is set, the stored number FN gradually decreases even if the game balls are continuously fired after the number of reserved figure FN in the general-purpose storage becomes four. It has become something to do. Note that the stop display time (determined display period) of the ordinary game times in the low frequency support mode is uniformly set to 0.4 sec regardless of the length of the variable display time.

  Returning to the description of the normal map variable display time of FIG. 51, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, that is, if the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 603 is determined in step S2807. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the current value of the common figure fluctuation type counter C5 is acquired by referring to the common figure fluctuation display time table for the high frequency support mode stored in 623. In the usual figure variable display time table for the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 52B, one type of 0.05 sec is prepared as a selectable variable display time. In other words, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time of 0.05 sec is always selected and set regardless of the value of the normal fluctuation type counter C5. Note that the stop display time in the high frequency support mode is uniformly set to 0.4 sec as in the low frequency support mode.

<Special effects processing>
Next, the special effect process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described with reference to FIGS. The special effect processing is for performing a predetermined effect display triggered by the fact that the variable display time of 10 sec is set in the ordinary game game. This process is started every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the special effect process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the low frequency support mode. Specifically, whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 162 indicating that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode is received, in other words, whether or not the command is stored in the RAM 654 of the MPU 652. Determine whether.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the special effect process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made, in step S2902, it is determined whether or not the second variable winning device 500 is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the release command (see step S2513 in FIG. 48) related to the second variable winning device 500 from the main control device 162 is stored in the RAM 654 of the MPU 652. As described above, since the second variable winning device 500 is a winning device that is controlled to open and close in the opening execution mode corresponding to the special winning result, step S2902 substantially includes the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result. It is determined whether or not is executed.

  If it is determined that the second variable winning device 500 is not being released, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the game times according to the second special figure are being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating command (see step S2417 in FIG. 47) according to the second special diagram transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. If the game times related to the second special figure are not executed, the first special effect process is executed in step S2904. Here, the first special effect process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the first special effect process, first, in step S2911, it is determined whether or not a universal map change command (see step S2809 in FIG. 51) transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. judge. If the common command change command has been received, in step S2912, based on the general map variation type command (see step S2809 in FIG. 51) transmitted from the main controller 162, the general command related to the variable command is received. It is determined whether or not the variable display time of the figure game times is set to 10 sec. If a negative determination is made in either of the above steps S2911, S2912, the first special effect process is terminated, whereas if an affirmative determination is made in step S2912, the variable display time is set to 10 seconds in step S2913. It is determined whether or not an ordinary game game is being executed.

  If it is not being executed, that is, if it is the fluctuation start timing of the ordinary game game times, the display process of the first special effect display is executed in step S2914, and then the first special effect process is terminated. The first special effect display S1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first special effect display S1 prompts the player to launch a game ball aimed at the through gate 35. That is, since the fluctuation display time of the usual figure game times is a special time that is much longer than the normal time (0.05 sec), and it becomes easy to store the figure reserved memory number FN, the game ball is placed in the through gate 35. By notifying that a prize should be awarded, the usual figure reserved memory number FN is guided to an upper limit value (4). In the first special effect display S1, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), for example, in the upper left part of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, an “point to the through gate” is displayed together with an arrow pointing to the through gate 35. A configuration that displays a character display 521 such as “Let me do it” is conceivable.

  Moreover, in 1st special production | presentation display S1, it is good to alert | report that the game ball should be discharge | released or continued with the said character display 521. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 57A, a character display 522 of “Do not stop firing” may be displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 75a so as not to overlap the character display 521. As a result, the game ball is not fired in the through gate 35 because the game ball has not been fired despite the fact that the variable display time of 10 sec is set, and the usual figure storage memory number FN can be stored sufficiently. Occurrence of inconvenience that it has not occurred is suppressed.

  Returning to the description of the process for the first special effect in FIG. 54, in the display process of the first special effect display in step S2914, a command including information on the content of the first special effect display S1 is output to the display control device 660. . The display control device 660 that has received the command reads the image data for the first special effect display S1 from the character ROM, and controls the symbol display device 75 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen 75a. .

  In addition, since the first special effect display S1 is executed based on the general game play times, the display screen 75a after the execution start time or after the execution, the variable display of the symbol (effect symbol) related to the first special figure is performed. It may be broken. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the first special effect display S1 may be executed such that the character display 521 and the character display 522 are displayed on the front side of the special design effect symbol. However, the character display 521 and the character display 522 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the symbol within a range in which the player can identify at least that the special symbol effect symbol is variably displayed. It remains to cover a part of the symbol row (variable display area) in the effect symbol. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to suppress oversight of the first special effect display S1 while properly grasping whether or not the special figure game times are executed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 54, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2913, that is, if the ordinary game game is being executed, whether or not it is the start timing for starting the second special effect display S2 in step S2915. Determine. The second special effect display S2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (b) and (c).

  In the second special effect display S2, two types of notifications are performed step by step. Specifically, the second special effect display S2-1 shown in FIG. 57 (b) is executed as the first stage, and the second special effect display S2-2 shown in FIG. 57 (c) is executed as the second stage. Has become. The second special effect display S2-1 at the first stage suggests that the player has a chance to win the V jackpot. As the second special effect display S2-1, for example, as shown in FIG. 57B, a configuration in which a character display 523 of “V challenge !!” is displayed at the center of the display screen 75a is conceivable. At this time, the character display 523 may be displayed larger than the character displays 521 and 522 in order to attract the player's attention. However, the visibility of the special-designed effect symbols is hindered. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the display area 524 for variably displaying the special effect design symbol is reduced, and the character display 523 and the display area 524 are displayed without being overlapped, or the character display 523 is displayed. A display area 524 may be provided in a blank area (a portion without characters). In that case, the display area 524 may be smaller than the character display 523 in order to make the character display 523 stand out.

  The second stage special effect display S2-2 in the second stage suggests that the player should launch the game ball aiming at the electric accessory 66 (second operation port 63). The game 63 is urged to win a game ball in the mouth 63. The flow until the V jackpot is won is as follows: winning of a game ball to the second operating port 63 → execution of an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a special winning result (opening / closing control of the second variable winning device 500) → second variable winning device The second special effect display S2-2 is used to guide the execution of the first step in the order of winning the game ball to 500 and passing the game ball in the V winning area 506. As the second special effect display S2-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), a configuration in which a character display 525 of “step1 aim at the electric chew!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 75a. It is done. “Electric Chu” is an abbreviation for electric tulip, in other words, a common name for the electric accessory 66 and the second operating port 63.

  In the present embodiment, the second special effect display S2 is started before a predetermined time (for example, 3 sec) before the variation display of the usual game times ends. In the process of step S2915 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the timing is 3 seconds before the end of the variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2915, display processing of the second special effect display S2 is executed in step S2916. In step S2916, a command including information on the content of the second special effect display S2 is output to the display control device 660. In the display control device 660, the second special effect display S2 is performed on the display screen 75a. The display device 75 is controlled. After the execution of step S2916 or when a negative determination is made in step S2915, the first special effect process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the special effect process in FIG. 53, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, that is, if the game times related to the second special figure are being executed, the second special effect process is executed in step S2905. Then, the special effect processing is terminated. Here, the second special effect process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the second special effect process, first, in step S2921, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery determination in the game times of the second special figure being executed is a special winning result. This process is performed based on the variation command of the second special figure transmitted from the main controller 162. In the case where the result of the lottery of the second special drawing is a special winning result, it is determined in step S2922 whether it is a start timing for starting the third special effect display S3-A. The third special effect display S3-A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The third special effect display S3-A suggests that the player should launch the game ball aiming at the second variable winning device 500, and winning the game ball to the second variable winning device 500. Is to encourage. The third special effect display S3-A guides the execution of the passing of the game ball in the V winning area 506 to the second variable winning device 500 in the flow until the above-mentioned V jackpot is won. Is to do. As the third special effect display S3-A, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), a configuration in which a character display 526 of “step 2 aim at the lower attacker!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 75a. It is done. The “lower attacker” refers to the second variable winning device 500, and is based on the fact that the winning device 500 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 60. Also in this case, the character display 526 is displayed larger than the display area 524 as in the case of the second special effect display S2.

  In the present embodiment, the third special effect display S3-A is started from a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the variation display of the second special figure game times ends. In the process of step S2922 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the timing of 2 seconds before the second special figure game times change display ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2922, display processing of the third special effect display S3-A is executed in step S2923. In step S2923, a command including information on the content of the third special effect display S3-A is output to the display control device 660. In the display control device 660, the third special effect display S3-A is performed on the display screen 75a. The symbol display device 75 is controlled as shown in FIG. In addition, when the third special effect display S3-A is executed, the special symbol design pattern (for example, 7 * 7) corresponding to the special hit result is stopped in the display area 524 corresponding to the end timing of the variable display. Is displayed. After the execution of step S2923 or when a negative determination is made in step S2922, the second special effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2921, that is, if the result of the winning / losing lottery in the game time of the second special figure being executed is not a special winning result, whether the result of the winning / losing lottery is a jackpot result in step S2924? Determine whether or not. If the result of the lottery determination is a jackpot result, display processing of the third special effect display S3-B is executed in step S2925. The third special effect display S3-B notifies the player that a big hit has occurred. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), a character display 527 of “hit!” Is displayed. The structure which performs is considered. The execution timing of the third special effect display S3-B can be, for example, the end timing of the variable display in the game times of the second special figure. Further, when the third special effect display S3-B is executed, the special symbol effect symbol (for example, 777) corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the display area 524. After the execution of step S2925 in FIG. 55 or when a negative determination is made in step S2924, the second special effect process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the special effect process in FIG. 53, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if the second variable winning device 500 is open, a V winning process is executed in step S2906. Here, the V winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the V winning process, first, in step S2931, it is determined whether or not a V winning command is received from the main controller 162, that is, whether or not a V winning is generated. If the V winning command has been received, display processing of the fourth special effect display S4 is executed in step S2932. The fourth special effect display S4 notifies the player that a V winning has occurred, in other words, that a V jackpot has been won. As the fourth special effect display S4, for example, as shown in FIG. 58B, a configuration in which a character display 528 of “V jackpot !!” is displayed at the center of the display screen 75a is conceivable. Also in this case, the character display 528 is displayed larger than the display area 524 as in the case of the second special effect display S2. In the process of step S2932 of FIG. 56, a command including information on the content of the fourth special effect display S4 is output to the display control device 660. In the display control device 660, the fourth special effect display S4 is displayed on the display screen 75a. The symbol display device 75 is controlled as described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2931, that is, if no V winning command is received from the main control device 162, it is determined in step S2933 whether the second variable winning device 500 is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a closing command (see step S2513 in FIG. 48) related to the second variable winning device 500 transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. When the second variable winning device 500 is not closed (when the second variable winning device 500 is open), the V winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second variable winning device 500 is closed, it is determined in step S2934 whether or not the number of reserved memories in the second special figure is zero.

  When the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is not 0, that is, when it is 1 or more, there is a possibility that the second variable winning device 500 may be opened again. In this case, in step S2935, the fifth special effect display The display process of S5 is executed, and then the V winning process is terminated. The fifth special effect display S5 notifies the player that there is a chance to win the V jackpot. As the fifth special effect display S5, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), a configuration in which a character display 529 of “Still More !!” is displayed at the center of the display screen 75a. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the maximum number of reservations when a game ball wins the second operation port 63 is set to four. For this reason, if the hold information of the second special figure can be stored up to the upper limit value, the second variable winning device 500 can be opened four times.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2934 of FIG. 56, display processing of the sixth special effect display S6 is executed in step S2936. The sixth special effect display S6 is for informing the player that the V jackpot has not been won. As the sixth special effect display S6, for example, as shown in FIG. 58D, a configuration in which a character display 530 of “sorry ...” is displayed at the center of the display screen 75a is conceivable. In the processing of steps S2935 and S2936 in FIG. 56, a command including information on the contents of the fifth special effect display S5 or the sixth special effect display S6 is output to the display control device 660. The display control device 660 controls the symbol display device 75 so that the effect display S5 or S6 is performed on the display screen 75a.

  To briefly summarize the flow of the special effect processing described above, when the support display mode is set to the low-frequency support mode and the fluctuation display time of the general figure game times is set to 10 seconds, the change of the normal figure game times starts. At the timing, the first special effect display S1 shown in FIG. 57 (a) is displayed. After that, when 3 seconds before the normal game play ends, the second special effect display S2-1 shown in FIGS. 57B and 57C is displayed, and then the second special effect display S2-2 is displayed. Is done.

  After completion of the ordinary game play, the ordinary figure holding information stored in the execution period of the game is digested, and the electric accessory 66 is released based on the result of the lottery drawing lottery result. . At this time, when the game ball wins the second operation port 63, the game turn according to the second special drawing is started. When the result of the winning / losing lottery result is a special winning result, the third special effect display S3-A shown in FIG. 57 (d) is displayed from 2 seconds before the game time variable display ends.

  When the result of the lottery determination relating to the second special drawing is a special winning result, the second variable winning device 500 is released after the game times of the second special drawing relating to the said special lottery are over. Then, when a game ball wins the second variable winning device 500 and the game ball flows into the V winning area 506, a fourth special effect display S4 shown in FIG. 58B is displayed. On the other hand, if a game ball does not win the second variable winning device 500, or if a game ball wins the second variable winning device 500 and is distributed to the discharge area 507, the second special figure at that time. The fifth special effect display S5 shown in FIG. 58C or the sixth special effect display S6 shown in FIG. In addition, when the result of the success / failure lottery pertaining to the second special figure is a jackpot result, the third special effect display shown in FIG. S3-B is displayed.

<About the game flow>
Next, a game flow in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the gaming state.

  When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the usual figure reserved memory number FN = 0 (first normal game state), it is the same as the first normal game state in the second embodiment. That is, in the first normal gaming state, the game is substantially advanced by winning only the first operating port 62. If the 5R jackpot result A is obtained in the winning lottery relating to the first operating port 62 (first special figure), after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to an advantageous gaming state in which the high-frequency support mode is set. To do. Since the ratio of the 5R jackpot result A to the jackpot result of the first special figure is 50/100 (see FIG. 45A), when the jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state with a probability of 50%.

  In the advantageous gaming state, winning to the second operating port 63 is likely to occur, and the lottery result of the second operating port 63 (second special drawing) is a special winning result (see FIG. 43 (b)). For this reason, in the advantageous gaming state, the second variable winning device 500 is frequently controlled to open and close in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result. At that time, if the type of the special winning result is an advantageous special winning result A or B, the game balls won in the second variable winning device 500 are easily distributed to the V winning area 506, and if the special winning result is a disadvantageous second result. The game balls won in the variable winning device 500 are easily distributed to the discharge area 507 (see FIG. 44). Since the ratio of the special special results A and B in the special special results of the second special figure is 50% (see Fig. 43 (b)), it is easily advantageous even when there are restrictions on the prescribed number (50 times). Special hit results A and B can be assigned, and V big hit is likely to occur.

  In the present embodiment, the first working port 62, the through gate 35, the second working port 63, and the electric accessory 66 are arranged on the left route side, and the second variable winning device 500 has a game ball flowing down the left route. Winning is possible. For this reason, not only in the first normal gaming state, but also in the advantageous gaming state, the game ball is fired to the left route side to play, but in the first normal gaming state, it is impossible to expect a V jackpot as much as possible. On the other hand, in the advantageous gaming state, V jackpots are likely to occur, and the gameability is clearly separated. Moreover, in addition to the fact that the number of round games executed in the opening / closing execution mode is likely to increase in the V jackpot, the probability of shifting to the advantageous gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends is also high (see FIG. 45). Since the game state at the beginning of the game is the first normal game state, the player first becomes a big win result in the first lottery's winning / losing lottery, and then distributes it to the 5R jackpot result A as the big win type. The greatest concern is whether it can be achieved.

  Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, when the variable display time of the usual game time is set to 10 sec in the first normal game state, the usual figure reserved memory number FN can be increased to four. In this case, as described in the above embodiments, the second normal gaming state in which the winning to the second operation port 63 is more likely to occur than in the first normal gaming state, although not as high as the high frequency support mode. Transition. In other words, even if the gaming state does not shift to the advantageous gaming state, an opportunity to receive a lottery for the second operating port 63 (second special drawing) comes. Since there is no difference between the second normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state in the second special figure's winning / losing lottery mode (probability of special winning result and distribution of special winning result type), the normal gaming state and However, there will be a chance to win a V jackpot.

  However, in the present embodiment, there is no distinction of the variable display time according to the general-purpose reserved memory number FN, and even if the general-purpose reserved memory number FN is four, it is the same as in the case of 1-3. Most of them are set to 0.05 sec. When the variable display time is set to 0.05 sec, the digestion cycle of the general figure hold information is the general figure game period (the period from the start of the general figure game times to the start of the next general figure game times) 0.55 sec, which is shorter than 0.6 sec, which is the winning cycle of the game ball to the through gate 35. For this reason, after the variable display time is set to 10 sec and the general figure reservation memory number FN increases, the general figure reservation information is digested in a cycle shorter than the replenishment cycle. FN gradually decreases.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 60, after the regular game game with a variable display time of 10 sec is completed, the first time is t51 which is delayed from the timing by the opening time (0.1 sec) of the electric accessory 66. In the case where the first game play is started and the first winning to the through gate 35 occurs at a timing t52 which is further delayed by 0.1 sec, as shown in FIG. If it is assumed that the player has won 35, the ordinary game number of games can be executed 11 times as the number of the ordinary game reservation storage number FN decreases. In other words, until ten times of the usual game game times are executed, even if the number of reserved figure FN is reduced by 1, the game ball is won by the through gate 35 before the second number is reduced and 1 Although the number of pieces of hold information is supplemented, the 11th ordinary game game is executed before the supplement of the hold information. Such a flow is the same in the process in which the number of reserved maps FN is decreased one by one. Therefore, after the number of stored maps FN becomes 4, the stored number is 0. It is possible to execute 44 ordinary game times at the maximum, and to continue the second normal game state during that time.

  Incidentally, the release cycle of the electric utility item 66 and the arrival cycle of the game ball to the specific area RA2 (see FIG. 5B) in the present embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment shown in FIG. It becomes the same as the case of b), and becomes 0.55 sec and 0.6 sec, respectively. In this case, changes in the time difference A (time difference in arrival timing with respect to the opening timing) and time difference B (time difference in arrival timing with respect to the closing timing) occur every 0.05 seconds each time the usual game is repeated, and to the second operation port 63. The winning probability of the game ball is 2/11 (about 1/6).

  Under such conditions, when a game ball can be won in the second operating port 63, the result of the winning / losing lottery becomes an advantageous special winning result, so that the second variable winning device 500 can perform high allocation. An opening / closing execution mode that is controlled to open / close in this manner is executed. If the second variable prize-winning device 500 can win a game ball in the opening / closing execution mode, a V prize is generated and a V jackpot can be obtained. That is, even if the support mode is not shifted to the high frequency support mode, it is possible to expect the occurrence of V jackpot.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As a transition route to a gaming state where V jackpot can be expected, apart from the first route triggered by the result of the lottery result being jackpot results, The second route is provided. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to win a V jackpot without obtaining a jackpot result, and it is possible to expand the range of ways to enjoy. In addition, since the ordinary reserved memory number FN is used as the transition condition, it is easy to give the player the impression that the game state is acquired by his / her skill, and the interest is improved. In that case, the advantage level (ease of winning the second operating port 63) of the easy winning state (second normal gaming state) that shifts through the second route is the easy winning state (high frequency) that shifts through the first route. Support mode) is set lower than that. As a result, it is possible not only to suppress excessive advantage, but also to expand the opportunities for acquiring V jackpots while suppressing the reduction in attractiveness of jackpots.

  After the number of stored customs FN reaches a predetermined number or more, the normal display change display time is set to 0.05 sec, and after the game ball wins the through gate 35, the support of the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the winning The specific period (0.05 sec) until the state ends is configured to be shorter than the game ball firing cycle. In this case, the usual figure reserved memory number FN can be reduced naturally, and the second normal gaming state can be made temporary. As a result, it is possible to limit so that excessive advantage such as excessive generation of V jackpot is not promoted. In addition, even if the second normal gaming state is entered, the winning of the game ball to the second variable prize-winning device 500 and the occurrence of the V winning are not assured. You can play under tension that might end, and your interest will improve. In addition, the execution period of the second normal gaming state does not become a predetermined one, but changes in a fluid manner depending on the winning situation to the through gate 35. In other words, while the player is in the second normal gaming state, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the state will continue, so that the above tension can be suitably enhanced.

  While the gaming state is in the second normal gaming state, a notification (character display 522) that prompts execution of the firing operation is continuously displayed. Thereby, it is suppressed that a player refrains from the launch operation, and the second normal gaming state is suppressed from being unreasonably terminated early.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 60 is different from the above-described embodiments. FIG. 62 shows the configuration of the game board 60 in the present embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to said each embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 are provided. Of the plurality of variable winning devices 65, the lower variable winning device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 67, more specifically below the first operation port 62. On the other hand, among the plurality of variable winning devices 65, the upper variable winning device 710 is disposed on the left side of the variable display unit 67, more specifically, above the through gate 35. When the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the lottery on the special figure side, either the lower variable winning device 700 or the upper variable winning device 710 is controlled to open / close.

  The configuration of the variable winning devices 700 and 710 is the same as the configuration of the variable winning device 65. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the lower variable winning device 700 and the upper variable winning device 710 are respectively formed with a lower large winning port 700a and an upper large winning port 710a leading to the back side of the game board 60. A lower opening / closing door 700b and an upper opening / closing door 710b are provided as opening / closing means for opening / closing the lower large winning opening 700a and the upper large winning opening 710a, respectively. The lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b are normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or difficult to win, and the game balls are likely to win in the internal lottery when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It can be switched to the open state. A lower variable prize driving unit 700c is connected to the lower opening / closing door 700b, an upper variable prize driving unit 710c is connected to the upper opening / closing door 710b, and the main controller 162 includes the lower variable prize driving unit 700c and the upper variable prize driving unit 700c. The opening / closing control of the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b is performed by controlling the winning driving unit 710c.

  More specifically, regarding the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b, when the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b are in a closed state, the front surface of the game board 60 and the front surfaces of the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b are When the game ball flows down in front of the game board 60, the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b do not become barriers. On the other hand, when the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b are opened, the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b stand up with respect to the game board 60, and the game balls flowing down in front of the game board 60 are lower opening / closing doors. By being received from below by the 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b, it is guided to the lower prize winning opening 700a and the upper prize winning opening 710a. In other words, when the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b are in the closed state, the game ball can flow down in front of the lower opening / closing door 700b and the upper opening / closing door 710b. Game balls can no longer flow down the front.

  By arranging the lower variable prize winning device 700 as described above, the lower variable prize winning device 700 is allowed to win any game ball of the game ball flowing down the left route and the game ball flowing down the right route. Is done. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the left route are allowed to win, but the game balls flowing down the right route are avoided from winning.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the variable winning unit 65 is not provided on the right side of the variable display unit 67. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode, when the operation amount of the game ball launching handle 41 is adjusted so as to flow down the right route, a prize is generated in the opening / closing execution mode by the lower variable winning apparatus 700, but the upper variable winning apparatus 710 In the opening / closing execution mode, no winning occurs. In other words, by adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41 so as to flow down the left route in the opening / closing execution mode, a winning can be generated in any opening / closing execution mode by the variable winning devices 700 and 710. It becomes possible.

  As the operation port on the special drawing side in the present embodiment, a first operation port 62 is provided below the variable display unit 67 and above the lower variable winning device 700. Further, a second operation port 63 is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67 and below the upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35.

  When a winning to the first operating port 62 occurs, the winning lottery on the first special figure side is performed as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when a winning is made to the second operating port 63, unlike the first embodiment, the winning / not-squeezing lottery on the second special figure side is performed instead of the winning / squeeze lottery side on the first special figure side. Therefore, in order to clearly distinguish from the first working port 62 and the second working port 63 in the first embodiment, in the following description, the first working port 62 in the present embodiment is also referred to as the fourth working port 720. In the present embodiment, the second operation port 63 is also referred to as a fifth operation port 730.

  Here, the positional relationship between the fifth operating port 730, the upper variable prize-winning device 710, and the through gate 35 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with a predetermined gap therebetween. Specifically, both are arranged such that the center axis of the upper variable prize-winning device 710 and the center axis of the through gate 35 coincide in the vertical direction. Between the upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35, a pair of left and right game nails arranged in the horizontal direction are planted. The space between the left game nail 69e and the right game nail 69f is arranged to be slightly larger than the diameter D of the game ball, and the upper game nail pair 69a, 69b and the lower game nail pair 69c, 69d They are arranged so as to be aligned on the same vertical line. The distance between the lower end of the upper open / close door 710b and the left and right game nails 69e and 69f and the distance between the left and right game nails 69e and 69f and the upper end of the through gate 35 in the upper variable winning device 710 are the diameter of the game ball. It is smaller than the dimension D. For this reason, when the upper open / close door 710b of the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is in the open state, the game ball cannot pass between the upper open / close door 710b and the through gate 35, and the through gate 35 is awarded a prize. Avoided. On the other hand, when the upper open / close door 710b of the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is in a closed state, the game ball flows down in front of the upper open / close door 710b, thereby allowing a winning to the through gate 35.

  The positional relationship between the through gate 35 and the fifth operating port 730 is as described in the first embodiment, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the fifth operating port 730, and the through The nails 69 a to 69 b are provided so that a game ball that does not pass through the gate 35 does not reach the fifth operation port 730. Further, the required period from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 until it reaches the fifth operating port 730 is also set to be the same as that in the first embodiment (0.6 sec).

  As in the first embodiment, the fifth operating port 730 is provided with an electric accessory 66. Based on the winning to the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66 is released almost every time, and in the normal case, no winning is generated even if the electric accessory 66 is opened, and based on the winning to the through gate 35. The long transition display time on the normal map side is set (the change display time of 10.0 sec is selected with a probability of 1/1000), and after the transition to the winning easy state The point that the winning easy state continues as long as the periodic holding replenishment (winning to the through gate 35) occurs until the number of holdings disappears is the same as in the first embodiment. Incidentally, the winning easy state in the present embodiment refers to a state in which winning to the fifth operating port 730 is allowed based on the increase in the number of the usual figure storage number FN, in the third embodiment. This refers to the second normal gaming state. The same applies to the case where it is expressed as a winning easy state in the following description. Such an easy winning state may be referred to as a winning assist state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side are executed simultaneously in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a winning to the fourth working port 720 is generated, the first special figure winning / losing lottery is executed. Further, when the left route is made to flow down to generate a prize for the through gate 35, a prize for the fifth operation port 730 is not generated in a normal state, but a prize is easily entered, so that a prize is given to the fifth operation port 730. Can occur. Then, as long as the winning easy state continues, the winning / non-winning lottery for the second special drawing based on winning in the fifth operating port 730 is executed.

  The first special figure success / failure determination process (step S701), the first special figure assignment determination process (step S703), the second special figure success / failure determination process (step S1101), and the second special figure vibration. The minute determination process (step S1103) is the same as that of the first embodiment, and if either of the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result is won by the first special figure side lottery, 16 rounds Transition to open / close execution mode. In addition, if either of the 16R probability variation jackpot result or 16R normal jackpot result is won by the winning lottery on the second special figure side, the mode shifts to the 16 round opening / closing execution mode, and if the special winning result is won, 1 round opening / closing is executed. Transition to mode.

  However, in the present embodiment, the variation display time of the game times based on the fact drawing lottery for special drawing is different from the first embodiment and the like. In other words, in the present embodiment, in the game times on the first special figure side, the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table of FIG. On the other hand, in the game time on the second special figure side, the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the easy-to-win state is set to be ended by performing the opening / closing execution mode. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process in the present embodiment. The big prize opening / closing process is a process executed in step S1211 in the game state transition process (FIG. 22).

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S3101, it is determined based on the driving state of the variable winning driving units 700c and 710c whether or not any of the big winning ports 700a and 710a is opened. If it is determined that none of the special prize winning openings 700a and 710a are open, the process proceeds to step S3102.

  In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is “0”. If it is not “0”, it is determined in step S3103 whether the open / close timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 is “0”. The open / close timer counter T is a counter for the MPU 602 to grasp the timing for opening and closing the special winning openings 700a and 710a. The value of the open / close timer counter T is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. The case where it is determined in step S3103 that the open / close timer counter T is “0” indicates the start timing of the round, which is the timing at which one of the big winning openings 700a and 710a should be opened. ing. If it is determined in step S3103 that the open / close timer counter T is “0”, an opening time setting process is executed in step S3104.

  In the opening time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is based on the jackpot result. If it is based on the jackpot result, in step S3202, a process of inputting a numerical value (15000) corresponding to 30 sec as the upper limit opening time of the current round game to the open / close timer counter T is executed. On the other hand, if it is not the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result but based on the special hit result, in step S3203, the numerical value (900) corresponding to 1.8 sec is set as the upper limit opening time of the current round game, and the opening / closing timer is set. A process of inputting to the counter T is executed. After executing the process of step S3202 or step S3203, the opening time setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the big winning opening / closing process, in step S3105, the upper limit winning number of each round is set. In the present embodiment, the upper limit winning number is set to 10 in both the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result and the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result. Specifically, a process of setting “10” to the winning number counter PC provided in the various counter areas 633 of the RAM 604 is executed. These upper limit opening time and upper limit winning number are the same as in the first embodiment, and in each round based on the jackpot result, it is expected that the upper limit winning number (10 pieces) of game balls will be won, while the special winning result In the round based on, the maximum number of winning game balls cannot be expected, and at most three winnings will occur.

  In step S3106, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is based on the result of the lottery on the first special figure side. When it is based on the result of the first lottery side winning / no-win lottery, in step S3107, an upper prize winning opening process is executed. In this process, the drive control of the upper variable winning drive unit 710c is started so that the upper large winning opening 710a is opened, and the upper open / close door 710b is switched to the open state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3106 that the current opening / closing execution mode is based on the result of the lottery on the second special figure side, in step S3108, the lower big prize opening opening process is executed. In this process, the drive control of the lower variable winning drive unit 700c is started so that the lower large prize opening 700a is opened, and the lower open / close door 700b is switched to the open state.

  After the processing of step S3107 or step S3108 is executed, the opening command is set as an output target to the notification / production control device 143 in step S3109, and then the big prize opening / closing processing is ended. The opening command includes information indicating the round game to be started this time as well as information on the special winning openings 700a and 710a to be opened, and the notification / production control device 143 has received the information. Based on the opening command, the contents of the production corresponding to the round game to be started and the special winning openings 700a and 710a to be opened are determined, and various devices are controlled so that the contents of the decided production are executed. The contents of the effect include a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 143 to the display control device 660 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the notification / production control device 143, the display control device 660 performs a display corresponding to the current round game (for example, a display indicating the number of rounds and the special winning opening to be opened). The display of the symbol display device 75 is controlled.

  If it is determined in step S3101 that any of the big winning openings 700a and 710a is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S3110. In step S3110, it is determined whether the open / close timer counter T is “0” and the upper limit open time has elapsed. If it is determined that the open / close timer counter T is not “0”, whether or not a game ball has won any of the variable winning devices 700 and 710 is detected in step S3111. And it determines based on the detection state of the detection sensor 710d for upper variable prize-winning devices 710. If it is determined that a winning has occurred in any of the variable winning devices 700 and 710, a process of subtracting 1 from the winning number counter PC is executed in step S3112. In step S3113, it is determined whether or not the winning number counter PC after the subtraction is “0” and the winning of the upper limit winning number has occurred. If it is determined in step S3111 that no winning has occurred, or if it is determined in step S3113 that the upper limit winning number has not been reached, the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3110 that the upper limit opening time has elapsed, or if it is determined in step S3113 that the upper limit winning number has been won, a big winning opening closing process is executed in step S3114. In the big winning opening closing process, the big winning openings 700a and 710a in the open state are determined based on the driving state of the variable winning driving units 700c and 710c, and the corresponding variable winning driving unit 700c, By finishing the drive control of 710c, the special winning openings 700a and 710a are closed. In step S3115, a process of subtracting 1 from the round number counter RC is executed. In step S3116, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC after the subtraction has become “0”.

  If the round number counter RC is not “0”, a standby time setting process is executed in step S3117. The waiting time setting process is a period from the closing of the winning prize openings 700a and 710a to the next opening, and a waiting time between round games, so-called interval period (interval). Time). In the present embodiment, the interval period is set as 0.5 sec, which is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec). More specifically, in step S3117, a process of inputting a numerical value (250) corresponding to 0.5 sec to the open / close timer counter T is executed. In step S3118, the closing command is set as an output target to the notification / production control device 143, and then the big prize opening / closing process is terminated. The closing command includes information indicating what round game the round to be ended this time is, and the notification / production control device 143 notifies the end of the round game based on the closing command. The display control device 660 and the like are controlled to perform the above.

  If it is determined in step S3116 that the round number counter RC is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S3119. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the open / close timer counter T.

  Thereafter, in step S3120, the ending command is set as an output target to the notification / production control device 143, and then the special winning opening / closing process is ended. Based on the received ending command, the notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode to be ended, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  The relationship between the winning easy state and the round game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  As described above, the through gate 35 can be won in a situation where the upper prize winning opening 710a is in a closed state, and no winning can be made when the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened. The top prize winning opening 710a is in the open state when the winning lottery result as the result of the first special figure side winning lottery, and when the big winning result is obtained in the second special figure side winning lottery result When a special winning result is obtained in the winning lottery on the second special figure side, an opening / closing execution mode in which the lower prize winning opening 700a is opened is executed.

  For example, a case where the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened at timing t60 will be described. A game ball that reaches the upper university winning opening 710a before the timing t60 may not win the upper university winning opening 710a but may enter the through gate 35. If the state prior to the timing t60 is the easy winning state, the usual figure reserved storage number FN is maintained at a constant number by winning the through gate 35, and the easy winning state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the top prize winning opening 710a is opened at timing t60, for example, the game ball that reaches the top prize winning opening 710a at timing t61 wins the top prize winning opening 710a. As a result, winning through the through gate 35 does not occur. Even if the opening / closing execution mode is configured so that the game times on the normal side can proceed, no winnings are added to the through gate 35 and no hold is added, but as the game times on the normal side continue, Only the on-hold digestion on the figure side is performed.

  Here, most of the game balls fired so as to flow down the left route reach the upper prize winning opening 710a. Therefore, if the round game started at timing t60 continues to be fired to the left route, a period obtained by multiplying the launch period of the game ball by the upper limit winning number of round games (hereinafter also referred to as the shortest duration). , 0.6 sec × 10 = 6 sec). That is, the round game started at the timing t60 can be ended at the timing t63 when the shortest duration elapses when the launch to the left route is continued. Then, the shortest continuation period is from the period from the situation where the upper limit number of hold information on the usual map side is stored (the situation where the usual figure hold memory number FN is 4) to the time when the usual figure hold memory number FN becomes zero. Is also set to be long.

  Specifically, when starting from a situation in which the upper limit number (4) of pending information on the general map side is stored, first, the general game game times in the situation in which the four pending information on the general map side is stored The variable display time is set to 0.6 sec (FIG. 10), and after 1.1 sec including the stop display period (0.4 sec) and the support period (0.1 sec), three pieces of pending information are stored. The usual game play in the situation is started. Most of the variable display times of the ordinary game times are set to 0.05 sec (FIG. 10), and after 0.55 sec including the stop display period and the support period, two pieces of pending information are stored. The usual game play time will be started. Similarly, the usual game game time is started in a situation where one piece of hold information is stored after 0.55 sec, and the normal game game time is ended after 0.55 sec. In other words, from the situation where the upper limit number of hold information on the normal map side is stored, if the game times on the normal map side proceed in a situation where there is no replenishment of the hold information, 1.1 sec + 0.55 sec + 0.55 sec + 0.55 sec = 2.75 sec later The hold information on the normal map side becomes 0, and the game on the normal map side is not being played. Even if supplementary information is replenished immediately after the start of a general-game game in a situation where the upper-limit number of pending information is stored in the usual figure side, four pieces of pending information are provided in 2.75 sec. After 3.85 seconds after adding 1.1 seconds, which is the usual game game period, the game will not be played on the usual game side.

  In other words, when the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened and the round game is started, in order to end the round game, the general figure hold memory is stored from the situation where the upper limit number of hold information is stored. A period longer than the period until the number FN becomes 0 is required, and at the timing t62 during the round game, the easy winning state (second normal gaming state) is the non-winning state (first normal gaming state, (The state without winning assistance to the fifth working port 730).

  When the current round game ends at timing t63, an interval period is set, and the next round game is started after the interval period has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the interval period is set to a period shorter than the firing period (step S3117), and no prize is won for the through gate 35 during the interval period. In other words, when the upper limit winning number of round games is awarded to the upper prize winning opening 710a at the timing t63 and the round game is finished, the game balls that are fired next to the game balls are fired at the firing cycle from the timing t63. The upper prize winning opening 710a is reached at a later timing t65. Then, at the timing t64, which is a timing prior to the timing t65, the next round game is started, and the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened. For this reason, there is no room for supplementing the hold information on the normal side during the interval period.

  Also, if the game ball is stopped during the round game in which the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened, or if the right route is fired instead of the left route, the round game starts from the above shortest end period (6 sec). Also continues for a long period of time. For example, if there is a period during which a winning to the upper prize winning opening 710a does not occur during the round game started at timing t64, the round game has the longest upper limit opening period (30 sec) at timing t66. It will end at. Also in this case, the usual figure reservation storage number FN becomes 0 during the round game.

  Incidentally, when the round game ends based on the elapse of the upper limit opening period as described above, a winning to the through gate 35 may occur during the interval period. In other words, when the round game ends based on the elapse of the upper limit opening period, the winning at the upper prize winning opening 710a does not occur at the end timing. The game ball can reach the upper prize winning opening 710a (timing t67). Then, the reached game ball wins the through gate 35 without winning the upper prize winning opening 710a. However, since the interval period is shorter than the firing period, even if the game ball reaches the top prize winning opening 710a during the interval period, it is limited to one ball. As described above, since the round game continues for the upper limit opening period, the winning easy state is switched to the winning non-easy state. It does not switch from the state to the easy-to-win state.

  Moreover, as already explained, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, round games are performed 16 times. Therefore, for example, even when a long variation display time (10 sec, see FIG. 10) is selected in the game times for the hold information on the normal map side stored before the start of the opening / closing execution mode, By the end of the opening / closing execution mode, all suspensions are consumed. That is, each round game requires 6 seconds at the shortest and 0.5 sec is set as the interval period. Therefore, if the opening period and the ending period are not included, the 16-round opening / closing execution mode is 6 sec × 16 + 0. 5 sec × 15 = 103.5 sec is required. On the other hand, even if a long variable display time is selected in all game times performed in a situation where the number of reserved figure storage FN is 1 to 3 (FIG. 10), 1.1 sec (when 4 holds) ) + 10.5 sec (when 3 holds) + 10.5 sec (when 2 holds) + 10.5 sec (when 1 hold) = 32.6 sec. Even in the case (+1.1 sec), there is no hold information before the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the winning easy state is switched to the winning not easy state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the first lottery side lottery is the end timing of the easy winning state (the transition timing to the non-winning state). The flow of the game in the present embodiment using this configuration will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 67 and the explanatory diagrams of the game states of FIG.

  When a winning to the fourth operating port 720 occurs at timing t70, which is a situation where the winning of electric component 66 is not supported and the winning is not easy, a game turn on the first special figure side is started and at timing t71. The game round ends. When the game time on the first special figure side started at timing t72 is a jackpot result (in FIG. 67, the game times that are the jackpot result are indicated by black arrows, and the game is a special hit result The open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result is performed at the top prize winning opening 710a. When a prize is awarded to the upper prize winning opening 710a, a predetermined number (15) of prize balls are paid out. In the opening / closing execution mode, the number of rounds (16 times) multiplied by the maximum number of winning prizes (10) can be generated. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode, the player receives a large number of prize balls (10 × 16 times × 15 = 2400) can be received, and when the opening / closing execution mode ends at timing t73, the number of holding balls is greatly increased.

  As already described, in the situation where the game route on the first special figure side is executed by flowing down the left route, a prize is awarded to the through gate 35, and the normal figure based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is generated. When the long variation display time is selected in the game game on the side, the game shifts to a winning easy state. For example, if the state is shifted to the winning easy state at the timing t74, a winning to the fifth operating port 730 occurs, and the game game on the second special figure side based on the winning to the fifth operating port 730 is performed at the timing t75. Be started.

  Most of the game times on the second special figure side are special hit results. The one-round opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result is executed at the lower prize winning opening 700a. As a result, a one-round opening / closing execution mode is started at a timing t76 at which the game times on the second special figure side started at the timing t75 are completed. Further, the opening / closing execution mode of one round is started at the timing t78 when the game time on the second special figure side started at the timing t77 ends. In the figure, the start timing on the second special figure side is shown as the same timing as the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode. The game play on the side is not started. However, if the winning state is easy as described above, the winning to the fifth operation port 730 occurs relatively early, and the game game on the second special drawing side starts early after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It becomes.

  As described above, also in the present embodiment, the game times on the first special figure side can be executed while the game times on the second special figure side are executed, and the game times on the first special figure side can be executed. 2. The game times on the special figure side can be executed. Then, when one game time is being executed and the other game time is ended as a game result accompanied by a shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the one game time being executed is forcibly ended. Therefore, at the timing t76 and the timing t78, when the game times on the second special figure side are terminated as a special winning result, the game times on the first special figure side being executed are compulsorily compulsory. Is terminated. Then, on the condition that there is holding information on the first special figure side, the game times on the first special figure side are started after the opening / closing execution mode based on the special hit result is completed.

  Then, when the game times on the second special figure side can be executed based on the easy winning state as described above, the one-round opening / closing execution mode frequently occurs, and the holding ball gradually increases. It will be. In other words, not only is winning allowed to the fifth operating port 730 based on the winning easy state being achieved, but a winning ball is obtained by a one-round opening / closing execution mode based on winning for the fifth operating port 730. It becomes possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player.

  Moreover, the game in such an advantageous state can be carried out while continuing the easy winning state. Therefore, in the game, the winning ball in the open / close execution mode based on the special winning result (15 ×) while suppressing the decrease of the holding ball by the winning ball (10) due to the winning to the fifth operation port 730 that occurs frequently. About 3 = about 45) can be obtained.

  When the game time on the second special figure side started at the timing t79 is a big hit result, at the timing t80, a 16 round opening / closing execution mode is executed at the lower major winning opening 700a. Even in the opening / closing execution mode, the player can receive a large amount of prize balls (10 × 16 times × 15 = 2400), and when the opening / closing execution mode ends at timing t81, The holding ball has increased significantly.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the second special figure side can be executed based on the winning easy state, and a state that can be expected in the opening / closing execution mode of the special winning result (so-called small hit rush) ) Moreover, even in such a state, it can be expected that a jackpot result will be obtained, and if a jackpot result is obtained, it is possible to obtain a ball in the 16-round opening / closing execution mode. If the jackpot result is based on the lottery on the second special figure side, the easy-to-win state continues and it is possible to play a game in a state where the special winning result can be expected.

  Moreover, if the jackpot result is a probabilistic jackpot result, it can be expected that the next jackpot result will be achieved at an early stage, so it is possible to obtain a large number of balls by chaining the open / close execution modes of the jackpot result and the special hit result. It becomes.

  On the other hand, as described above, if a game on the second special figure side is made to flow down the left route, a winning to the fourth operating port 720 may inevitably occur, and the first special figure The side game will also be executed in parallel. Then, for example, when a big win result is obtained at the game time on the first special figure side started at timing t82, the opening / closing execution mode by the top prize winning opening 710a is performed at timing t83. As a result, although winning to the upper prize winning opening 710a is permitted and a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out, the holding information on the normal side is not replenished when the upper winning prize opening 710a is opened. At the timing t84, the easy winning state shifts to the non-easy winning state.

  Then, when the opening / closing execution mode by the upper prize winning opening 710a ends at the timing t85, the winning to the fifth operation opening 730 does not occur, so that only the game times on the first special figure side are executed. Become.

  In this case, since the high probability mode is more likely to lead to the jackpot result earlier than the low probability mode, in the configuration in which the lottery on the first special figure side is performed even in the easy winning state, the low probability It can be said that the jackpot result is obtained in the lottery on the first special figure side earlier than the mode (see FIG. 68). From this point of view, it is considered that the player wants to enter the high probability mode from the viewpoint of obtaining a ball based on the jackpot result. It is considered that the player desires not to enter the mode or to enter the low probability mode. In other words, before entering the easy-to-win state (non-easy-to-win state, no assistance), it is expected to enter the high-probability mode, enter the easy-to-win state, and not enter the high-probability mode after entering the easy-to-win state. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which the merits and demerits of the jackpot probability such as expecting to become a low probability mode are contradictory.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  An advantageous state (so-called small hit rush) in which the game times on the second special figure side can be executed based on the winning easy state, and the opening / closing execution mode based on the special hit result is frequently executed. It becomes. In this case, regardless of the lottery result on the first special drawing side or the lottery result on the second special drawing side, the information on the normal drawing side is used to enter the advantageous state. It is possible to achieve a novel gameability that is significantly different from conventional gaming machines that are in an advantageous state.

  As in the above-described embodiments, the probability that an easy-to-win state is an open result in the success / failure determination process in the ordinary game control process does not change. Further, the opening / closing pattern of the electric accessory 66 when the opening result is obtained is not changed. Then, based on the fact that the long variable display time is set as the variable display time on the normal map side, it is possible to increase the number of holds and enter the winning easy state. If it is configured to change the probability of success / failure determination and the opening / closing pattern, it is possible to change the configuration based on the result of the winning / losing lottery on the special figure side (via the opening / closing execution mode). From the point of view, it is considered preferable. Based on that premise, if it is configured to be in the above-mentioned advantageous state by changing the probability of the success / failure determination and the opening / closing pattern, it will eventually become the configuration based on the result of the lottery on the special figure side. It can be a little different from game play. In that respect, it is possible to realize a novel gameability greatly different from the conventional one by setting an advantageous state by the usual number of reserved memory FN as described above.

  In addition, the continuation of the advantageous state is not based on the result of the lottery on the special drawing side, and the general drawing game times will be implemented in a situation where the number of pending information on the special drawing side is 4, Since the number of pending information on the map side is 3 or less, the game plan will be executed in a situation where the game status on the map side is completely independent of the game status on the special map side. It becomes possible to manage by.

  On the other hand, as a result of the success / failure lottery on the special figure side, if the success / failure lottery on the first special figure side becomes a jackpot result, and the open / close execution mode is implemented in the upper variable winning device 710, the hold on the ordinary figure side is suspended. It is impossible to replenish, and the above-described advantageous state can be completed. By doing so, it becomes possible to associate the advantageous state with the game situation on the special drawing side while managing the advantageous state according to the game situation on the usual figure side, and to improve the interest of the game nature in which both games are performed simultaneously. It is done.

  The upper variable winning device 710 is disposed on the upstream side of the through gate 35, and the upper variable winning device 710 is opened to limit the winning to the through gate 35. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to adjust the increase / decrease of the number-of-holding memorize | stored numbers FN by the opening / closing control of the upper variable prize-winning device 710. That is, as described above, the game is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the game result on the special drawing side, and the advantageous state based on the easy-to-win state is terminated by the opening / closing execution mode. In this way, it is possible to indirectly associate the game situation on the special drawing side with the advantageous state managed by the game situation on the usual drawing side.

  The interval period of each round game in the open / close execution mode was made shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Thereby, in the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode performed by the upper variable prize-winning device 710, the event of replenishing the hold information on the normal side is suppressed. Specifically, when the round game is ended by winning the upper limit winning number, the game ball that is fired next to the gaming ball that has won the upper limit winning number is the upper variable winning device after the interval period has elapsed. When the game reaches 710 and the round game is ended by the elapse of the upper limit opening time, the game ball can reach during the interval period, but the game ball that can be reached is limited to one. As a result, the increase in the number-of-patents-holding storage number FN that can occur during the interval period becomes 1 at most, and the advantageous state based on the easy-to-win state can be more reliably ended.

<First Modification in Fourth Embodiment>
In the first modified example, the allocation table for the special lottery drawing is different. FIG. 69A shows an allocation table in the first modification. In the first modification, the level of the success / failure lottery mode is not set, and the jackpot result A and jackpot result B are set as the jackpot result. Even in the first modification, the so-called high frequency support mode and electric Chu mode in which the electric accessory 66 is opened with high probability are not set.

  The jackpot result A is a jackpot result for shifting to the 16-round opening / closing execution mode. The jackpot result B is also a jackpot result for shifting to the 16-round opening / closing execution mode. The jackpot result A and the jackpot result B differ in the big winning opening that is opened in the open / close execution mode to be executed. More specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result A, a round game in which the upper big prize opening 710a is opened in a predetermined number of rounds and the lower big prize opening 700a is opened in other rounds. A game is performed. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result B, a round game in which the lower big prize opening 700a is opened is performed in any round.

  As described above, when the upper prize winning opening 710a is in the open state, the holding information on the normal side is not replenished. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode shifted to the winning easy state is based on the jackpot result A. If so, there is a possibility that the winning easy state will end. On the other hand, even in the opening / closing execution mode shifted in the easy winning state, if it is based on the jackpot result B, the easy winning state can be continued. In that regard, it can be said that the jackpot result B is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot result A.

  In the distribution table of the first modification, the jackpot result A is obtained when the jackpot result is obtained in the winning lottery on the first special figure side and the jackpot result is obtained in the lottery drawing on the second special figure side. And the jackpot result B have different allocation rates. More specifically, when the winning lottery result on the first special figure side is the jackpot result on the second special figure side, the jackpot result is The probability of being assigned to the jackpot result A is set higher than the case. More specifically, if the winning lottery result on the first special figure side is a jackpot result A with a probability of 100%, the winning result lottery on the second special figure side results in a jackpot result Are allocated to the jackpot result A with a probability of 50%, and are allocated to the jackpot result B with a probability of 50%.

  FIG. 69B shows a part of the big prize opening / closing process in the first modification.

  In other words, in the big prize opening / closing process in the first modified example, the big prize opening selection process (step S3106) up to the lower big prize opening opening process (step S3108) and the upper big prize opening opening process (step S3107). The configuration is different. Specifically, after setting the winning number counter PC in step S3105, it is determined in step S3301 whether the current opening / closing execution mode is based on the result of the lottery on the first special figure side. To do. Since the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the first special figure side winning / losing lottery is the jackpot result A, in step S3302, an upper prize winning opening process is performed.

  On the other hand, if the current opening / closing execution mode is not based on the result of the first lottery side lottery determination but the second special drawing side, the current opening / closing execution mode is the jackpot result A in step S3303. It is determined whether it is based on. If it is based on the jackpot result A, whether or not the round number counter RC is “1” in step S3304, and the current round is the final round as a branching round that is the predetermined number of rounds. Determine whether. If it is the final round, an upper prize winning opening process is executed in step S3302. On the other hand, even if the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result A is not the final round (step S3304: NO), or the switching execution mode based on the jackpot result B or the opening / closing execution mode based on the special hit result (step S3303). : NO) executes the lower prize winning opening process in step S3305.

  After executing the processing of step S3302 or step S3305, the processing for setting the opening command as an output target is performed in step S3109, and then the big prize opening / closing processing is ended.

  Next, an example of an effect in the opening / closing execution mode in the first modification will be described. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing a round effect setting process in the opening / closing execution mode. The round effect setting process is a part of a process that is periodically started in the notification / effect control apparatus 143, and is a process that is performed during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether it is a round start timing. If it is not the round start timing, the effect setting process is terminated. If it is the round start timing, it is determined in step S3402 whether the current opening / closing execution mode is based on the jackpot result. The case where the opening / closing execution mode is not based on the jackpot result means that the current opening / closing execution mode is an opening / closing execution mode based on the special hit result. In this case, in step S3403, a process for setting the special winning round effect as the current round effect is performed, and then the round effect setting process is terminated.

  Each effect data of the round effect is stored in advance in the round effect data storage area of the ROM 653. In step S3403, the effect data of the special win round effect is read from the round effect data storage area, and the effect data is followed. Thus, the display control device 660 performs control such that a display effect, a sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, a light emission effect by the annular illumination unit 26, and the like are performed.

  As a display effect of the special winning round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70B, a girl with a magic stick is displayed by animation or the like. The opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result occurs in a situation where a winning / no-go lottery on the second special figure side is performed, that is, in a situation where a winning is easy, and in the first advantageous state advantageous to the player. Is shown. Then, in the situation where the second lottery side winning / losing lottery is performed, depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode by the lower prize winning opening 700a or the opening / closing execution mode by the upper prize winning opening 710a is performed, Sex has changed greatly. Therefore, by indicating that the girl can use magic, it is possible to suggest a change in gameability, and to increase the feeling of excitement of the player.

  If it is determined in step S3402 that the open / close execution mode is based on the jackpot result, the process advances to step S3404. In step S3404, it is determined whether or not it is a winning easy state, and it is determined whether or not the round to be started this time is a branching round. If it is not in the easy-to-win state or if it is not a branch round, in step S3405, a process for setting the normal round effect as the current round effect is performed, and then this round effect setting process is terminated. In step S3405, the effect data of the normal round effect is read from the round effect data storage area, and along with the effect data, the display effect by the display control device 660, the sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, and the light emission by the annular illumination unit 26 are performed. Control is performed so that production or the like is performed.

  As a display effect of the normal round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), a state in which a girl holding a magic stick holds the stick and uses magic is displayed by animation or the like. By holding a magic stick, the stick shines, but the girl does not cast magic. That is, the normal round effect is an effect before using magic. The case where the process of step S3405 is performed means that it is not in the easy-to-win state at the start of the current round game, or at least the current easy-to-win state does not end even in the easy-to-win state. It is. Therefore, by making an effect as if magic is still being cast as described above, it is possible to further enhance the feeling of excitement of the subsequent change in gameability.

  If it is determined in step S3404 that the winning state is easy and the branch round is selected, the process proceeds to step S3406 to determine whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is based on the jackpot result B. In the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result B, the current branch round (final round) is executed not at the upper prize winning opening 710a but at the lower prize winning opening 700a. Therefore, the winning easy state can be continued. Therefore, in step S3407, the first special round effect (blessing effect) is set as the current round effect, and then the round effect setting process is terminated. In step S3407, the effect data of the first special round effect is read from the round effect data storage area, and along with the effect data, the display effect by the display control device 660, the sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, and the annular illumination unit 26 are displayed. Control is performed so that a light emission effect or the like is performed.

  As a display effect of the first special round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), a state in which a girl with a magic stick transforms into an adult woman by magic is displayed by animation or the like. The effect enables the player to understand that the magic has succeeded and to grasp that the winning easy state continues.

  In step S3406, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result A, the current branch round (final round) is executed not at the lower major prize opening 700a but at the upper major prize opening 710a. Therefore, the winning easy state can be ended. In step S3408, the second special round effect (failure effect) is set as the current round effect, and the round effect setting process ends. In step S3408, the effect data of the second special round effect is read from the round effect data storage area, and along with the effect data, the display effect by the display control device 660, the sound effect effect by the speaker unit 29, and the annular illumination unit 26 are displayed. Control is performed so that a light emission effect or the like is performed.

  As a display effect of the second special round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. The effect enables the player to understand that the magic has failed, and to know that the easy winning state has ended.

  By doing as described above, in a situation where it is in an advantageous state that allows the winning / successful lottery on the second special figure side to be performed based on the easy winning state, Based on this, the advantageous state (easy winning state) can be terminated. As a result, it is possible to greatly focus on the type of result of the success / failure lottery on the special figure side.

  In addition, until the branch round in the opening / closing execution mode, a round game is performed by the lower major prize opening 700a in which the holding information on the normal side can be replenished, and the round game by the upper major prize opening 710a is performed in the branch round. The configuration can be broken. By doing in this way, it can be expected that the easy winning state does not end until the branch round, and the easy winning state does not end even through the opening / closing execution mode. Then, by branching whether or not the easy-to-win state is terminated in the branch round, it is possible to collect points of interest and fully enjoy the opening / closing execution mode.

  In particular, by setting the branch round as the final round, it is possible to continue the expectation in the opening / closing execution mode to the rear side rather than the configuration in which the easy winning state is terminated immediately after the opening / closing execution mode is started.

  Further, in the branch round, the display screen 75a informs whether the upper university winning opening 710a is opened or the lower university winning opening 700a is opened. Can be suitably raised.

<Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In the second modified example, the variable display time table referred to in the ordinary game game is changed based on the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. FIG. 71 (a) shows a common map change display time table for the opening / closing execution mode in the second modification.

  In the open / close execution mode, in the situation in which the number of reserved maps FN is four, which is the upper limit, either a relatively long variable display time of 6.0 sec or a relatively short 0.6 sec is selected. To get. Specifically, when the number of holds is 1 to 3, 0.05 sec which is the uniform and shortest change display time is set. Further, when the number of holdings is four, the short fluctuation display time is 0.6 sec (hereinafter also referred to as “maintenance at 4 hours short fluctuation”) or the long fluctuation display time is 6.0 sec (hereinafter, “maintenance 4”). Is also set). The variation display time is set according to the value of the normal variation type counter C5, but the length of the variation display time may be determined through another counter or other lottery processing.

  In the second modification, the setting of the upper limit opening time and the setting of the interval time in each round game in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result are different. FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process (FIG. 64, step S3104) in the present modification.

  In this modification, it is determined in step S3501 whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is based on the jackpot result. If it is the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, in step S3502, the upper limit opening time of the current round game is longer than the product of the upper limit winning number and the game ball launch cycle, and in the fourth embodiment, 8 sec which is shorter than the one (30 sec) is set ("4000" is input to the open / close timer counter T).

  If it is determined in step S3501 that the opening / closing execution mode is based on the special winning result, in step S3503, as in the fourth embodiment, the upper limit opening time of the current round game is 1. 8 sec is set ("900" is input to the open / close timer counter T). After executing the process of step S3502 or step S3503, the opening time setting process ends.

  FIG. 71 (c) is a flowchart showing a standby time setting process (FIG. 64, step S3117) in the present modification.

  In this modification, it is determined in step S3601 whether the open / close timer counter T is greater than “250”. The case where the open / close timer counter T is larger than “250 (0.5 sec)” means that at least the round game to be ended this time is not ended by the elapse of the upper limit opening time (step S3110: YES), It means that the process is ended by winning (step S3113: YES). In this case, the current interval period is set as a time corresponding to the remaining numerical value of the open / close timer counter T (without inputting a new numerical value to the open / close timer counter T), and the standby time setting process is terminated. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3601 that the open / close timer counter T is equal to or less than “250”, that is, the round game to be ended this time ends based on the elapse of the upper limit opening time or based on the winning of the upper limit winning number. However, in step S3602, the current interval time is set as 0.5 sec ("250" is input to the open / close timer counter T), and this standby is completed. The time setting process ends.

  The relationship between the progress of the opening / closing execution mode and the easy winning state in this modification will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  As already explained, in the usual game game times in the open / close execution mode, if the number of the hold information is the upper limit, it is 4 hours short fluctuation (0.6 sec) or 4 hours long fluctuation (6.0 sec). Is set. For example, a case where a four-hour variation is set at the general game time started at the timing t90, and a case where a four-hour time variation is set at the general game time started at the timing t91. , The digestion speed of the hold information is different. Specifically, if the change is short for 4 hours, at a timing t91 which is 1.1 sec after 0.6 sec (variation display time) +0.4 sec (stop display time) +0.1 sec (support time) from timing t90. In contrast to the next hold information digestion timing, if the hold time is 4 hours long, it will be 6.0 sec (variable display time) +0.4 sec (stop display time) +0.1 sec (support time) from timing t91. At the timing t94 after a certain 6.5 seconds, the next pending information is consumed.

  Moreover, in this modification, the duration of the round game is a fixed period (8 sec) as the total period of the opening time and the interval period. Therefore, for example, in a round game started at timing t92, game balls continuously enter and finish at timing t93 after 6.0 seconds (the shortest duration), which is the product of the maximum number of winning prizes and the firing cycle. Then, the interval period is set as 2.0 sec which is the difference between the fixed period and the open period.

  For example, the normal game game time started at timing t91 is set to the four-hour variation, and the round game started at timing t92 is in the shortest duration and the top prize winning opening 710a is closed. Is switched to, at the timing t93 when the upper prize winning opening 710a is switched to the closed state, the usual game is still continued, and the pending information is not yet consumed. Therefore, the winning easy state is maintained.

  Moreover, the interval period in this case is 2.0 sec as described above, which is longer than the game ball firing cycle. Then, at the timing t95 during the interval period, a winning to the through gate 35 can occur, and it is possible to replenish the hold information on the normal side during the interval period.

  When the next round game starts at the timing t97 after the interval period elapses, the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened and the winning to the upper prize winning opening 710a is allowed. No win to 35 will occur.

  If the general game time started at the timing t96, which is slightly before the timing t97, is set to keep 4 hours length variation, as described above, if the round game is ended in the shortest period, It is possible to end the round game before the end of the ordinary game. However, for example, when the game ball is stopped to fire or the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right route instead of the left route, the round game will take a longer period than the shortest duration. continue. Then, for example, the round game ends at timing t99, but the general game started at timing t96 ends at the timing t98 that is earlier than that, and the next hold information is digested. It can be timing.

  Moreover, if the round game is not terminated in the shortest period as described above, the interval period can be a period (0.5 sec) shorter than the firing period (0.6 sec). In this case, even if the round game is ended, the holding information cannot be replenished during the interval period until the timing t100 when the next round game is started, and only the holding information is digested. At the timing t101, the winning easy state ends.

  As described above, according to the present modification, even when a round game is performed through the upper prize winning opening 710a, the easy-to-win state can be maintained, and the gameability of the round game is improved. In addition, when a round game is performed through the upper prize winning opening 710a, it is not determined that the winning easy state is continued, and it is not determined that the winning is completed. Depending on the length of the variable display time in the game game on the side, the presence or absence of the continuation of the winning easy state is different. By doing in this way, it becomes the structure in which a player's game content is reflected regarding the presence or absence of a continuation of an easy-to-win state, and it can have the real feeling that the player himself won the continuation of an easy-to-win state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Third Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modification, the game characteristics using the relationship between the duration of the ordinary game and the duration of the round game shown in the second modification are reflected in the performance. FIG. 73 (a) shows a common map change display time table for the opening / closing execution mode in this modification.

  In this modified example, except for the case where the number of hold information for ordinary maps is one, a variable display time that is relatively long in 2 to 4 is set. Specifically, when the number of hold information for the usual figure is 1, the variable display time of 0.05 sec is set uniformly, and the usual figure game when the change display time is set is stopped. It is 0.55 sec including display time (determined time) and support time (opening time). On the other hand, when the number of hold information for normal use is 2 to 4, a relatively short fluctuation display time of 0.5 sec is set and a relatively long fluctuation display time of 3.0 sec is set. There is a case. Which variable display time is set is determined based on the value of the normal fluctuation type counter C5, but the variable display time may be determined by another counter or other lottery processing. . The general game when the variable display time of 0.5 sec is set is 1.0 sec including the stop display time and the support time, while the general game when the variable display time of 3.0 sec is set Is 3.5 seconds including stop display time and support time.

  FIG. 73 (b) shows a situation in which the number of reserved information is 4 from the situation where the number of reserved information is 4, in the situation where the reserved information on the normal map side is no longer replenished by opening the top prize winning opening 710a. It shows the length of time until the winning easy state is finished and the ratio thereof.

  The winning assistance continuation time, which is the length of time until the easy winning state is completed, can be calculated from a combination of the above variable display times from the situation where the number of pending information is four. That is, there are four types of lengths of 3.55 sec, 6.05 sec, 8.55 sec, and 11.05 sec, which are 8.4%, 40.0%, 42.0%, and 9.6, respectively. % Selected. Also in this modified example, as in the second modified example, the total length of the round game opening time and the interval time is set as a fixed period. It is possible to shift to the interval period at 6.0 sec which is the product of the above and to replenish the hold information.

  That is, if a length of 6.0 seconds or more is selected as the winning assistance duration, the holding information can be replenished during the interval period if the round game is completed in the shortest period. On the other hand, if the winning assistance duration is less than 6.0 seconds, the winning assistance duration will elapse before the round game ends even if the round game is finished in the shortest period. Will end. Even if the winning assistance duration is 6.0 seconds or more, if the round game is not finished in the shortest period, the winning assistance duration may elapse first, and the round game may be extended. As a result, the interval period is shortened, and even if the winning assistance duration time has not elapsed at the end of the round game, it is not possible to replenish the hold information for normal use, and the easy-to-win state will end at the next round game. there is a possibility.

  In this modification, a battle effect is generated during a round game using the relationship between the above-described progress speed of the regular game and the winning timing at the upper prize winning opening 710a.

  The battle effect is, for example, a victory effect that suggests that the main character wins and becomes advantageous to the player through a predetermined effect in which the main character as the main character and the enemy character fight, and the enemy character wins the main character. This is an effect in which one result effect is performed from among a plurality of result effects including a defeat effect that suggests that the character is defeated and disadvantageous to the player.

  More specifically, in the battle production, if the easy-to-win state that was transferred at the start of the round game after the battle between the main character and the enemy character is maintained until the end of the round game, the main character wins. If the winning effect is executed and the easy-to-win state has been finished by the end of the round game, a defeat effect in which the main character is defeated is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not the easy winning state, which has been shifted at the start of the round game, continues until the end of the round game through the battle between the main character and the enemy character.

  FIG. 74 shows a round effect setting process in this modification. As already described, the round effect setting process is a process of a periodic process activated at a predetermined period, and is a process executed during the opening / closing execution mode. The battle effect is set in the round effect setting process. The details of the battle effect will be described below while explaining the processing configuration of the round effect setting process.

  In the round effect setting process, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the round game. If it is the start timing of the round game, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the round game to be started this time is a round game that opens the upper prize winning opening 710a. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first modified example, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result A and in the case of the final round in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result B, an affirmative determination is made in step S3702. It will be judged. If a negative determination is made in step S3702 and the game is a round game in which the lower major winning opening 700a is opened, the normal round effect is set in step S3703 and the round effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3702 that the game is a round game that opens the top prize winning opening 710a, in step S3704, an ordinary game situation grasping process is executed. In the process of grasping the general-purpose game situation, the current number of hold information for the general-purpose figure, the information on the variable display time when the hold information is subject to the general-purpose game times, and the remaining number of the current general-purpose game times The information of the fluctuation display time is grasped, and information indicating whether or not the current state is an easy winning state, and if it is an easy winning state, a process of specifying the winning assistance duration is performed.

  In step S3705, based on the processing result in step S3704, it is determined whether or not the current state is an easy winning state. If it is not in the easy-to-win state, the process advances to step S3703 to set a normal round effect, and the round effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3705 that the winning state is easy, HP display setting processing is executed in step S3706.

  As shown in FIG. 75A, when a round game is started and a battle effect is started, first, a battle start effect is displayed in which a main character of a soldier with a weapon is displayed as the main character. To do. In the start effect, in addition to the main character, a round display indicating the number of rounds to be started and an HP display indicating the physical strength of the main character are displayed side by side on the main character. The HP display is composed of a plurality of memories formed by, for example, heart marks. The heart mark is, for example, a colored state (see FIG. 75 (a), hereinafter also referred to as a colored heart mark) and a non-colored state (see FIG. 77 (b), hereinafter, a non-colored heart mark). It is indicated that the main character's physical strength remains for the colored heart mark, that is, it is difficult for the enemy character to lose.

  The HP display is set according to the length of the winning assistance duration. In other words, the longer the winning assistance duration time is set, the higher the stamina of the main character is. In step S3706, the HP display at the start of the battle effect is set based on the player HP setting table stored in the ROM 653 and the winning assistance duration specified in step S3704.

  In the player HP setting table, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), if the winning assistance duration is less than 3.5 seconds, the HP display is set so that 80% displays two colored heart marks. The HP display is set so that 3 colored heart marks are displayed at 20%. If the winning assistance duration is 3.5 seconds or more and less than 6.0 seconds, the HP display is set so that 80% displays 3 colored heart marks, and 20% displays 4 colored hearts. The HP display is set so that the mark is displayed. If the winning assistance duration is 6.0 seconds or more and less than 8.5 seconds, the HP display is set so that 50% displays 3 colored heart marks, and 50% displays 4 colored heart marks. Set the HP display to be displayed. If the winning assistance duration is 8.5 sec or more and less than 11.0 sec, the HP display is set so that 20% displays 3 colored heart marks, and 80% displays 4 colored heart marks. Set the HP display to be displayed. If the winning assistance duration is 11.0 sec or longer, the HP display is set so that four colored heart marks are displayed with a probability of 100%.

  After the HP display setting process is executed in step S3706, a battle effect is set as the current round effect in step S3707, and then the effect setting process ends. In step S3707, the battle start effect is set to be performed first as the battle effect. In the start effect, HP display based on the current winning assist duration set in step S3706 is performed, and the main character and the number of rounds are displayed (FIG. 75 (a)).

  After the battle start effect, an effect during battle in which the main character and the enemy character battle is performed as the round game progresses.

  In the effect during battle, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the display is switched to the main character's line of sight, and a state in which a plurality of zombies as enemy characters attack the main character is displayed. In the battle effect, the enemy number display indicating the number of enemy characters in addition to the enemy character is displayed side by side on the enemy character. The above HP display is also displayed side by side with the enemy character. The number of enemies is constituted by, for example, the number of defeated enemy characters and the number of enemy characters at the start. For example, at the start, there are 100 enemy characters, 0 enemy characters have been defeated, and “0/100” is displayed as the number of enemies.

  The enemy character corresponds to the number of winnings in the upper prize opening 710a. Basically, every time one ball is entered, 10 enemy characters are defeated, and the remaining 10 balls are entered. The number of enemy characters is 0.

  Returning to the description of the battle effect setting process, if it is determined in step S3701 that it is not the round start timing, it is determined in step S3708 whether the battle effect is being performed. That is, the process of step S3708 determines whether or not a round game in which a battle effect is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3708, the round effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3708, it is determined in step S3709 whether or not a result effect has been set. The result effect indicates a victory effect and a defeat effect. In step S3709, it is determined whether a victory effect or a defeat effect has already been set in the battle effect. If the result effect has been set, the round effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3709, the process proceeds to step S3710. In step S3710, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated at the upper prize winning opening 710a. This determination may be made with reference to winning information (command) from the main control device 162. If a winning has occurred, enemy character damage imparting processing is executed in step S3711. In the enemy character damage assigning process, the display content of the enemy number display is updated in correspondence with the winning to the upper prize winning opening 710a, and the damage giving effect indicating that the enemy character is defeated by the corresponding number is displayed on the display screen 75a. Set to be done at. In the damage imparting effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), a state in which some of the plurality of enemy characters are blown backward is displayed, and “NICE !!” Is displayed. The number of enemies displayed is updated so that the number of enemy characters that have been defeated every time one ball is won is added for ten.

  In step S3712, it is determined whether or not the current winning in the upper prize winning opening 710a is the upper-rank winning number in the round game. If it is the upper limit winning number, the battle victory effect is set to be performed on the display screen 75a in step S3713. In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), a state in which a soldier who is the main character screams is displayed, and a character display “WIN” indicating that the main character has won is displayed. . When the battle victory effect is executed, the enemy number display is “100/100” to indicate that the number of enemy characters that have been defeated has reached the initial number of enemy characters. Also, in the HP display, one or more colored heart marks are displayed to indicate that the main character's physical strength remains. After performing the process of step S3713, the effect setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3710 that no winning has been made to the upper prize winning opening 710a, or if it is determined in step S3712 that the winning amount is not the upper limit winning number, the process proceeds to step S3714. In step S3714, the current ordinary game situation grasping process is executed. This process corresponds to step S3705, and the current number of hold information for the usual map, the information on the variable display time when the hold information is the target of the usual game game, and the current map Information on the remaining variable display time of the game times is grasped, and processing for specifying the current winning assistance duration is performed.

  In a succeeding step S3715, it is determined whether or not it is an HP decrease timing. Whether or not it is the HP decrease timing is determined by the remaining winning assistance duration and the number of displayed colored heart marks. For example, the winning assistance duration at the start of the battle effect is equally divided by the number of colored heart marks to be displayed at the start, and it is determined that the HP reduction timing is reached each time the equally divided time elapses.

  If it is the HP reduction timing, an HP reduction effect is set in step S3716. In the HP reduction effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), one colored heart mark in the HP display is changed to a non-colored heart mark, and the appearance of the enemy character attacking is displayed. To.

  After executing the processing in step S3716, it is determined in step S3717 whether or not there are zero colored heart marks. The case where the number of colored heart marks is 0 means that the winning assistance duration time is 0 and the easy winning state has ended. In this case, a battle defeat effect is set in step S3718. In the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), a state in which the soldier who is the main character is lying down is displayed, and a character display “LOSE” indicating that the main character has been defeated is displayed. . When the battle defeat effect is executed, the HP display clearly indicates that the main character has lost its physical strength before the enemy character is completely annihilated in the current battle effect. The enemy number display clearly indicates that the number of enemy characters defeated at has not reached the starting enemy character number.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3715 or step S3717, or after the process of step S3718 is executed, the round effect setting process ends.

  As described above, according to this modified example, the end of the round game based on the winning at the upper prize winning opening 710a, the supplementation of the holding information on the usual figure side based on the winning to the through gate 35, and the game figure on the ordinary figure side It is possible to make a battle effect that reflects the progress of the game, and it is possible to realize a novel game effect.

  More specifically, in the round game at the time of the battle production, by generating a prize at the upper prize winning opening 710a and ending the round game at an early stage, the easy-to-win state continues and the battle production is a victory production. It becomes easy to become. On the other hand, if there is little hold information on the normal map side, or if the fluctuation display time in the game time on the normal map side is short, and the progress of the game on the normal map side is fast, the easy winning state will end and the battle effect will end. Is likely to be defeated. And whether the battle production will be the victory production or the defeat production is determined by the balance of the progress of both games, so unlike the production of the so-called race where victory and defeat are determined in advance, It is possible to entertain whereabouts.

  In the above modification, a battle effect is performed in a predetermined round game in the opening / closing execution mode. However, for example, a battle effect may be performed in a plurality of round games, or in all round games. A battle effect may be performed. In the above configuration, since the winning to the through gate 35 may occur at least during the interval period, the holding information on the normal side can be supplemented. Then, for example, when a round game in which one battle effect is performed ends as a victory effect while reducing the HP, the state where the HP recovers by winning the through gate 35 during the interval period is performed as an effect. Is also possible. In this way, ending the round game early is associated with making it easier to win the battle effect in the round game and also making it easier to win the battle effect in the next round game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the playability of the open / close execution mode in which a plurality of round games are performed.

  In a round game where no battle effect is performed, the opening / closing control is performed by the lower prize port 700a instead of the upper prize port 710a. It is also possible to perform an effect in which the above-described HP is supplemented.

<Fourth Modification in Fourth Embodiment>
In the present modification, the positional relationship between the upper variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an outline of the positional relationship in the present modification.

  In this modified example, the distance between the lower end of the upper opening / closing door 710b and the through gate 35 in the upper variable winning device 710 is larger than the diameter D of the game ball. Therefore, even when the upper opening / closing door 710b stands up with respect to the game board 60 and the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened, the game ball can pass between the upper opening / closing door 710b and the through gate 35, and the through gate An entry to 35 can occur.

  Below the upper variable winning device 710, a left guide nail group 69g and a right guide nail group 69h are provided so as to be inclined downward toward the through gate 35. The left and right guide nail groups 69g and 69h are composed of a plurality of nails, and the distance between the nails in the guide nail groups 69g and 69h is smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is guided toward the through gate 35 without passing through the nails of the left and right guide nail groups 69g and 69h.

  In this case, the game ball that has reached the upper variable prize winning device 710 closes the first route R1 for winning the upper prize winning opening 710a and the upper prize winning opening 710a on condition that the upper prize winning opening 710a is open. The second route R2 flows down the front of the upper opening / closing door 710b and wins the through gate 35 on the condition that it is in a state, and is guided by the left and right guide nail groups 69g, 69h regardless of the state of the upper opening / closing door 710b. It passes through any one of the third route R3 and the third route R3 that wins the through gate 35. When the upper prize winning opening 710a is in the open state, the third route R3 rolls on the upper opening / closing door 710b, and the balls spilled from the upper opening / closing door 710b instead of the upper prize winning opening 710a side This is a route guided to the through gate 35 by the guide nail groups 69g and 69h.

  By doing as described above, there is room for winning to the through gate 35 even when the upper prize winning opening 710a is in an open state, and it is possible to replenish holding information on the normal side during the round game. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to supplement the winning assistance duration during the round game even when a round game in which the upper prize winning opening 710a is in an open state is made, making it difficult to end the easy winning state. It becomes possible.

  However, since the third route R3 is a route through which a ball spilled from the upper opening / closing door 710b passes when the upper prize winning opening 710a is in an open state, the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened. The winning rate to the through gate 35 decreases. That is, most of the game balls that have reached the upper variable winning device 710 win the upper university winning opening 710a, and some of them win the through gate 35. For example, of the game balls that have reached the upper variable prize winning device 710 when the upper prize winning opening 710a is in the open state, the ratio of the game balls that win the upper prize winning opening 710a and the game balls that win the through gate 35 Is set to 5 to 1. In this case, two balls can win the through gate 35 before the round game in which the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened (until 10 balls are won). By having such a relationship, it is possible to cause the case where the easy winning state is finished and the case where the easy winning state is not finished by performing the round game by the upper prize winning opening 710a. It is possible to improve the playability of the round game by the upper prize winning opening 710a while avoiding the inconvenience that the rate of appearance rises.

<Fifth Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In the present modification, the configuration for changing the winning rate to the through gate 35 is different from that of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 79, a movable accessory 820 is provided above the through gate 35 instead of the upper variable winning device 710. The movable accessory 820 is fitted into an opening 821 that opens the game board 60 in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the front surface of the movable accessory 820 is substantially flush with the front surface of the game board 60. As shown in FIG. 79 (c), the state can be displaced into a protruding state protruding from the game board 60. A movable combination driving unit 830 is connected to the movable combination 820. More specifically, the movable accessory driving unit 830 is provided with a gear 831, and the gear 831 is engaged with the gear 822 on the movable accessory 820 side. Then, when the movable accessory driving unit 830 is controlled and the gear 831 rotates, the movable accessory 820 operates through the gear 822 and is displaced between the retracted state and the protruding state. The movable accessory driving unit 830 is connected to the main controller 162, and the movable accessory 820 is periodically displaced between a retracted state and a protruding state. Although this operation cycle is arbitrary, for example, by setting it to a cycle shorter than the launching cycle of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action aiming at a situation in a retracted state or a situation in a protruding state.

  When the movable accessory 820 is in a protruding state, the distance between the lower end of the movable accessory 820 and the upper end of the through gate 35 is smaller than the diameter D of the game ball. For this reason, when the movable accessory 820 is in a protruding state, a winning to the through gate 35 does not occur. On the other hand, when the movable accessory 820 is in the retracted state, the movable accessory 820 does not become a barrier to winning through the through gate 35, and winning through the through gate 35 occurs. That is, the movable accessory 820 can be said to be an accessory that can be displaced between a state that allows winning through the through gate 35 and a state that restricts winning through the through gate 35. Then, the winning rate for the through gate 35 can be changed according to the state displacement and the operation cycle of the movable accessory 820.

  In addition, it is good to form so that the front surface of the movable accessory 820 may incline toward the back side, for example, as it goes upwards. By doing so, in the situation where the game ball is present in front of the movable accessory 820, it is possible to make the game ball escape when the movable accessory 820 changes from the retracted position to the protruding position. .

<Sixth Modification in Fourth Embodiment>
In this modification, the structure of the movable accessory in a 5th modification differs.

  As shown in FIG. 80, a rotating body 800 is provided as a movable accessory in this modification. The rotator 800 has a columnar shape that extends forward, and is along a plane that is parallel to the front surface of the game board 60, with the rotation shaft 801 standing forward from the front surface of the game board 60 as a rotation center axis. And can be rotated. A drive unit (not shown) is connected to the rotator 800, and the rotator 800 rotates periodically as the drive unit is driven and controlled by the main controller 162.

  The rotating body 800 has a thickness toward the front of the game board 60 larger than the diameter D of the game ball. The distance between the lower end of the rotating body 800 and the through gate 35 is smaller than the diameter D of the game ball.

  On the peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed a housing portion 810 that is partly recessed larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the game ball can be stored in the housing portion 810. The storage unit 810 can store a predetermined number (1) of game balls.

  That is, when a game ball falls from above to the rotating body 800 in a state where the storage unit 810 is arranged upward, the game ball is received by the storage unit 810 and stored in the storage unit 810. When the rotating body 800 rotates and the storage portion 810 is disposed downward and above the through gate 35, the game ball stored in the storage portion 810 falls toward the through gate 35 and the game ball Wins the through gate 35.

  By doing in this way, winning to the through gate 35 can be periodically generated according to the rotation period of the rotating body 800. In this case, by adjusting the rotation cycle, the winning cycle to the through gate 35 can also be adjusted, and the design to easily shift to the winning winning state can be easily performed.

  Note that the rotation period of the rotating body 800 is set to about a quarter of the long fluctuation display time set at a low frequency in the game game on the normal game side (one-hold upper limit), thereby the long fluctuation display time. Is set, it is possible to set the usual figure reservation storage number FN to 4 which is the upper limit number.

  Further, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to generate a prize for the through gate 35 at a timing different from the arrival timing depending on the period during which the rotating body 800 rotates. Thereby, for example, by applying this configuration to the configuration having the upper variable prize winning device 710 described above, it becomes possible to win the game ball that has reached before the start of the round game to the through gate 35 during the round game, The continuity of the easy winning state can be changed.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a ball entering part that is a trigger for obtaining the hold information on the normal side is provided separately from the through gate 35. FIG. 81 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 60 in the present embodiment. The game board 60 of the present embodiment has the same basic configuration as the game board 60 of the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the first embodiment. The description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, a second through gate 850 is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67 and downstream of the through gate 35 and the second operation port 63. The second through gate 850 has the same configuration as that of the through gate 35, and is a passing type entrance portion where the entered game ball is discharged to the game area PE again. In the present embodiment, not only when the game ball wins the through gate 35 but also when the game ball wins the second through gate 850, the hold information on the normal side is acquired.

  The game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 and have flowed down in front of the second operating port 63 are distributed by the nail 69 or the like according to a route toward the second through gate 850 and a route not toward the second through gate 850. As the distribution ratio, for example, the distribution to the side different from the second through gate 850 is larger than the distribution to the second through gate 850 side.

  The distribution rate to the route toward the second through gate 850 is arbitrary, but for example, the distribution is made to the second through gate 850 with a probability of 1/200, and the second through gate with a probability of 199/200. The configuration is such that it cannot be distributed to 850.

  With the above-described configuration, in a situation where a game ball is fired so as to flow down the left route and a winning to the through gate 35 can occur periodically, an event of winning the second through gate 850 is performed. Can be generated. As a result, not only when a long variable display time is selected in the game times on the normal figure side based on winning to the through gate 35, but also when shifting to the winning easy state, not only by winning to the second through gate 850. It becomes possible to generate a game ball that reaches the electric accessory 66 at the opening timing of the electric accessory 66, and a winning to the second operating port 63 can be generated. In other words, if the general game play based on the winning to the through gate 35 is being executed at the timing when the winning to the second through gate 850 occurs or is in the support state based on the winning to the through gate 35, The storage number FN is 1. Then, the next ordinary game game is started without waiting for the winning to the through gate 35, and the period of the ordinary game is changed (FIG. 27). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to win the second operating port 63 in the normal game state (first normal game state) before entering the easy-to-win state (second normal game state), and the interest is improved.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, in the first embodiment, the winning rate for the second operation port 63 is changed by lottery based on numerical information such as setting of the variable display time on the normal map side. The winning rate to the second operating port 63 can be changed also depending on the flow-down mode of the game ball. By doing in this way, it is expected that game balls will be distributed to the route (advantageous route) toward the second through gate 850, and the game property of enjoying the flow-down mode of the game balls is added.

  In the above configuration, one second through gate 850 is provided as a trigger for acquiring the hold information on the normal side other than the through gate 35, but a plurality of second through gates 850 may be provided. For example, four through gates are arranged so as to be connected vertically, and when passing through the first through gate, passage to all four through gates occurs. By setting the interval between the plurality of through gates to an interval at which the game ball can flow in a time shorter than the cycle of the normal game, the multi-pending storage number FN is 4 by passing through the plurality of through gates. Will increase. As a result, it is possible to shift to the easy-to-win state when passing through the plurality of through gates.

  In the case of the above, more specifically, if a general game based on winning a single through gate 35 is executed when passing through four consecutive through gates, the general-purpose reserved memory number FN Will be four, making it easy to win. On the other hand, when passing through the four consecutive through gates, a normal game based on winning a single through gate 35 is not being executed, or while passing through the four consecutive through gates, When the regular game based on winning through the through gate 35 has ended (before all winning through gates have been completed, the holding based on winning through one through gate of the consecutive through gates) In the case where the information is digested), the number of usual reserved storage numbers FN at the time when winning of all the continuous through gates is completed is three, and it is not easy to win. In this case, depending on the timing at which the subsequent game ball wins a single through gate 35, there are cases where the number of the reserved figure FN stored at the time of winning becomes four and the case where it becomes three, and it is easy to win. There will be a case where it is possible to continue and a case where this is not the case. Therefore, it is possible to raise interest in the winning timing to the continuous through gate and the winning timing to the through gate 35, and to improve the gameability.

  In addition, by setting the number of continuous through gates to five or more, it is possible to ensure the continuity of the easy winning state by one pass.

<First Modification in Fifth Embodiment>
In the present modification, a first route from which one holding information on the usual map side is acquired and a second route from which a plurality of holding information are acquired are provided. FIG. 82 is a diagram conceptually showing a winning route to the winning portion where the hold information on the normal side is acquired in this modified example.

  In the game area PE, a passage wall 860 for forming the first route and the second route is provided. The passage wall 860 is erected forward from the game board 60 and is attached to the front surface of the game board 60 as a resin plate-like wall portion. The passage wall 860 may be formed by a plurality of nails 69.

  Among the passage walls 860, the first passage wall 861 and the second passage wall 862 are arranged to extend in the vertical direction at intervals larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A game ball can pass between the two passage walls 862. The second passage wall 862 is shorter than the first passage wall 861. Then, below the second passage wall 862, the third passage wall 863 continues on the virtual extension line of the second passage wall 862 with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the second passage wall 862 and the game ball. The first route R1 is defined by a region passing between the first passage wall 861 and the second passage wall 862 and a region passing between the first passage wall 861 and the third passage wall 863. Is formed.

  A distribution valve 867 is provided between the second passage wall 862 and the third passage wall 863. The distribution valve 867 forms a first state that forms a surface that is continuous with the second passage wall 862 and the third passage wall 863, and a surface that intersects the second passage wall 862 and the third passage wall 863. The distance from the passage wall 861 is displaceable to the second state where the diameter is smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. The distribution valve 687 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 868, and is controlled to rotate from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state by a drive unit (not shown).

  The fourth passage wall 864 and the fifth passage wall 865 are separated from the lower end of the second passage wall 862 and the upper end of the third passage wall 863 by the fourth passage wall 864 and the fifth passage wall 865 with a diameter dimension D of the game ball. Is provided. The second route R2 is formed by the region passing between the first passage wall 861 and the second passage wall 862 and the region passing between the fourth passage wall 864 and the fifth passage wall 865. Thus, when the distribution valve 867 enters the second state, the game ball can pass through the second route R2.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the downstream side of the distribution valve 867 in the first route R1. Further, a third through gate 851 and a fourth through gate 852 are provided on the downstream side of the distribution valve 867 in the second route R2. Each of the third through gate 851 and the fourth through gate 852 is a pass-type winning section in which holding information on the normal side is acquired. Further, the distance between the third through gate 851 and the fourth through gate 852 is smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball.

  The electric combination in this modification is formed wider than the electric combination 66, and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35, and a game ball that has passed through the third through gate 851 and the fourth through gate 852, However, both can be awarded. That is, the electric accessory 870 in the present modification is provided at a position for receiving the game ball flowing down from the first route R1 and at a position for receiving the game ball flowing down from the second route R2.

  As the distribution mode of the distribution valve 867, for example, the above-mentioned is not illustrated so that the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and then the first state is performed in a predetermined cycle. The drive unit is driven and controlled. The drive control of the drive unit may be performed by the main controller 162.

  Then, by the displacement operation of the distribution valve 867, the game balls are distributed to the first route R1 and the second route R2, and when winning the through gate 35, to the third through gate 851 and the fourth through gate 852 There will be cases where you win. That is, there is a first route R1 from which one hold information on the normal map side is acquired, and a second route R2 from which two hold information on the general map side is acquired, and which route is allocated to the route? The configuration is realized by the distribution of the distribution valve 867. Although the distribution rate by the distribution valve 867 is arbitrary, a configuration in which the first route R1 is more easily distributed than the second route R2 is preferable. In this modification, for example, the second route has a probability of 1/200. It is configured such that it is distributed to R2 and distributed to the first route R1 with a probability of 199/200.

  By doing as described above, it is possible to vary the number of acquisitions of the hold information on the normal side depending on the route through which the game ball passes. Thereby, the case where the hold information on the usual figure side increases one by one and the case where it increases two by two can be caused, and it becomes possible to diversify the transition mode to the winning easy state.

<Second Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In this modification, the distribution modes of the plurality of general map hold acquisition routes in the first modification are different.

  As conceptually shown in FIG. 83, for example, the game area PE is provided with a rolling portion 880 having a rolling surface 881 on which a game ball can roll. The rolling surface 881 has a function as a so-called croon formed in, for example, a flat shape or a bowl shape. For example, the rolling unit 880 is provided with a passing area (warp passage) through which game balls flowing down the left route pass with a relatively low frequency, and is provided at a position where the gaming balls that pass through the passing area are derived.

  The rolling unit 880 is provided with a plurality of dropping holes through which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 881 fall from the rolling surface 881. The drop opening is formed as an opening that is slightly larger than the diameter D of the game ball. When a game ball falls from a first drop opening 882 which is a kind of drop opening, it passes through a first lead-out passage 891 formed of, for example, resin or the like and is discharged to the game area PE, for example, below the variable display unit 67 Is derived. On the other hand, when a game ball falls from a second drop port 883 which is a kind of drop port, it passes through the second outlet passage 892 and is discharged to the game area PE. Further, when the game ball falls from the third drop port 884, it passes through the third lead-out passage 893 and is discharged to the game area PE. The discharge destinations from the first lead-out passage 891, the second lead-out passage 892, and the third lead-out passage 893 may be the same region or different regions.

  A through gate 35 is provided in the first outlet passage 891. On the other hand, the second lead-out passage 892 is provided with a fifth through gate 853 and a sixth through gate 854. The third lead-out passage 893 is provided with a seventh through gate 855, an eighth through gate 856, and a ninth through gate 857. Each of the fifth through gate 853 to the ninth through gate 857 is a pass-type winning section in which reserved information on the normal side is acquired.

  That is, when a game ball rolling on the rolling part 880 falls from the first drop port 882 and passes through the first route R1 by the first lead-out passage 891, one piece of hold information on the normal map side is acquired. On the other hand, when the game ball rolling on the rolling part 880 falls from the second drop port 883 and passes through the second route R2 by the second lead-out passage 892, two pieces of hold information on the normal map side are acquired. Then, when the game ball rolling on the rolling part 880 falls from the third drop port 884 and passes through the third route R3 by the third lead-out passage 893, three pieces of hold information on the normal map side are acquired.

  That is, the number of pieces of hold information to be acquired differs depending on which drop port 882 to 884 the game ball rolling on the rolling unit 880 falls. It can be said that the advantage of each of the drop openings 882 to 884 is different because the greater the number of pieces of hold information to be acquired, the easier it is to enter the winning state. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 881 of the rolling part 880 can be raised suitably.

  On the other hand, since the game ball rolls on the rolling surface 881 and is dropped from any of the drop openings 882 to 884, the rolling period can be extended. That is, the period from the acquisition of the hold information on the normal side to the acquisition of the hold information on the next normal side may be longer. More specifically, the hold information acquired by the previously dropped game ball may be digested while the subsequent game ball rolls on the rolling surface 881. If it does so, it can be said that the rolling surface 881 has a function which makes the acquisition timing of pending | holding information become timing different from arrival timing. Therefore, for example, even if three pieces of hold information are acquired by dropping from the third drop port 884, if the subsequent hold information acquisition timing is late, the number of hold information is not four, and the winning easy state is not achieved. By doing in this way, it becomes game nature using the relationship between the period during which a game ball rolls on the rolling surface 881 and the drop openings 882 to 884 that fall after rolling, and the flow-down mode of the game ball is described above. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by relating it well with the setting of the easy-to-win state.

<Third Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In the present modification, the second through gate 850 is disposed directly above the through gate 35. FIG. 84 is a front view showing a game board 60 of the present modification. Also in this modification, the same components as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  The second through gate 850 and the through gate 35 are arranged so that the central axes coincide with each other in the vertical direction, and the distance between the second through gate 850 and the through gate 35 is larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. It is getting smaller. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 850 passes through the through gate 35, and the game ball that does not pass through the second through gate 850 is set so as not to pass through the through gate 35.

  More specifically, the interval between the second through gate 850 and the through gate 35 is set so that the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 850 passes through the through gate 35 in a time shorter than the cycle of the normal game. A through gate 850 and a through gate 35 are disposed. For this reason, when the holding information on the normal side is acquired based on the winning to the second through gate 850, the winning to the through gate 35 occurs before the general game based on the holding information ends. The hold information is acquired. It should be noted that when a winning is generated in the second through gate 850, a winning is always generated in the through gate 35. Therefore, in the following description, the second through gate 850 and the through gate 35 are continuously connected together. This is also referred to as “through”, and winning in the continuous through is also referred to as continuous through winning.

  FIG. 85 (a) shows a universal figure success / failure table in this modification.

  In this modification, the result of opening is a probability of 500/1000 and a result of losing is a probability of 500/1000 in the success / failure lottery on the normal map side. That is, unlike the above-described embodiments, which are mostly open results, half of the results are open results.

  In this modification, the base map change display time table referred to in the base game game times is switched based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition. The predetermined switching condition is, for example, a jackpot result in the special drawing side lottery, and the normal map display time table is switched based on the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In this modified example, a normal state fluctuation display time table for the first state shown in FIG. 85 (b) and a common figure fluctuation display time table for the second state shown in FIG. 85 (c) are provided. Yes.

  When the common game fluctuation display time table for the first state is referred to and the general game play time is executed, the normal map fluctuation display time table (FIG. 10B) in the first embodiment is selected. The variable display time is the same time. On the other hand, the stop display time as the fixed display is different from that of the first embodiment, and a time shorter than the stop display time (0.4 sec) of the first embodiment is set. Specifically, a different stop display time is set depending on the result of the lottery drawing lottery lottery, and when the Fig. Pending storage number FN is 1 to 3, the release result is 0.125 sec. When the stop display time is set, and the usual figure storage number FN is 1 to 3 and the result is an outlier, the stop display time of 0.225 sec is set. Further, when the usual figure storage number FN is 4, the stop display time of 0.4 sec is set when the release result is 4, and when the usual figure storage number FN is 4, the stop display time is 0. .5 sec stop display time is set.

  In other words, the stop display time is set to be longer in the case of the result of being out of the opening time (0.1 sec) for which the electric accessory 66 is in the open state. Regardless of the result, the execution time of ordinary game (ordinary game time) is set to be the same time for the same number of holds. Specifically, the general game time is mostly 0.275 sec when the normal map storage number FN is 1 to 3, and rarely 10.225 sec. Further, when the usual figure storage number FN is 4, the usual figure game time is 1.1 sec.

  As described above, in this modified example, a prize is also awarded to the through gate 35 along with a prize to the second through gate 850. And, in the normal time when the usual figure reserved memory number FN is 1 to 3, the usual figure game time is 0.275 sec, and the total game time based on winning to both through gates 850 and 35 is 0.00. 55 seconds. In other words, the two times of the usual game time is the same as the one time of the usual game time when the number of the common figure hold memory FN is 1 to 3 in the first embodiment, and the game ball is fired. The time is shorter than the period. In this case, the game ball that has won the second through gate 850 does not reach the electric player 66 until the electric player 66 is released, and the game ball wins the through gate 35 and receives the win. Therefore, the electric accessory 66 is not reached until the electric accessory 66 is released. As a result, no winning at the second operating port 63 occurs, and even if a subsequent game ball wins at the second through gate 850, the usual figure holding memory number FN only repeats 0 and 1, The increase is not expected.

  In the situation where the usual figure hold memory number FN is 1 to 3, when 10.0 sec, which is longer than the firing period, is selected as the variable display time selected with a relatively low probability, After that, it is possible to easily reach the upper limit number FN stored memory number FN, and it is possible to shift to the easy winning state where the upper limit number 4 is maintained. This is because a long variable display time is selected although there is a difference that it is possible to shift to the winning easy state as soon as the hold information is acquired even based on the winning to the second through gate 850. Thus, the configuration of increasing the number of reserved memory FN is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  In the first state, in the situation where the usual figure reserved memory number FN is 4, the usual figure game time is 1.1 sec. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the situation in which the arrival timing of the electric accessory 66 overlaps with the timing at which the electric accessory 66 is released is a ratio of approximately one to ten balls. Will occur. Since the above-mentioned ordinary game time is longer than the firing cycle, as long as a regular winning to the second through gate 850 occurs, the ordinary figure holding memory number FN repeats 4 and 3, and the winning easy state is continued. The

  However, as described above, in this modified example, the probability of an open result in the normal-use lottery drawing is halved. For this reason, in the first state, when the winning is easy state, the winning to the second working port 63 is substantially generated at a rate of about one in every 20 balls.

  On the other hand, when the common figure game display time is executed with reference to the normal state fluctuation display time table for the second state, as shown in FIG. In this case, the variable display time and the stop display time are set so that most of the game time is 0.275 sec and rarely 10.225 sec, as in the case of the normal game time in the first state. That is, when the usual figure reserved memory number FN is 1-2, the ordinary figure reserved memory number FN repeats 0 and 1 until the ordinary figure game time of 10.225 sec is reached, as in the first state. And no further increase is expected. And it becomes possible to increase the memory number FN of reserved figure by having the usual game time of 10.225 sec.

  When the usual figure storage number FN becomes 3, the variable display time is set to 0.3 sec, the stop display time is set to 0.4 sec when the release result is the release result, and is 0 when the stop display time is the release result. .5 sec is set. Therefore, when the usual figure reservation storage number FN is 3, the usual figure game time is 0.8 sec, which is longer than the firing period.

  When the usual figure hold storage number FN becomes 4, the variable display time is set to 0.075 sec, and the stop display time is set to 0.125 sec when it is an open result, and 0 when it is an outlier result. .225 sec is set. Therefore, when the usual figure reservation storage number FN is 4, the usual figure game time is 0.3 sec, which is shorter than the firing period.

  That is, in a situation where the normal state variable display time table for the second state is referred to, the variable display time of 10.0 sec is selected to increase the normal figure reserved memory number FN. When 4 becomes 4, since the base game time shorter than the firing cycle is set, the base game is finished before the subsequent game ball wins the second through gate 850, and the base map storage number The usual game in the situation where FN is 3 will be started. In the situation in which the number of memorandum hold memory FN is 3, the gambling game time is set longer than the firing period, so the second slew is set at the timing before the end of the mundane game Winning to the gate 850 occurs. When a winning for the second through gate 850 occurs, a winning for the through gate 35 also occurs, so that the usual figure storage number FN increases by 2 to 4. Then, again, a 0.3-second general-purpose game in a situation where the number of reserved memory FN is 4 and a general-purpose game of 0.8 sec in a situation where the number of reserved memory FN is 3 are executed. At the same time, the usual-pending information is supplemented based on winning in the second through gate 850.

  If a situation occurs in which the timing at which the game ball arrives at the electric accessory 66 and the timing at which the electric accessory 66 is released occur, a winning to the second operating port 63 occurs and the second state is reached. It becomes easy to win a prize. In this case, in the easy winning state, the number of ordinary games per unit time is larger than that in the first state. Specifically, since the total of the above-mentioned 0.3 sec. Ordinary game and 0.8 sec. Ordinary game is equal to 1.1 sec, which is the game time of the ordinary game in the winning state in the first state, In the easy-to-win state in the second state, the ordinary game is executed about twice as many times as in the easy-to-win state in the first state.

  As a result, the situation in which the arrival timing of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 and the timing at which the electric accessory 66 is released in the second winning easy state is the same as the first winning easy state in the first state. It will occur approximately twice as often, and will occur at a rate of about 1 in 5 balls.

  However, as described above, in this modified example, the probability of an open result in the normal-use lottery drawing is halved. For this reason, in the second state, when the winning becomes easy, winning to the second working port 63 occurs substantially at a rate of about one ball per ten balls.

  In addition, since the holding information may be replenished during the execution of the general game in the situation where the normal figure reserved memory number FN is 3, the normal figure reserved memory number FN in the second state easy to win. The number of executions of a general game that starts in a situation where is 4 is larger than that of a general game that starts in a situation where the number FN of reserved memory for FN is 3. Therefore, when the easy-to-win state in the first state and the easy-to-win state in the second state are compared, the number of times in the easy-to-win state in the second state is more than twice that in the easy-to-win state in the first state. The usual game will be executed per unit time. That is, in the second state, in the easy-to-win state, the situation where the arrival timing of the game ball to the electric accessory 66 and the timing at which the electric accessory 66 is released also overlap in the case of the first state. More than twice as much as the situation, the winning to the second working port 63 will also occur at a rate greater than the rate of one ball to five.

  In any case, by doing as described above, the winning rate to the second operating port 63 in the easy-to-win state in the first state and the winning rate to the second operating port 63 in the easy-to-win state in the second state Can be made different. Thereby, it is possible to create a plurality of easy winning states with different winning rates to the second operating port 63 by changing the length of the variable display time, and to diversify the game. .

  More specifically, since the winning rate for the second operating port 63 is higher in the second state than in the first state, the winning state is higher in the second state than in the first state. However, in the second state, the winning lottery execution frequency on the first special figure side in the easy-to-win state is increased, and the sense of expectation for the jackpot result is enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to obtain a winning ball by winning the second operating port 63, the second state has better ball holding during the winning easier state than the first state, or the number of holding balls increases. Can be expected. In this way, it is possible to vary the advantage for the player when the first state and the second state are in the easy winning state.

<Fourth Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In this modification, a new game is created using a configuration in which a plurality of pieces of holding information can be acquired. FIG. 86 (a) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 60 in the present modification. Also in this modification, the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  In the present modification, a tenth through gate 858 and an eleventh through gate 859 are provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67. The tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 are arranged so that the central axes coincide with each other in the vertical direction, and the tenth through gate 858 is above and below the eleventh through gate 859. Are installed side by side. The distance between the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 is smaller than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has won the tenth through gate 858 will then win the eleventh through gate 859 and will not win the eleventh through gate 859 without winning the tenth through gate 858. Yes. That is, the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 are in a continuous through relationship of the second through gate 850 and the through gate 35 in the third modified example.

  A third variable winning device 910 is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 67 and below the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859. The third variable winning device 910 is a ball-entry unit that is controlled to be opened and closed when a win / win lottery for ordinary use is won. More specifically, it has the same configuration as the second variable prize-winning device 500 in the third embodiment, and a game ball can be awarded to the distribution entrance 501 by controlling the opening and closing of the distribution member 502. It becomes. Further, the game ball flows into the V winning area 506 in the third variable winning device 910, and thereafter the V winning open / close execution mode is executed as in the third embodiment. .

  Below the variable display unit 67, a first operation port 62 is provided in the same manner as in each of the above-described embodiments, and when a game ball wins the first operation port 62, a lottery for the first special figure is performed. Is done. In the present modification, the operation port for the second special drawing is not provided.

  A fourth variable winning device 900 is provided below the variable display unit 67 and below the first operation port 62. When a big win is won in the first special figure winning / losing lottery, and when a game ball passes through the V winning area 506 in the third variable winning device 910, 16 rounds by the fourth variable winning device 900 The opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the present modification, the probability of winning / failing lottery on the normal map side is different from the above-described embodiments. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the present modification, most of the results in the lottery determination on the normal map side result in losing results (999/1000), and the opening results are relatively infrequent (1/1000). When the release result is reached, the third variable winning device 910 is opened for a predetermined period. In this case, unlike the above embodiments, the upper limit opening time of the third variable winning device 910 is set as 10 sec. Therefore, when the third variable winning device 910 is opened, it is possible to generate a winning to the third variable winning device 910 almost certainly. Then, by passing the V winning area 506 in the third variable winning device 910 (V winning), the opening / closing execution mode by the fourth variable winning device 900 is thereafter implemented.

  In the present modification, when the third variable winning device 910 is in an open state, the probability of winning a V is about 1/5. Specifically, when the third variable prize-winning device 910 is opened five times (when the result is five times opened), V prize is won at a rate of one time. Therefore, when the hold information on the normal map side is acquired based on the winning to the 10th through gate 858 or the 11th through gate 859, the V winning is generated with a probability of about 1/5000 for one holding information. It becomes possible to make it.

  Also in this modified example, when a game ball is fired so as to flow down the left route, the gauge design is made so that most of them are awarded to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859.

  FIG. 87 shows a universal map display time table in this modification.

  In this modified example, a common figure fluctuation display time table for the first state and a common figure fluctuation display time table for the second state are provided, and the corresponding fluctuation display time table is selected according to the state at the time of the lottery drawing. Is done. Switching between the first state and the second state is performed by a lottery on the special drawing side. More specifically, the big win result in the special figure side lottery results in switching from the first state to the second state. In the second state, the special figure side lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Based on this, the setting is made to switch from the second state to the first state.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the normal state variable display time table for the first state, the variable display time in the situation where there are three pieces of hold information is shorter (one or two). It is set to be longer than the situation, and the variable display time in the situation where the hold information is four more than the above three is set to be shorter than the other number of variable display times. Yes.

  Specifically, 0.79 sec is selected as the first time as the variable display time when the number of hold information is one or two. The fixed time (stop display time) is 0.01 sec, and if the third variable winning device 910 is not in the open state, in the situation where the holding information is one or two, the ordinary game is 1 in 0.8 sec. Will be executed once. In other words, when the variable display time is set as the first time, the usual game progresses with a slightly longer cycle than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), and therefore the replenishment of the hold information rather than the digestion speed of the hold information The speed is faster and the hold information is more easily stored.

  When there are three pieces of hold information, either the first time 0.79 sec or the second time longer than the first time 1.29 sec is selected. In the case of 1.29 sec, the ordinary game is executed once in 1.3 sec, and the hold information is more easily stored than when the first time is selected. In other words, when the usual game is started and the second time is selected in a situation where there are three pieces of hold information, since the digestion speed of the hold information is slowed down, the hold information is accumulated more than when the first time is selected. It becomes easy. The first time and the second time are determined by the value of the common variable type counter C5, and the second time is more easily selected than the first time. Note that the variable display time may be determined by another counter, other lottery processing, or the like.

  When the holding information is the upper limit number of four, 0.29 sec as a third time shorter than the first time and the second time is uniformly selected. When the third time is selected, the ordinary game is executed once in 0.3 sec. Therefore, the digestion speed of the hold information becomes faster than the replenishment speed of the hold information, and the hold information is difficult to accumulate.

  In the common map fluctuation display time table for the second state, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the fluctuation display time in the situation where there are two pieces of hold information is shorter than that (one). It is set so that it can be long, and the variable display time in the situation where the hold information is three or four more than the above two is set to be shorter than the other number of variable display times Yes.

  Specifically, the variable display time when there is only one hold information is uniformly selected as 0.79 sec as the first time. In this case, since the ordinary game is executed once in 0.8 sec as described above, the replenishment speed of the hold information is faster than the digestion speed of the hold information, and the hold information is easily stored.

  When there are two pieces of hold information, either the first time 0.79 sec or the second time 1.29 sec is selected. As described above, when the second time is selected, the hold information is more easily stored than when the first time is selected. Similar to the first state, the first time and the second time are determined by the value of the common variable type counter C5, and the second time is more easily selected than the first time.

  When there are three pieces of hold information, 0.29 sec which is the third time is uniformly selected. When the third time is selected, the ordinary game is executed once in 0.3 sec. Therefore, the digestion speed of the hold information becomes faster than the replenishment speed of the hold information, and the hold information is difficult to accumulate.

  When the hold information is the upper limit number of four, 0.01 sec is uniformly set as the fourth time shorter than the first to third times. When the fourth time is set, the ordinary game is executed once in 0.02 sec, and the digestion speed of the hold information is overwhelmingly faster than the replenishment speed of the hold information. As a result, it becomes more difficult to store the hold information than when there are three pieces.

  In the first state and the second state, how the hold information for ordinary use is acquired will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 88 and 89.

  As already described, most of the game balls flowing down the left route win the 10th through gate 858 and the 11th through gate 859. In other words, when a game ball is fired so as to flow down the left route, winnings to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 periodically occur according to the firing cycle.

  In the first state, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, when a winning to the tenth through gate 858 occurs at timing ta1, a winning to the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at timing ta2. When the number of the hold information on the normal side is 0 at the timing ta1, the hold information is acquired one by one at the timing ta1 and the timing ta2. However, since the hold information is acquired at the timing ta1 and the hold information is consumed (the usual game is started), the number of stored hold information is one at the timing ta2. It should be noted that the general game game started at timing ta1 ends at timing ta5 after 0.8 sec (the next general game is started at timing ta5).

  When the subsequent game ball wins the tenth through gate 858 at the timing ta3, the winning to the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at the timing ta4. Since the ordinary game started at timing ta1 is still ongoing, the number of stored hold information is 2 based on the winning at timing ta3, and the number of stored hold information is 3 based on the winning at timing ta4. It becomes. Then, at the time ta5, the next game of the usual game started at the timing ta1 is started, so that the number of stored hold information is reduced by one to two.

  The general game that starts at the timing ta5 is a general game that starts in a situation where there are three pieces of hold information. For example, when 1.29 sec, which is the second display time, is selected, The general-purpose game ends at timing ta10 after 1.3 seconds (the next general-purpose game is started at timing ta10).

  The next game ball wins the tenth through gate 858 at the timing ta6, which is the timing before the timing ta10, and then wins the eleventh through gate 859 at the timing ta7. In this case, the number of stored hold information is 3 based on the winning at timing ta6, and the number of stored hold information is 4 based on the winning at timing ta7. That is, the upper limit number that can store the hold information is reached.

  At the timing ta8, the next game ball wins the tenth through gate 858, and subsequently wins the eleventh through gate 859 at the timing ta9. However, in this case, since the general-purpose game started at the timing ta5 has not yet ended, and the number of stored information reaches the upper limit at the timing ta7 as described above, the winnings at the timing ta8 and the timing ta9 Does not get hold information. In other words, even if a winning is awarded to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859, the winning lottery on the normal side cannot be received.

  When the ordinary game is finished at timing ta10, the next ordinary game is started. In this case, the game is a general game started in a situation where there are four pieces of hold information, and the variable display time is set to the third time of 0.29 sec. Then, the general game is finished at timing ta13 after 0.3 sec (the next general game is started at timing ta13).

  The winning of the tenth through gate 858 occurs at the timing ta11 after the start of the general game at the timing ta10 and before the end of the general game, and then the eleventh through gate 859 at the timing ta12. Will be awarded. In this case, as described above, since one piece of hold information has been consumed by the start of the general game at the time ta10, one free space is generated in the storage area on the general map side. Therefore, although one piece of hold information is acquired in the winning at the timing ta11, the vacancy disappears due to the acquisition, and the storage number of the holding information reaches the upper limit, and the holding information is not acquired in the winning at the timing ta12. In other words, even if a winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 is generated, two pieces of holding information are not acquired, but only one piece of holding information is acquired, Only one is done.

  When the ordinary game is finished at timing ta13, the next ordinary game is started. As in the case of the timing ta10, the game is a general game started in a situation where there are four pieces of hold information, and the variable display time is set to a third time of 0.29 sec. Then, the general game is finished at timing ta16 after 0.3 sec (the next general game is started at timing ta16).

  The winning of the tenth through gate 858 occurs at the timing ta14 after the start of the general game at the timing ta13 and before the end of the general game, and then the eleventh through gate 859 at the timing ta15. Will be awarded. Also in this case, as described above, since one piece of the hold information is digested by the start of the general game at the timing ta13, one free space is generated in the general memory area. Therefore, the number of stored hold information reaches the upper limit by winning at timing ta14, and no hold information is acquired by winning at timing ta15. In other words, even if a winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 is generated, two pieces of holding information are not acquired, but only one piece of holding information is acquired, Only one is done.

  When the ordinary game is finished at timing ta16, the next ordinary game is started, and one free space is generated in the storage area for the hold information. As a result, even if a winning to the tenth through gate 858 occurs at timing ta17 and a winning to the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at timing ta18, two pieces of holding information are not acquired and one Only the hold information is acquired, and only one lottery is performed on the normal side.

  The same applies to the case where the general-purpose game started at timing ta16 ends at timing ta19 and the next general-purpose game starts, and only one piece of holding information is obtained by winning that occurs at timing ta20 and timing ta21. Will be acquired, and only one lottery lottery will be held on the ordinary side.

  That is, in the first state, if the hold information on the normal side is periodically acquired, the timing ta11 (timing ta12), the timing ta14 (timing ta15), the timing ta17 (timing ta18), and the timing ta20 (timing) In ta21), even if a prize is awarded to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859, a smaller number of pieces of pending information is obtained than the prize pending information. In other words, it is in a state where a lottery win / win lottery is performed, which is smaller than the winning prize. Here, since one piece of hold information is acquired, and one lot of successful / bad lottery is performed, this state is also referred to as a single lottery state. That is, the first state can be said to be a state in which a single lottery state is likely to occur.

  In the second state, as shown in FIG. 89, for example, when a winning to the tenth through gate 858 occurs at timing tb1, a winning to the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at timing tb2. When the number of the hold information on the normal side is 0 at the timing tb1, the hold information is acquired one by one at the timing tb1 and the timing tb2. However, since the hold information is acquired at the timing tb1 and the hold information is consumed (the usual game is started), the number of stored hold information is one at the timing tb2. It should be noted that the general game game started at the timing tb1 ends at the timing tb5 after 0.8 sec (the next general game is started at the timing tb5).

  When the subsequent game ball wins the tenth through gate 858 at the timing tb3, a win to the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at the timing tb4. Since the ordinary game started at timing tb1 is still ongoing, the number of stored hold information is 2 based on the winning at timing tb3, and the number of stored hold information is 3 based on the winning at timing tb4. It becomes. Then, the number of stored hold information is reduced by one to two by starting the next game of the usual game started at the timing tb1 at the timing tb5.

  The general game that starts at timing tb5 is a general game that starts in a situation where there are three pieces of hold information. When the variable display time is set to the third time of 0.29 sec, the general game is started. The figure game ends at timing tb8 after 0.3 sec (the next ordinary game is started at timing tb8).

  The winning of the tenth through gate 858 occurs at the timing tb6 after the start of the general game at the timing tb5 and before the end of the general game, and then the eleventh through gate 859 at the timing tb7. Will be awarded. In this case, since one piece of hold information has been consumed by the start of the usual game at the timing tb5, there are two vacant spaces in the usual memory area. Therefore, the hold information is acquired in accordance with the winnings at the timing tb6 and the timing tb7. In other words, when a winning is awarded to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859, the number of holding information corresponding to the winning amount is acquired, and the winning lottery on the normal map side is for the winning portion (for two). Is called.

  When the ordinary game started at the timing tb5 ends at the timing tb8, the next ordinary game starts at the timing tb8. In this case, the game is a normal game started in a situation where there are four pieces of pending information, and the variable display time is set to 0.01 sec, which is the fourth time. Therefore, the ordinary game ends at timing tb9 which is 0.02 sec later. That is, in the very short period from the timing tb8, the next hold information is consumed, and the next ordinary game is started at the timing tb9. Then, there are three pieces of hold information at timing tb8, and there are two pieces of hold information at timing tb9. The general game that starts at timing tb9 is a general game that starts in a situation where there are three pieces of hold information, and the general game ends at timing tb12 after 0.3 sec.

  A winning for the tenth through gate 858 occurs at timing tb10, and a winning for the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at timing tb11. In this case, since there are two vacant spaces in the storage area on the normal map side, the hold information is acquired in accordance with the winnings at the timing tb10 and the timing tb11. In other words, when a winning is awarded to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859, the number of holding information corresponding to the winning amount is acquired, and the winning lottery on the normal map side is for the winning portion (for two). Is called.

  The ordinary game started at the timing tb9 ends at the timing tb12, and the next ordinary game starts at the same timing. Then, the next ordinary game is started again at the timing tb13 immediately after that. Then, when a winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at the timing tb14 and the timing tb15, the hold information for the winning portion is acquired.

  The next general game of the normal game started at the timing tb13 is started at the timing tb16, and the next general game is started at the timing tb17 immediately after that. Then, when a winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs at the timing tb18 and the timing tb19, the hold information for the winning portion is acquired.

  That is, in the second state, if the hold information on the normal side is periodically acquired, the timing tb1 (timing tb2), the timing tb3 (timing tb4), the timing tb6 (timing tb7), and the timing tb10 (timing) tb11), at timing tb14 (timing tb15), and at timing tb18 (timing tb19), when winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs, the holding information for the winning is acquired. . In other words, the same number of winning / failing lotteries for common use as the winning prizes are performed. Here, two pieces of hold information are acquired, and two lottery winning / not-use lotteries are performed. Therefore, this state is also referred to as a double lottery state. That is, the second state can be said to be a state in which a double lottery state is likely to occur.

  The game flow of this modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left route and a winning is made to the first operation port 62, a special lottery determination lottery is performed. When the winning / losing lottery on the special figure side results in a jackpot result (1/200), a 16-round opening / closing execution mode is executed by the fourth variable winning device 900, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. In the figure, the fourth variable winning device 900 is shown as an attacker.

  When the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left route, a winning to the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 occurs. In the figure, the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 859 are shown as continuous through.

  In the case where a continuous through winning is generated, in the first state, the common figure game is executed with reference to the common figure variable display time table for the first state. In this case, the single lottery state is likely to occur as described above, and in the single lottery state, one ordinary drawing lottery is performed for one continuous through winning. In other words, the probability of an open result in a regular drawing lottery based on one consecutive through winning is substantially 1/1000.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the normal game is executed with reference to the normal state fluctuation display time table for the second state. In this case, as described above, it is easy to enter the double lottery state, and in the double lottery state, the normal drawing lottery is performed twice for one continuous through winning. In other words, the probability of an open result in the regular drawing lottery based on one consecutive through winning is substantially one-hundredth of a half because each ordinary drawing lottery is 1/1000.

  When the result of opening in the general drawing lottery is reached, the third variable prize-winning device 910 is opened. Then, when the V winning is generated in the third variable winning device 910, it is possible to shift to the 16 round opening / closing execution mode by the fourth variable winning device 900 (attacker).

  The switching between the first state and the second state is performed based on the result of the winning or failing lottery on the special drawing side, and the first state is switched to the second state based on the result of the jackpot result. Thereafter, the special drawing side lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), thereby switching from the second state to the first state. In other words, when the winning / losing lottery on the special figure side results in a big win, not only a 16-round opening / closing execution mode is obtained, but also a game in a state advantageous to the player in the double lottery state in the second state. Can be done. When a V prize is generated in the second state, the game moves to the 16-round opening / closing execution mode, and then the game in the second state can be performed again. In this case, the second state continues until the special drawing side lottery is performed for the remaining number of times.

  As described above, it is possible to change the actual probability of the lottery drawing drawing by utilizing the fact that the number of the usual drawing hold information obtained varies depending on the number of free storage areas of the usual drawing hold information. Accordingly, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which the actual probability of the general drawing lottery is changed without changing the actual probability of the normal drawing lottery.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability of an open result in the common-use lottery lottery is about 1/1. However, the probability is not limited to this, and other probabilities may be used. However, it is possible to increase the opening frequency of the electric accessory 66 or to make the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area RA2 easier to adapt to the opening period of the electric accessory 66 in the process of changing the time difference A, B. Then, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the probability of an open result is higher than the probability of an off result.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the width of the second working port 63, in other words, the width of the receiving area RA1 when the electric accessory 66 is in the open state is the size of about one game ball. However, the size may be two or more. However, if the size is two or more, not only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 but also other game balls can easily win the second operation port 63. Therefore, the winning rate for the second operation port 63 is increased. In adjusting, it is preferable to configure as in the above embodiments.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the receiving member 245 includes the electric accessory 66 that opens and closes when the receiving member 245 moves back and forth. However, the receiving member 245 may have another configuration such as a front-rear rotation type or a lateral opening type. . That is, as long as the opening degree of the second working port 63 can be changed, the configuration of the electric accessory is arbitrary.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66 (second operating port 63) are arranged vertically, but the arrangement direction thereof may be a horizontal direction or an oblique direction. In short, it is sufficient that the through gate 35 is located upstream of the electric accessory 66 in the flow of the game balls, and the arrangement direction thereof is arbitrary.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, the game nails 69a to 69d are provided between the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66, and the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 are guided to the electric accessory 66 (specific region RA2). However, it is possible to prevent the game balls other than the game ball from moving toward the electric accessory 66 (specific area RA2). However, in order to stabilize the winning rate of the game ball to the second operating port 63, it is preferable to configure as in the above embodiments.

  Further, the guiding means is not necessarily constituted by a game nail, and for example, the guiding means can be constituted by a wall portion (one continuous wall or a plurality of walls arranged intermittently) extending in the guiding direction. The same applies to the inhibiting means. When the guiding means is configured by a wall portion, a surface (guidance surface) on the flow path side of the game ball in the wall portion may be flat. Thereby, it is possible to smoothen the flow of the game ball until it reaches the specific area RA2, and to promote stabilization of the required time until the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2. In addition, at least one projecting portion projecting toward the flow channel side is provided on the flow channel side surface, and a configuration including a speed reduction unit that decelerates the game ball, or a configuration in which the guidance unit is curved, such as being formed in a zigzag shape, May be. By adopting such a configuration, the placement area of the guiding means is not only used as the guiding area, but also the time required for the game ball to reach the specific area RA2, and the game ball at the time of reaching the specific area RA2 It can also be used as an adjustment area for adjusting the momentum.

  Note that the guiding means does not necessarily have to be configured such that all of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 are directed to the specific area RA2, for example, of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35, reach the specific area RA2. The proportion of game balls is higher than the proportion of game balls that do not reach (in other words, the proportion of game balls that are picked up by the electric game 66 when the electric game 66 is in the open state is not picked up) It is sufficient if the configuration is such that the game ball can easily go to the specific area RA2 as compared to the case where there is no such guiding means. In addition, it is not necessary for the blocking means to completely block the game balls other than the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 from heading to the specific area RA2. For example, among the game balls that reach the specific area RA2 (in other words, For example, when the electric accessory 66 is in an open state, the proportion of game balls that have been picked up by the electric accessory 66) is higher than the proportion of game balls that have not passed. For example, it is sufficient if a game ball other than the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 is less likely to go to the specific area RA2 as compared with the case where there is no inhibition means.

  (6) In each of the above-described embodiments, in order to make the usual figure reserved storage number FN easily become four, the usual figure fluctuation display time is set to a period (10 sec) longer than normal (0.05 sec), thereby allowing a game ball Although the specific period from when winning through the through gate 35 to the end of the support state of the electric accessory 66 corresponding to the winning is extended, this is instead of or in addition to the ordinary game times It is good also as a structure which lengthens the said specific period by lengthening a stop display time.

  Further, in place of or in addition to the normal map change display time and the stop display time, the specific period is lengthened by extending at least one of the general map opening period, the ending period, and the opening time of the electric accessory 66. It is good. However, under the configuration in which the specific period is lengthened in relation to the general figure reserved storage number FN, it is preferable to change the specific period according to the general map display time and / or the stop display time.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the specific period (10.5 sec) for changing from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is the specific period (1. However, they may be the same time length, or the lengths may be reversed. In short, the former specific period can be of any length as long as it can be changed from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, and the latter can also maintain the second normal gaming state. Any length can be used.

  (8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of times of opening of the electric combination 66 in the support state is set to one, but the electric combination 66 may be opened a plurality of times in one support state. However, under the configuration in which the number of transitions to the support state per unit time is increased as in each of the above-described embodiments, when the electric accessory 66 is released a plurality of times in one support state, the rotating plate 243 and the receiving plate are received. In the movable body such as the member 245, the number of displacements is remarkably increased, and wear due to sliding friction or the like easily proceeds. Further, under the condition that the specific period is shorter than the game ball firing cycle, it is necessary to extremely shorten the opening time per time, and even if the second normal gaming state is entered, It is assumed that game balls will not win. Taking these into consideration, it is preferable to open once as in the above embodiments. Incidentally, in a configuration in which the electric accessory 66 is released a plurality of times in one support state, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 has completed the first opening operation of the electric accessory 66 (preferably the first opening operation). May be configured to reach the specific area RA2 after the completion of the operation and before the start of the second opening operation. In addition, when the number of times of opening is three times or more, not only the first time but also a configuration that reaches after the end of the second and subsequent opening operations may be adopted.

  (9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pass-through through gate 35 is provided as an operation opening that triggers the start of a general game, but the operation opening does not necessarily need to be a pass-through, A configuration may be adopted in which the winning game balls cannot continue to flow down the game area PE. At that time, in a case where the game ball won in the through gate 35 can reach the electric accessory 66, the game ball reaches the electric accessory 66 through the ball passage provided inside or on the back side of the game board 60. It is good to have a configuration to do.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on winning to the through gate 35 is stored with the upper limit being four, but it may be less than four, or five or more. Also good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the upper limit memory | storage number of the hold information based on the winning to the through gate 35 and each operation port 62-64 differs.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has been launched can win the through gate 35 without going through the guiding portion 77. However, when the game ball wins the through gate 35, it is always guided. It is good also as composition which receives guidance of part 77. Further, in the configuration in which the game ball is guided to the through gate 35 by the guide portion 77, the fired game ball may be configured to reach the guide portion 77 directly without coming into contact with the game nail. This is because if both the case where the game nail is brought into contact with the game nail and the case where the game nail is not brought into contact with the game nail are generated, there is a possibility that the guidance is adversely affected due to the difference in the momentum of the game ball.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device is opened only once when the mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result. However, the variable winning device is opened multiple times in one opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure. In the third embodiment, the number of times of opening may be different between the opening execution mode corresponding to the advantageous special hit result and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the disadvantageous special hit result. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure from which the frequency | count of opening differs according to the classification (For example, advantageous special hit result A and advantageous special hit result B) in advantageous special hit results. The same applies to the case where a plurality of types of disadvantageous special hit results are provided.

  (13) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the ordinary figure storage number FN is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the difficulty of winning the game ball to the second operation port 63 is reduced, and it is easy to win. For example, in the case where the usual figure storage number FN is less than a predetermined number (for example, 0), the release period of the electric accessory 66 and the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area RA2 are adapted, etc. A configuration may be adopted in which the difficulty level of winning a game ball to the second operating port 63 is increased and the winning is difficult because the usual figure storage number FN is a predetermined number or more. In such a configuration, the normal figure reserved memory number FN can be easily stored in normal times, and the special figure reserved memory number FN is not stored or is difficult to store in a specific case.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, the winning percentage stored in the second operation port 63 of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 is changed when the usual figure storage number FN is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The winning percentage of the game balls other than the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 to the second operation port 63 may be changed.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that a bonus (for example, payout of a game ball) can be easily obtained when the usual figure storage number FN is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, but for example, a game ball for one winning It is good also as a structure where a privilege becomes advantageous, such as increase in the number of payout.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, the required period from the game ball passing through the through gate 35 until reaching the specific area RA2 is the game ball winning interval to the through gate 35 (game ball firing cycle). With the same 0.6 sec, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the specific area RA2 after the electric accessory 66 is closed. The period may be longer than the winning interval. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), if the required period is 1.0 sec, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 is earlier than the next opening timing (timing t1A) in the electric accessory 66 in the specific region RA2. Thus, the game ball does not win the second operation port 63 not only during the opening period of [1] corresponding to the passage but also during the opening period of the next [2].

  However, if the required period is the same as the winning interval as in the first embodiment, or the predetermined period is shorter than the winning interval, as shown in FIG. From t2A to the next passage timing t2B, the game ball related to the previous passage reaches the specific area RA2. In this case, in adjusting the presence / absence of a winning at the second working port 63 at the time of design, it is sufficient to consider the range X from the timing t2A to the timing t2B. That is, it is not necessary to consider a game ball that has passed before and a game ball that passes next, and the design load can be reduced. Considering this point, the required period is set to be equal to or less than the winning interval, and after the end of the support state corresponding to the previous pass and before the next pass occurs, the game ball related to the previous pass reaches the electric accessory 66. It is preferable to adopt a configuration to do so.

  (17) In each of the above embodiments, each of the operation ports 62 to 64, the through gate 35, the electric accessory 66, the receiving area RA1, and the specific area RA2 are provided in the game area PE, but at least one of them is provided. For example, it may be provided in an area different from the game area PE such as the inside of a predetermined accessory device.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 660 are provided separately. However, one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 143 and 660 may be provided. .

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 can win the first operation port 62, and the winning route to the through gate 35 and the winning route to the first operation port 62 are shared. However, the routes may be independent. However, if the two routes are configured to be independent, when it is desired to secure a winning rate to the first working port 62 to some extent, the winning rate to the through gate 35 must be lowered to increase the winning rate. In view of this point, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable. The same applies to other embodiments in which the above routes are shared.

  (20) In the first embodiment, the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 are provided as the operating ports corresponding to the first special drawing, but the first operating port 62 is omitted and the first special port is omitted. The number of operation ports corresponding to the drawing may be one.

  (21) In the first embodiment, the third working port 64 is disposed above (upstream side) the variable winning device 65, but the former may be disposed below (downstream side) the latter. According to such a configuration, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball does not win the variable winning device 65 by winning the third operation port 64.

  (22) In the first embodiment, in order to lengthen the normal map variable display time in accordance with the increase in the general-purpose reserved memory number FN, the general-purpose figure when the general-purpose reserved memory number FN is four. The variable display time is uniformly set to 0.6 sec, but the average (expected value) of the general map variable display time in such a case is larger than that in the case where the general map hold memory number FN = 4 or less. As long as it becomes long, it is good also as a structure diversified by providing several normal figure change display time from which length mutually differs. The same applies to other embodiments. Here, the average (expected value) is obtained when N is the number of types of variable display time that can be set, M is the length of each variable display time, and K is the set probability (selection probability) of each variable display time. M (1) × K (1) + M (2) × K (2) +... M (N) × K (N).

  Further, in the first embodiment, the normal map change display time when the number of stored common figure FN is 4 is longer than that when the stored number FN is 1 to 3. However, it may be longer than one of the cases where the number is 1 to 3, or the normal fluctuation display time may be longer as the storage number FN increases. The same applies to other embodiments.

  (23) In the first embodiment described above, not only the case where the number of reserved common figure records FN is four, but also the case where the number of common figure variable display time is set to 0.6 sec may be set to three. . As a result, even if the launched game ball does not win the through gate 35 under the second normal gaming state, it is possible to provide relief. In addition, when the number of ordinary reserved memory FN is 3, the retention rate of the ordinary reserved memory number FN is shorter than 0.6 sec and longer than 0.05 sec so that the maintenance rate of the ordinary memory reserved number FN is inferior to the case of four. It may be time. By adopting such a configuration, it is expected to focus on the game in order to avoid the occurrence of no winning in the through gate 35.

  (24) In the second embodiment, the second normal gaming state is assumed to be continuously continuous when the normal figure change display time is set to the special time (200 sec). It may be configured such that the presence / absence of continuity and the ease of continuation vary depending on the length of the variable display time of the game times. For example, an Asec variation display time and a longer Bsec variation display time are provided as the variation display time of the special figure game times. And when the execution period (or the prospective period) of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is Ysec, a specific period (after the game ball has won the through gate 35, the electric game object 66 corresponding to the winning is obtained. The special time is set so that the period until the support state ends is longer than Asec + Ysec and shorter than Bsec + Ysec. In this case, when the variation display time of the special figure game times is set to Asec, the second normal game state continues (is more likely to be continued), whereas when it is set to Bsec, it is not continued (or is less likely to be continued). ). As described above, the continuity of the second normal gaming state changes depending on the length of the fluctuation display time on the special figure side. As a result, not only the fluctuation display time on the normal figure side but also the fluctuation display time on the special figure side. The player's attention can be directed and the degree of attention to the game can be further increased.

  (25) In the second embodiment, the special figure (200 sec) normal fluctuation display time can be set only when the common figure reserved storage number FN is four (FIG. 37). (See step S2106) A special time may be set when the number is a predetermined number (for example, one) or less that is less than four. That is, it is only necessary that the customary variable display time can be set to the special time when the 5R normal jackpot result B is won in the second normal gaming state.

  (26) In the second embodiment, the special figure (200 sec) normal figure change display time can be set only when the jackpot result is the first special figure. The special time may be set even when a big hit result is obtained.

  (27) In the second embodiment, the difficulty of winning a game ball to the second operation port 63 in the second normal gaming state (medium frequency support mode) and the advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) is reversed. Or may be the same.

  (28) In the third embodiment, the advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) may be omitted. In this case, it may be configured to include only the second normal gaming state as a gaming state in which the winning of V jackpot can be expected, and the difficulty of winning a prize to the second operating port 63 is reduced, and the advantageous gaming state A different special game state may be provided separately from the second normal game state. In a configuration with a special game state, the special figure state is triggered by the occurrence of an event different from the fact that the reserved figure number FN is larger than the predetermined number and the big win in the special figure winning lottery It is good to have a configuration to migrate. The winning difficulty level of the game ball to the second operation port 63 in the special game state may be different from the second normal game state or may be the same.

  (29) In the third embodiment, the winning difficulty level of the game ball to the second operation port 63 in the second normal gaming state (winning support state) and the advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) is reversed. It may be the same.

  (30) In the third embodiment, after the second normal gaming state is reached, it is configured to continue until the general-purpose reserved memory number FN becomes zero. It is good also as a structure which a 2nd normal gaming state complete | finishes by becoming 1, 2, or 3. For example, in the configuration in which the second normal gaming state is ended when the number of the reserved figure FN is 1, the specific period when the reserved figure FN is 1 (the game ball wins the through gate 35). (The period from the end of the support state of the motorized object 66 corresponding to the winning) until the winning interval of the game balls to the through gate 35 (game ball firing cycle) may be significantly shorter (for example, The normal map display time and the stop display time are set so that the specific period is 0.2 sec). In this case, it becomes impossible or difficult to repeat the usual game while maintaining the state where the memory number FN is one, and as a result, the memory number FN becomes zero immediately and the second normal game state substantially. Can be terminated. This also applies to other embodiments.

  (31) In the third embodiment, the specific period in the case where the usual figure reserved storage number FN is four is made shorter than the winning interval of game balls to the through gate 35 (game ball firing cycle). Thus, the second normal gaming state is temporary, but the second normal gaming state may be continued until a big win is won as in the first embodiment. Conversely, in the first and second embodiments, the second normal gaming state may be temporary as in the third embodiment.

  (32) In the third embodiment, the hold information is stored with a predetermined number (four) as the upper limit based on winning in the second operating port 63 (second special figure). The hold information may not be stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified.

  (33) In the third embodiment described above, the ordinary reserved memory number FN becomes the second normal gaming state when the predetermined number or more is stored, but it is based on winning through the through gate 35. The second normal gaming state may be set based on the fact that the other index value different from the usual-pending stored number FN becomes a predetermined number or more. For example, the number of points may be acquired based on a winning to the through gate 35, and the second normal gaming state may be set based on an accumulated value of the points being a predetermined number. In that case, it is good also as a structure where a player can grasp | ascertain the said index value by alert | reporting the number of points acquired and accumulation | accumulation each time, and the interest which estimates them is added as a structure which does not alert | report the said number of points and accumulation | accumulation number Or creating a sudden feeling when the second normal gaming state occurs. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the general map hold information is not stored. The same applies to other embodiments.

  (34) In the third embodiment, the special effect displays S1 to S6 are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as various notification effects related to the second normal gaming state. Alternatively, another display device may be provided, and the special effect displays S1 to S6 may be displayed on the display screen of the other display device. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is displayed on both the symbol display apparatus 75 and said other display apparatus, or displays across them. In this case, it is good also as a structure which displays all the special effect displays S1-S6 on the said other display apparatus, and it is good also as a structure which displays a part of special effect displays S1-S6 on the said other display apparatus. At that time, in order to suppress the player's attention and interest in the symbol sequence on the display screen 75a, the display screen of the other display device is made smaller than the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, It may be arranged at a position farther from the front center of the game board 60 than the display screen 75a. However, when compared with the main display unit 43, the display area may be enlarged or arranged near the front center of the game board 60. Further, the various notification effects relating to the second normal gaming state are not necessarily limited to displaying images (still images or moving images) on the display screen, and may be those using a light emitting effect device such as an electric decoration member. Good. Furthermore, it is not necessarily visual, and may be auditory using sound, for example.

  (35) In the third embodiment described above, even if the second variable prize-winning device 500 is controlled to be opened and closed in either the low distribution mode or the high distribution mode, a common third special effect display Although S3-A is configured to be displayed, the aspect of the display effect may be changed according to the aspect of the opening / closing control of the second variable winning device 500. For example, as the third special effect display S3-A, a first notification and a second notification with different character colors in the character display 526 are provided, and the second variable winning device 500 is controlled to be opened and closed in a low distribution manner. When the first notification is easily displayed and the opening / closing control is performed in a high-distribution manner, the second notification may be easily displayed. This makes it possible to suggest a mode of opening / closing control of the second variable winning device 500 when the player aims for V winning.

  (36) In the third embodiment, the distribution mode (ease of occurrence of V winning) of the second variable winning device 500 may be changed on the basis of the general-purpose reserved storage number FN. For example, the second variable prize-winning device 500 is controlled to open or close in a low distribution mode when the number of reserved memory numbers FN is 4, and the high distribution mode when the storage number FN is 3. It is good to have a configuration in which opening / closing control is performed (or easier to be performed). As a result, it is possible to more closely relate the usual figure reserved memory number FN and the likelihood of occurrence of the V winning, and to favor the player's interest in the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35 and the usual figure reserved memory number F. It becomes possible to increase.

  (37) In the third embodiment, the level of the advantage such as whether or not the V prize is generated is realized by the operation of the shutter 508 in the second variable prize-winning device 500. The degree of advantage may be realized. For example, in the game area PE, when the bonus is provided upstream of the second variable winning device 500 and the bonus is placed at the first position, the game ball is guided to the second variable winning device 500. In the case where the game ball is arranged at the second position different from the first position, the game ball is not guided to the second variable winning device 500 or is not easily guided. Then, the operation of the accessory is configured to start from the timing of the stop display in the game times, and the timing at which the accessory is arranged at the first position is the second variable winning device 500 being opened in the opening / closing execution mode. The time from the start timing of the stop display to the opening timing of the second variable winning device 500 is adjusted so that the timing overlaps or does not overlap.

  (38) In the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot result is the winning lottery on the first special figure side, or when the jackpot result is A on the winning lottery side of the second special figure side, The large winning opening 710a is in the open state. For example, whether the upper large winning opening 710a is opened or the lower large winning opening 700a is opened in each open / close execution mode or each round. It is good also as a structure determined by lottery etc. In this case, the probability that the top winning prize opening 710a is selected in the case where a win-win result is obtained in the first special figure side win-win lottery and in the case where a win-win result is obtained in the second special figure side win-win lottery (Probability that the lower big prize winning opening 700a is selected) may be different, and the winner is the winner in the first special figure side lottery in the case of the winner in the second special figure side. It is good also as a structure where the probability that the top prize winning opening 710a will be selected becomes lower than the case where it becomes. On the contrary, the top winning prize opening 710a is selected in the case where the winning lottery result on the second special figure side is a jackpot result in the case of the winning lottery result on the first special figure side. It is good also as a structure where the probability which becomes high.

  Instead of or in addition to these, the probability that the top prize winning opening 710a is selected may be different depending on the type of the jackpot result. For example, the top winning prize opening 710a may be selected or easily selected by obtaining a 16R probability variation jackpot result.

  (39) In the fourth embodiment, an easy-to-win state becomes an advantageous state in which the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result can be frequently executed, and the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened. Although the configuration is such that the advantageous state ends, a configuration that ends the easy winning state may be applied to the configuration of the other embodiments.

  (40) In the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which the front surface of the upper door 710b is displaced between a closed state in which the front surface of the upper opening / closing door 710b is parallel to the front surface of the game board 60 and an open state in which the game board 60 stands up. As a premise, the winning rate to the through gate 35 is changed. However, the opening / closing mode of the upper variable winning device 710 is not limited to the above. For example, the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is constituted by a so-called electric tulip type opening / closing member that opens and closes the wings, and when the wings are opened, the winning rate to the through gate 35 is lowered, and the wings are closed to close The winning ratio to the gate 35 may be improved.

  (41) In the fourth embodiment, the top prize winning opening 710a can be opened when the jackpot result is obtained, but the top prize winning opening 710a is opened when the special winning result is obtained. It is good also as a structure. In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result, the opening upper limit period is set to 1.8 sec. However, in the opening / closing execution mode, the easy winning state can be continued even if the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened. However, the usual figure reserved storage number FN becomes less than the upper limit of 4, and the game times on the usual figure side can be started in a situation where the number is less than the upper limit number. For this reason, the easy-to-win state is ended after a while (the number of ordinary reserved memories FN gradually decreases). By doing so, it is possible to limit the period during which the opening / closing execution mode based on the special hit result can be performed, and to realize the above-described novel gameplay while suppressing the rise in the starting rate. It becomes possible.

  In this case, the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result is executed can also be involved in the continuity of the easy winning state. For example, if a winning to the through gate 35 occurs immediately after the game turn on the usual figure side is started in the easy-to-win state, and the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened, the next ordinary figure game turn will be raised. Although the game is started while the big prize opening 710a is in the open state, it becomes a game time that starts in a situation where the holding information is the upper limit number, and the next ordinary game game time is that the top prize winning opening 710a is in the closed state. It will be started after becoming. Therefore, in this case, there is room for replenishment of the hold information on the normal side after the upper prize winning opening 710a is closed, and the easy winning state can be continued (the upper limit can be reached again). it can).

  Furthermore, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special winning result may be implemented in the second special figure side winning / losing lottery, and even if the big winning result is not provided as a result of the second special figure side winning / losing lottery. Good. Also, as a result of the success / failure lottery on the second special figure side, instead of the special winning result or in addition to the special winning result, a jackpot result in which a small number of round games (for example, two times) are performed is provided, and it becomes a winning easy state. It is good also as a structure by which the said small number of round games are played frequently. In this case, for example, 198/200 may be won for a result of a small number of round games, and a result of more than 1/20 may be won for a result of more than 1/2. In this case, the remaining 1/200 may be a result of losing.

  (42) In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the branch round of whether the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened or the lower prize winning opening 700a is opened is set as the final round. However, another round in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result may be a branch round. For example, the first round (first round) may be a branching round, and the middle round may be a branching round. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which branch round is performed in which round depending on the kind of jackpot result. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which determines which round is made into a branch round, the number of rounds made into a branch round, etc. by lottery.

  (43) In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first special round effect or the second special round effect is executed in the branch round, but the first round is different from the branch round. It is good also as a structure which performs special round production (blessing production). In this case, it is possible to make it appear as if the branch round exists even in a round different from the final round.

  (44) In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the first special round effect and the second special round effect are executed in the branch round, but from the round before the branch round. The first special round effect and the second special round effect may be started so that it is possible to determine which round effect is to be made in the branch round. In addition, while the first special round production and the second special round production are executed during the branch round game, the first special round production and the second special round are also included including the interval period before or after the branch round. It is good also as a structure which performs production.

  (45) Needless to say, the first special round effect, the second special round effect, the normal round effect, and the special winning round effect in the first modification of the fourth embodiment are not limited to the above. .

  (46) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment described above, the shift to the normal figure variation display time table occurs based on the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and the variable display time of the common figure game times is changed accordingly. However, when the open / close execution mode is in effect, a specific normal map variable display time is set. A processing configuration (a processing configuration in which the variable display time is set without referring to the variable display time table) may be used.

  (47) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened, the usual figure change display time is started in a situation where the number of common figure reserved memory FN is the upper limit. Although the variable display time that can be a normal game time longer than the shortest duration of time can be selected, the normal display variable display time that is started in the situation where there are other pending numbers is also in a situation other than in the open / close execution mode As a configuration in which a long variable display time can be selected as compared with the above, a configuration in which the easy winning state can be continued even when the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened may be employed.

  (48) In the second modified example and the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, the total period of the period in which the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened and the interval period is set as the fixed period. However, in the round game in which the upper prize winning opening 710a is opened, the length of the interval period may be set according to the period in which the upper prize winning opening 710a is in the open state. In this case, it is preferable that the interval period becomes longer as the upper prize winning opening 710a is closed earlier, and the interval period is set to such a length that replenishment of holding information on the normal side can be performed in the interval period. Configurations that can be made are preferred.

  (49) In the second modification and the third modification of the fourth embodiment, the interval period is changed in accordance with the length of the round game. The interval period is long enough to be performed, and the length of the interval period may not be changed.

  (50) In the battle production of the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, 10 enemy characters are defeated every time one ball is won at the top prize winning opening 710a. The number of enemy characters may be different. In this case, the number of enemy characters to be defeated based on the previous winnings may be adjusted so that the enemy characters are completely annihilated when the upper limit winning number is won. For example, as a predetermined number of wins, 55 enemies are defeated at the time of the first win (at the time of the first ball), but five enemy characters are defeated as a smaller number at the subsequent wins. Also good.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which sets the number of enemy characters defeated by the remaining time of the winning assistance auxiliary | assistant continuation time at the time of winning to the upper large winning opening 710a. For example, although a lot of enemy characters are defeated when winning in a situation where the remaining time of the winning assistance duration is long, a few enemy characters are defeated when winning in a situation where the remaining time is short Good.

  Alternatively, the number of enemy characters to be defeated may be set based on the remaining time of the winning assistance duration at the time of winning a prize at the upper prize winning opening 710a and the number of winnings in the current round game. For example, if the remaining time of the winning assistance duration is shorter than the product of the remaining number up to the upper prize winning number and the firing cycle, the winning assistance duration will be 0 by the end of the round game, It is good also as a structure which cannot defeat an enemy character even if an enemy character is defeated or awarded.

  (51) In the battle effect of the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, if the remaining time of the winning assistance duration is shorter than the product of the remaining number up to the upper winning number and the firing cycle, the winning assistance A configuration in which the defeat effect is set by setting the number of colored heart marks in the HP display to 0 without waiting for the lapse of the duration time. In this case, for example, the enemy character may be a strong attack whose attack (damage imparting effect) is different from the normal time, and for example, an effect may be provided in which a special technique (jump + biting) is delivered to the main character. .

  (52) In the battle performance of the third modification of the fourth embodiment, after the start of the round game, the winning assistance duration time elapses or the remaining number up to the upper limit winning number until the predetermined period elapses. Even if a situation occurs in which the remaining time of the winning assistance duration is shorter than the product of the launch period and the product of the launch period, the defeat effect may not be generated. This is because if the defeat effect is generated too early after the start of the round, interest in the round game may be lost.

  (53) In the battle production of the third modification of the fourth embodiment, the number of enemy characters at the start is fixed, but the number of enemy characters at the start may be different. For example, the number of enemy characters at the start may be made different according to the length of the winning assistance duration at the start of the round game. Specifically, the configuration may be such that the number of enemy characters at the start is set to be smaller as the winning assistance duration at the start of the round game is longer.

  (54) In the battle effect of the third modification of the fourth embodiment, strength may be set for an enemy character to appear. For example, if the winning assistance duration is short and there is a high possibility that the winning assistance duration will be 0 by the end of the round game, a strong enemy character may appear and be won even if a winning occurs. Good. Conversely, if the winning assistance duration is long and there is a high possibility that the round game will end sooner than the winning assistance duration reaches 0, a weak enemy character will appear and a winning will occur. You may increase the number of enemy characters killed.

  (55) In the battle effect of the third modification of the fourth embodiment, it goes without saying that the main character, enemy character, enemy number display, HP display, etc. are not limited to the above.

  (56) As in the third modification of the fourth embodiment, the winning timing to the through gate 53, the number of holdings on the normal side, the variable display time on the normal side, and the upper variable winning device 710 In the case where a battle effect is performed in relation to the prize winning timing, the winning percentage to the upper variable prize winning device 710 may be changed depending on the launch intensity of the game ball. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, an upper variable winning device in which the game ball is fired to flow down the left route 1 and in which the game ball is fired to flow down the left route 2 The arrangement of the upper variable winning device 710, the through gate 35, and the electric accessory 66 may be set so that the arrival rate to 710 is different. More specifically, in a situation where the upper variable winning device 710 is in an open state, the winning rate to the upper variable winning device 710 when the left route 1 is caused to flow down by launching the game ball with the first firing strength. And the winning rate to the upper variable winning device 710 when the left route 2 is caused to flow down by firing the game ball at a second launch strength different from (or stronger than) the first launch strength. The arrangement (gauge configuration) of the upper variable winning device 710, the nail 69, etc. may be set so as to be different (the winning rate is higher in the left route 1 than in the left route 2). By doing in this way, in order to win in the said battle production, the game nature of adjusting launch intensity so that the winning rate to the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is increased is clarified, and the interest is improved.

  (57) As in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, when the game ball can pass between the through gate 35 and the upper variable winning device 710, the upper variable winning device 710 is A nail 69 or the like may be arranged so that the game ball does not reach the through gate 35 without passing through the provided position. In this case, in the situation where the upper open / close door 710b of the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is in an open state, winning through the through gate 35 without colliding with the upper open / close door 710b is restricted. That is, when the upper open / close door 710b is in an open state, only the game balls that have spilled from the upper open / close door 710b and not the upper large winning opening 710a side can win the through gate 35. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the winning while allowing the winning to the through gate 35 in a state where the upper variable winning device 710 is in the open state, and the easy winning state. Can be made easy to end.

  (58) As in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, even when the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is in an open state, there is still room for winning through the through gate 35. The positional relationship between the variable winning device 710 and the through gate 35, the presence / absence of the guide nail groups 69g and 69h, and the arrangement thereof are not limited to those described above.

  (59) In the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, most of the game balls that have reached the upper variable prize winning device 710 when the upper prize winning opening 710a is in the open state are directed to the upper prize winning opening 710a. Although winning is configured such that a part of the prize spills from the upper opening / closing door 710b and wins the through gate 35, the winning ratio to the upper large winning opening 710a and the through gate 35 is not limited to the above. For example, the configuration may be such that most of the winnings are through the through gate 35 and some of them are winning through the upper large winning opening 710a. Decreasing the winning ratio to the upper large winning opening 710a makes it difficult to end the easy-to-win state and makes it possible to enjoy a round game for a long time. In this case, the number of shot balls until the end of the opening / closing execution mode is increased due to a decrease in the winning ratio to the big winning opening 710a, and the holding ball after the opening / closing execution mode does not decrease the winning ratio of the big winning opening 710a. May be less. However, since the winning easy state is continued by lowering the winning ratio, it is considered that the player feels preferable from that viewpoint. Therefore, there is no inconvenience even if the number of balls actually increased in the opening / closing execution mode is reduced.

  In addition, if the winning ratio to the upper prize winning opening 710a and the through gate 35 is equal or substantially equal, the game ball that has reached the upper variable winning prize apparatus 710 when the upper winning prize winning opening 710a is in an open state. A game for enjoying which one to win is added, and it becomes possible to improve the game performance.

  (60) In the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, when the upper opening / closing door 710b is in an open state, a position for receiving a game ball flowing down from above (the upper opening / closing door 710b in an open state) Or a through-gate that allows the game ball that has reached the upper variable winning device 710 to win the upper prize winning opening 710a depending on the rolling mode of the rolling portion. A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to win a prize 35 is changed. By doing so, it is possible to more enjoy the behavior of the game ball.

  (61) In the fourth modified example of the fourth embodiment, the top prize winning opening 710a and the through prize winning opening 710a are set in the open state depending on the arrival timing of the top prize winning arrangement 710a in the round game. The winning ratio to the gate 35 may be changed. For example, by changing the opening ratio (opening angle, displacement angle, displacement mode) of the upper opening / closing door 710b according to the elapsed time from the start in the round game, the winning rate to the upper prize winning opening 710a is changed, thereby reaching A configuration may be adopted in which the winning ratio between the game ball upper prize winning opening 710a and the through gate 35 is changed. More specifically, for example, the upper prize winning opening 710a is easier to win than the through gate 35 until the predetermined timing after the start of the round game, and after the predetermined timing, the through gate more than the upper prize winning opening 710a. 35 may be configured to make it easier to win, or vice versa.

  (62) As in the fifth modification and the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment, even if the configuration for changing the winning rate to the through gate 35 is not based on the upper variable winning device 710, When the winning rate to the through gate 35 decreases, the winning rate to other winning units (for example, the general winning port 61) may be improved. For example, in the fifth modification, when the movable accessory 820 is displaced from the retracted state to the protruding state and the winning to the through gate 35 is restricted, it becomes easy to win a predetermined general winning opening 61, and the movable accessory The 820 may be configured to be displaced from the protruding state to the retracted state, so that the winning to the through gate 35 is allowed while the winning to the predetermined general winning opening 61 is restricted. Further, for example, in the sixth modified example, the rotating body 800 has an oval shape, and the rotating body 800 is placed in a position where the housing portion 810 of the rotating body 800 faces upward and the game ball is housed. A part is arranged at a position that becomes a barrier to winning the predetermined general winning opening 61, the winning to the predetermined general winning opening 61 is restricted, and the housing portion 810 of the rotating body 800 rotates from a position facing upward. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the rotating body is arranged at a position that does not become a barrier to winning the predetermined general winning opening 61 and the winning to the predetermined general winning opening 61 is allowed. .

  (63) The shape, arrangement, displacement mode, and the like of the movable accessory 820 in the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment are not limited to those described above. For example, the movable accessory 820 is a distribution valve that can be moved to the left and right, and the winning combination to the through gate 35 is restricted by operating in one direction, and the winning in the through gate 35 is allowed by operating in the other direction. It is good also as composition which comes to do.

  (64) In the fifth modification and the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment, the movable accessory 820 and the rotating body 800 operate periodically. However, the period is not limited to the above. . Specifically, it is good also as a structure which operate | moves with a period longer than the launching period of a game ball. In addition, the start timing of the cycle may be, for example, from the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, may be the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode, or may be the start timing of the special figure game times or the ordinary figure game times. .

  (65) In the fourth embodiment, in the case where the upper variable winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, and the like are arranged upstream of the through gate 35, at least a part of the through gate 35 is the upper variable winning device 710. When the upper variable winning device 710 is in an open state by being arranged at a position overlapping with the movable accessory 820 or the like, or when the movable accessory 820 is displaced to the protruding position, the winning rate to the through gate 35 is increased. It may be configured to be lowered, and may be configured such that a part of the through gate 35 does not overlap the upper variable winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, and the like vertically.

  Even if the through gate 35 does not overlap the upper variable winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, etc., the upper variable winning device 710 is opened or the movable accessory 820 is displaced to the protruding position. By doing so, any structure may be used as long as a barrier to flow down to the through gate 35 is generated. For example, when the upper variable winning device 710 is a so-called electric tulip type accessory in which a wing member that can be displaced in the lateral direction is opened and closed, the wing member is displaced in the lateral direction and a prize is awarded to the upper prize winning opening 710a. When the wing member displaced in the lateral direction and the through gate 35 overlap vertically while the wing member is displaced in the opposite direction and the winning to the upper prize winning opening 710a is restricted in an easy situation. The wing member and the through gate 35 may not overlap each other.

  (66) In the fourth embodiment, the upper variable winning device 710, the movable accessory 820, etc. are arranged upstream of the through gate 35, and the upper variable winning device 710 is opened or movable. Although the winning rate to the through gate 35 is reduced when the accessory 820 is displaced to the projecting position, the movable accessory 820 is displaced to the projecting position when the upper variable winning device 710 is opened. Therefore, the winning relationship to the through gate 35 may be reduced, and the positional relationship between the through gate 35 and the upper variable winning device 710 and the movable accessory 820 is not limited to the above. For example, an accessory that operates in conjunction with the opening / closing operation of the upper opening / closing door 710b of the upper variable winning device 710 or the front / rear operation of the movable accessory 820 is provided, and the movable accessory 820 is moved when the upper opening / closing door 710b is displaced to the open state. It is good also as a structure which operate | moves so that the said accessory may become a barrier of winning a prize to the through gate 35, when moving to a protrusion position. In this case, the upper variable winning device 710 and the movable accessory 820 may not be arranged on the upstream side of the through gate 35.

  (67) In the fourth embodiment described above, the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is in the open state, so that the winning rate to the through gate 35 is reduced. However, the upper variable prize-winning device 710 is in the open state. Thus, the winning rate to the through gate 35 may be improved, and the upper variable winning device 710 may be closed to reduce the winning rate to the through gate 35. In this case, it is possible to realize a new gameability such that it is possible to shift to the winning easy state by executing the round game by the upper variable winning device 710.

  (68) In the fifth embodiment, the position of the second through gate 850 is not limited to the downstream side of the through gate 35 or the electric accessory 66, or above the through gate 35, and is in another position. Also good. For example, you may arrange | position in the position (right side of the variable display unit 67) where the game ball which flows down the right route can win.

  (69) In the fifth embodiment, a plurality of second through gates 850 are provided, and execution of a general game is executed while a general game based on a winning for one second through gate 850 is being executed. The second through gates 850 may be arranged so that a game ball different from the game ball that has become an opportunity can win the other second through gates 850. In this way, depending on the behavior of the game ball flowing down, a winning to one second through gate 850 and a winning to another second through gate 850 may occur continuously. It becomes possible to increase the usual number of reserved memory FN. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of winning a prize at the second operating port 63 and the chances of shifting to the easy winning state.

  (70) In the fifth embodiment, the second through gate 850 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 always passes or a position at which most of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 pass. It is good also as a structure. By doing in this way, the opportunity that the usual figure reservation memory | storage number FN will become 1 or more increases, and it becomes possible to make it easy to generate | occur | produce the prize to the 2nd operation port 63, and the transfer to a prize winning state.

  (71) In the fifth embodiment, in the case where a through gate capable of continuous winning is provided, an interval between a plurality of through gates may be an interval at which a game ball flows down in a longer time than a normal game cycle. Good. In this case, in the interval between the plurality of through gates, the time required for the flow down can be changed by the nail 69 or the like, and when the game ball flows down in a longer time than the normal game cycle, Alternatively, the game ball may flow down in a short time.

  (72) In the fifth embodiment, the second through gate 850 may be provided between the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 66.

  (73) In the first modified example of the fifth embodiment, the distribution is divided into the first route R1 from which one map hold information is acquired and the second route R2 from which two map hold information is acquired. Although it was set as the structure distributed by the valve 867, the number of the usual map hold information acquired by distributing to each route is not limited to these. For example, the route may be divided into a route from which one map hold information is acquired and a route from which three or more map hold information is acquired. Any configuration that can be different is acceptable.

  (74) In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the distribution valve 867 distributes the route to two routes. However, the route may be distributed to more routes. For example, in addition to a route from which one common map hold information is acquired and a route from which two general map hold information is acquired, the route may be distributed to three routes from which common map hold information is acquired. . In addition, in the case of a configuration that distributes to three or more routes, the configuration may be such that the number of general-purpose hold information acquired in each route is different, or the same number of general-purpose hold information is acquired in each route There may be a configuration in which a route is provided.

  (75) In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the distribution ratio between the first route R1 and the second route R2 is not limited to the above. The second route R2 may be more easily distributed than the first route R1.

  (76) As in the first modification of the fifth embodiment, in the configuration in which the number of general-purpose hold information acquired differs depending on the distribution of the distribution valve 867, the distribution valve 867 Although the distribution mode (operation mode) is periodic, the distribution mode (operation mode) is changed depending on the gaming state (game situation) instead of or in addition to the configuration in which this periodic operation is always performed. It is good also as a structure. That is, the first gaming state in which the distribution control of the distribution valve 867 is performed so that the distribution rate to the first route R1 (second route R2) becomes the first rate, and the first route R1 (second route R2). ) Has a second gaming state in which the sorting control of the sorting valve 867 is performed so that the second rate is different from the first rate, and the first game is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. This is a configuration for performing transition between the state and the second gaming state. Specifically, as the first gaming state, for example, in the normal gaming state, the distribution control of the distribution valve 867 is executed so that the distribution to the first route R1 is easier than the second route R2, and the second game is performed. As a state, for example, in the opening / closing execution mode, the distribution control of the distribution valve 867 may be executed so as to be more easily distributed to the second route R2 than to the first route R1.

  (77) In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, there is provided an electric accessory 870 that can win both a game ball flowing down the first route R1 and a game ball flowing down the second route R2. However, a configuration may be adopted in which an electric accessory is individually provided for each of the routes R1 and R2.

  In addition, one route is provided with an electric accessory, but the other route is not provided with an electric accessory, that is, a game ball that has flowed down one route can enter and flow down the other route. The game ball may be configured to be provided with an electric accessory that cannot enter the game ball. In this case, it is preferable that the electric combination is provided so that game balls that have flowed down the route that is easily distributed (first route R1 in the above embodiment) can enter.

  (78) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the position where the rolling portion 880 is provided may be, for example, a location adjacent to the display screen 75a. It is considered that the player usually enjoys the whereabouts of the game by the display effect on the display screen 75a, and the configuration can be made so that the rolling surface 881 in the rolling unit 880 can be confirmed without moving such a player's line of sight. By doing so, it is possible to fully enjoy the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 881 together with the display effect. As locations adjacent to the display screen 75a, for example, if the display screen 75a is located below, to the right, or to the left, lead-out paths 891 to 893 through which game balls falling from the drop openings 882 to 884 of the rolling surface 881 pass are arranged. In view of this, the display screen 75a is preferable because it does not serve as a barrier to the arrangement.

  (79) Also in the second modification of the fifth embodiment, as in the other modifications, the number of through gates provided in each of the derivation passages 891 to 893 (the number of acquisitions of the reserved figure storage number FN) is It is not limited to the above. Further, the number of the outlet passages 891 to 893, the ratio of which outlet passages 891 to 893 are led out, and the like are not limited to the above, as in the other modified examples.

  (80) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 66 may be provided at a position led out from the lead-out passages 891 to 893. In this case, the electric accessory 66 may be provided in each of the outlet passages 891 to 893, or a game ball led out from any of the outlet passages 891 to 893 as in the first modified example can be entered. It is good also as a structure which provides one electric accessory.

  (81) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the rolling unit 880 is derived from the passing area through which the game ball flowing down the left route passes. It is not limited to the left route and may be another position. Further, it is possible that a game ball flowing down the game area PE can reach the rolling unit 880 without passing through the passing area.

  (82) In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the rolling part 880 for leading the game ball to the lead-out passages 891 to 893 is not limited to the above. For example, the rolling surface 881 may be a movable configuration instead of a fixed one, and may be configured to change the behavior of the game ball by moving left and right or back and forth like a wave. Moreover, it is not the structure which can fall to all the drop openings 882-884 from the same rolling surface 881, but arrange | positions each rolling surface so that a level | step difference may arise as a structure which has several rolling surfaces, and these several It is good also as a structure which each provides the drop port 882-884 in the rolling surface. More specifically, for example, a first drop port 882 is provided on the first rolling surface, a second drop port 883 is provided on the second rolling surface, and a third drop port 884 is provided on the third rolling surface. And a step is provided on the first to third rolling surfaces so that the game ball can fall down such as the first rolling surface → the second rolling surface → the third rolling surface. . Then, in the first rolling surface, for example, it is enjoyed whether it falls from the first dropping port 882 or the second rolling surface, and the second rolling surface falls from the second dropping port 883. Alternatively, it may be configured such that routes having different numbers of acquisitions of reserved information on the normal map side are distributed in multiple stages, such as making it enjoyable or falling on the third rolling surface. The same applies to other modified examples.

  (83) In the third modified example and the fourth modified example of the fifth embodiment, the number (three pieces) in which the general-purpose reserved memory number FN becomes the upper limit number minus one (the number smaller than the number of continuous throughs). ) Is easily maintained, and one reserved information is likely to be vacant, and the ordinary reserved memory number FN is easily maintained below the upper limit number minus 2 (the number of consecutive throughs) (two) or less. In this situation, the variable display time table is set so that two or more pieces of hold information are likely to be vacant, but the number of pieces of hold information acquired by continuous through winnings is different in each state. It is sufficient that the number of vacant information in each state is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of continuous through gates is set to 3 instead of 2, the usual figure reserved storage number FN is easily maintained at 3 which is the upper limit number minus 1, and the upper limit number minus 2 is 2 The common variable display time table may be set so that there are a state that can be easily maintained and a state in which the upper limit number minus 3 is easily maintained at 1 or less. In this case, it is possible to create a state in which one piece of ordinary map hold information is easily acquired, a state in which two pieces of information are easily acquired, and a state in which three pieces are easily acquired.

  (84) In the third and fourth modifications of the fifth embodiment, the relationship between the digestion speed of the hold information and the replenishment speed of the hold information is adjusted using the length of the set variable display time. However, the number of vacant numbers in the general-purpose reserved storage number FN is adjusted. However, the relationship between the digestion speed of the reserved information and the replenishment speed of the reserved information is adjusted by other parameters to adjust the free space in the general-purpose reserved memory number FN. It is good also as a structure which adjusts a number. As other parameters, for example, when the lottery in the ordinary game is an opening result, the time during which the electric accessory 66 is kept open (support time) or the stop display time as in the fourth modification example The structure which changes a digestion rate may be sufficient. Further, like the distribution valve 867 of the first modification in the fifth embodiment, the replenishment speed of the hold information is changed by adjusting the winning frequency to the through gates 858, 859, etc. Also good.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which adjusts the free number of the usual figure memory | storage number FN by changing the upper limit number which can hold | maintain pending | holding information with a game state. For example, a state in which the upper limit number of hold information that can be stored is 1 and a state in which 2 is set, and a state in which one piece of hold information is easily obtained and a case in which two pieces of hold information are easily obtained at the time of continuous through winning. It is good also as a structure which sets.

  (85) In the third modification and the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment, a state (second state) in which the holding information is easily obtained by the number of continuous through gates is obtained. Fluctuation display time in which the speed is faster than the replenishment speed, and a slightly longer fluctuation display time (in the third modification, a fluctuation display time in which the replenishment speed is faster than the digestion speed of the ordinary game) However, it may be configured to be realized only by the variable display time in which the digestion speed is faster than the replenishment speed. In this case, the vacant reserved number FN is likely to be larger than the number of through gates. Specifically, the reserved number FN is likely to be less than two. In this way, the configuration of the variable display time table can be simplified. However, if it does in this way, in the 3rd modification, since it becomes difficult to maintain a prize easy state, the above combination is preferred.

  (86) In the third modification of the fifth embodiment, the special display side variable display time based on winning in the second operating port 63 may be changed between the first state and the second state. . Specifically, the second state in which the winning to the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur when the winning state is easy is more on the side of the special figure side based on the winning to the second operating port 63 than the first state. Reduce the fluctuation display time. By doing in this way, the digest speed of the reserved information on the special figure side based on the winning to the second operating port 63 can be increased, and the benefit that the winning frequency to the second operating port 63 is increased can be fully utilized. It can be enjoyed.

  (87) In the third modified example of the fifth embodiment, a determination may be made that the lottery on the second special drawing side is performed based on winning in the second operating port 63. That is, it is good also as a structure which will be in the advantageous state which is easy to become a special winning result by becoming a winning easy state. In this case, since the winning ratio to the second operating port 63 when the first state and the second state are in the easy winning state is different, the winning state is easy in the first state and the second state. It is possible to change the frequency of the special hit result in the case of a failure. That is, it is possible to create a plurality of gaming states having different execution frequencies in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special hit result.

  (88) In the fourth modified example of the fifth embodiment, a configuration that is advantageous to the player by maintaining the state where the number of reserved drawings FN is greater than or equal to a predetermined number may be adopted. The predetermined number is 3 in the first state in which only one general hold information is easily acquired by one consecutive through winning, and 2 in the second state in which two common map hold information is easily acquired. There should be. In particular, by presenting the player with the merit of maintaining the usual figure reserved memory number FN in three in the first state, the firing state of the game ball is adjusted in the first state, and the figure reserved memory number FN is 2 It is possible to maintain the situation of being less than or equal to the number of pieces and to suppress the act of acquiring two pieces of general-purpose hold information even in the first state.

  As a merit of maintaining the number of reserved figure FN in the first state in the first state, for example, in the case where the number of reserved figure FN in the first state is 3 or more, the case where the release result is obtained, A configuration in which the substantial V winning rate is increased by increasing the opening time of the third variable winning device 910, for example, as compared to the case where the opening result is obtained when the number is two or less is conceivable.

  (89) In the fourth modified example of the fifth embodiment, the third variable winning device 910 is opened when winning in the winning lottery for ordinary use, and the third variable winning device 910 is opened. Although the 16-round opening / closing execution mode is executed by the fourth variable prize-winning device 900 by the V winning of the first time, as in the case of other embodiments etc., when winning in the usual lottery lottery, It is good also as a structure which can acquire holding information on the 2 special figure side. In addition, when winning in the usual lottery winning / notifying lottery, winning in the third variable winning device 910 is allowed, but no V winning is generated, and a winning ball based on winning in the third variable winning device 910 It is good also as the game nature which gives.

  (90) In the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment, it goes without saying that the probability of winning a V when the third variable winning device 910 is in an open state is not limited to the above. The calculation of the probability of V winning may be calculated as a ratio of the number of times V winning occurs with respect to the number of times the third variable winning device 910 is opened, or the third variable winning device 910. It is good also as a structure which calculates as a ratio of the length of time of the situation where the V prize can generate | occur | produce with respect to the length of time for which is open | released, and the ratio of the number of V prizes with respect to the number of winnings to the 3rd variable prize-winning apparatus 910 It is good also as a structure calculated as.

  (91) In the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment, the third variable prize-winning device 910 is set to the open state when the open result is obtained in the normal drawing side lottery. As in the case of the embodiment etc., if the result of opening or closing the lottery on the normal map side is the result of the opening, the special drawing side is allowed to win the special drawing side operating port, and the special drawing side based on the winning of the special drawing side operating port It is good also as a structure which makes the 3rd variable prize-winning apparatus 910 open | released when it wins by the winning / losing lottery.

  (92) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that a winning easy state is achieved by increasing the number-of-pending-storing memory number FN. However, other information (for example, the open random number counter C4 and the number of It is also possible to adopt a configuration that makes it easy to win a prize according to the lottery information of the figure variation type counter C5, the acquisition timing of the lottery information, and the like. In addition to the second normal gaming state (easy winning state) in each of the above embodiments, the so-called high-frequency support mode and electric Chu mode are shifted not by the special drawing side lottery system but by the standard drawing side lottery system. It is good also as a structure.

  (93) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or games in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Furthermore, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of the reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to game machines in which and are fused.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  The invention described in each of the following feature groups is as follows: “As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball is provided that can enter a game ball. Regarding the background technology that “a lottery process is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175)”, the invention “there is still room for improvement in improving interest” is to be solved. It was made with a problem.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Launching means capable of launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 110);
The entrance part (through gate 35) in which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (common figure variation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit (function for executing a lottery for lottery by main controller 162);
Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for through by the main control device 162);
First game execution means (function to execute the general figure game times control process by the main controller 162) for executing the first game (general figure game times) based on the fact that the lottery process is performed by the lottery means;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined result, a second game (transition to the support state of the electric accessory 66) different from the first game is executed after the first game is executed. Game execution means (function to execute the general game state transition process by the main controller 162);
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry part during execution of the first game or the second game, a hold storage means for storing lottery information corresponding to that ball (electric service reservation area) 643),
With
In a predetermined case (when the game is in the first normal game state), a first period from when a game ball enters the ball-entry part to when the second game corresponding to the ball is terminated (general game) (Period) is configured to be shorter than the second period corresponding to the launching period of the game ball in the launching means.

  In the above-described configuration, the lottery process and the first game are executed based on the game ball entering the entrance part, and if the result of the lottery process is a predetermined result, the second game is executed after the first game is executed. Is done. Under such a configuration, in a predetermined case, a first period from when a game ball enters the entrance part to when the second game corresponding to the entrance is completed corresponds to the launch period of the game ball. The configuration is shorter than the second period. In this case, since the second game is completed earlier than the next ball entering the ball-entry part, the reserved memory where the first game has not yet started is not added (or is difficult to add). As a result, in a situation where there is no reserved memory, it is possible to easily maintain a state where there is no reserved memory while repeating a series of games from entering the ball entering section to the second game.

  Further, in the above configuration, the second game is finished earlier than the next entry to the entry part is generated, so that the next entry is awaited in executing the next first game. A waiting period occurs. As a result, the start timing of the first game and then the second game depends on the timing of entering the entrance section. Such a relationship can be established in the same manner for any entry to the entry part while the state without the holding memory is maintained, and the start timing of the second game is always set to the entry part. It becomes possible to make it correspond to the entrance timing. On the other hand, if the hold memory occurs, the second game is started without waiting for the next entry to the entry part, so that the second game is executed regardless of the entry timing. Become. In this case, for example, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the case where the second game is started depending on the timing of entering the entering part and the case where the second game is started regardless of the entering timing. If it becomes the structure which arises, it will become possible to transfer to the advantageous gaming state according to a holding | maintenance situation. Thereby, even if it does not become special game results, such as jackpot, the opportunity to transfer to an advantageous game state can be provided, and interest property improves.

  In addition, in the “second period corresponding to the launch period of the game balls”, in addition to the launch period of the game balls, for example, the launch period such as the enter period of the game balls (entrance interval) to the entrance part is included. It can be understood that a period having dependency or relevance is included.

  Feature A2. Provided with a means (a function for changing the normal variable display time to 10 sec) to make the first period longer than the second period (10.5 sec) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, characterized in that.

  According to the above configuration, even in a game where the reserved memory does not occur (or does not occur) in a situation where there is no reserved memory, the opportunity to generate the reserved memory or increase the number of reserved memories is appropriate. Can be secured. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no reserved memory and to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  Feature A3. Means for setting the first period to be longer than the second period (1.1 sec) when the number of reserved memories in the hold storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (4). 6) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

  According to the above configuration, when the number of reserved memories becomes a predetermined number or more, it is possible to stably maintain such a state thereafter. Thereby, it is suppressed that the case where a 2nd game is started depending on the entrance timing to a entrance part and the case where a 2nd game is started irrespective of an entrance timing are switched frequently. . As a result, it becomes possible for the player to calm down and advance the game, or to proceed with the game with peace of mind, and to easily play the game.

Feature A4. The entrance part is provided as a first entrance part,
A second ball entry portion (second operation port 63) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first ball entry portion;
A first state (open state) in which the game ball can be received or easily accepted in the second entrance part, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be received in the entrance part or is less likely to be received than the first state. And variable receiving means (electrical accessory 66) that can be switched to,
As the second game execution means, variable acceptance control is performed in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and thereafter the second state is set. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, comprising variable acceptance control means for performing (a function for executing a general game state transition process by the main controller 162).

  According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control is performed as the second game, the switching timing of the variable acceptance means to the first state and the return from the first state to the second state according to the holding status of the holding storage means. Timing can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to change the ease of entering the game ball into the variable receiving means based on the change in the holding status. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity for a player who does not have a special game result to play in an easy-to-enter state, and to improve ease of play and familiarity.

Feature A5. The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) capable of receiving a game ball in a specific area (specific area RA2) when the second state is switched to the first state, and the receiving area Is configured to receive the game ball received in the entrance part,
When the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means is a predetermined number or more (1 or more), the length of the execution interval of the variable acceptance control and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area are different. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein:

  According to the above-described configuration, the mutual length between the execution interval of the variable acceptance control when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area (area where the acceptance area is formed) is Due to the difference, the first state of the variable accepting means is obtained by repeating a series of games from entering the entrance to the second game (variable acceptance control) while the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. The time difference (phase difference) between the switching timing to (or the return timing from the first state to the second state) and the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific area can be changed. This makes it possible to change the ease of entering the game ball into the second ball-in part when the number of stored memory becomes a predetermined number or more, and a game in which the number of stored memory and the easy-to-enter state are linked. It becomes possible to realize the sex.

  In the feature A5, “variable acceptance control execution interval” is “execution interval that is a period from execution of the previous variable acceptance control to execution of the subsequent variable acceptance control”, “one said variable acceptance control”. It may be read as “execution interval that is a period from when the acceptance control is executed until the next variable acceptance control is executed”. Further, in the feature A5, “the arrival interval of the game balls to the specific area” is “the arrival interval that is a period from when the preceding game ball reaches the specific area until the subsequent game ball reaches the specific area”. Alternatively, it may be read as “arrival interval that is a period from when one game ball reaches the specific area until the next game ball reaches the specific area”.

  Feature A6. One length of the execution interval and the arrival interval is a non-integer multiple of the other length of the execution interval and the arrival interval, The gaming machine according to Feature A5

  According to the above configuration, since the execution interval of the variable acceptance control and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area are asynchronous, the time difference can be changed reliably, and the game to the second entrance portion It becomes possible to appropriately change the ease of entering the ball.

  Feature A7. In the variable acceptance control, the length of the period during which the variable acceptance means is in the first state (the opening time of the electric accessory 66) is the difference between the execution interval and the arrival interval (one time difference A and B). The gaming machine according to Feature A5 or A6, wherein the gaming machine has a length equal to or longer than a change width per hit.

  According to the above-described configuration, the difference between the execution interval of the variable acceptance control and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area becomes a change width of one time in the process of cumulatively changing the time difference. Since the length of the period in which the means is in the first state is longer than the change width, the arrival timing of the game ball to the specific region changes across the period in which the first state is set. Is suppressed. As a result, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is possible to appropriately secure an opportunity for a game ball to enter the second pitching portion.

  Feature A8. Means for fixing the execution interval of the variable acceptance control when the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (1 or more). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A5 to A7, which is provided with a function of fixing to 6 sec and fixing the opening period of the electric accessory 66 to 0.1 sec).

  For example, when the number of pending storages is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and the variable reception control execution interval is diversified, the time difference changes irregularly as the series of games is repeated. In this case, it becomes difficult to grasp the entrance rate to the second entrance part (acceptance rate by the variable receiving means) at the design stage, which not only increases the design burden, but also increases the entrance rate unexpectedly during the game. There are concerns about inconvenience such as. In this respect, according to this configuration, the execution interval of the variable acceptance control can be stabilized, so that the time difference can be regularly changed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the entrance rate to the second entrance part, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature A9. The specific game ball that has entered the first entrance part is configured to be able to reach the specific area,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, wherein the arrival interval is an arrival interval of the specific game ball to the specific area.

  According to the above configuration, while the state of the variable receiving means is switched based on the lottery result based on the entrance to the first entrance part, the game ball that entered the first entrance part is the second entrance It becomes game nature to enjoy whether or not to enter the club, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the flow from entering the first entrance section to entering the second entrance section as a series of games. Not only that, it is enough to pay attention to the game ball that entered the first entry part, so the point of interest can be clarified and the player's attention can be prevented from being distracted. It becomes possible to facilitate understanding of game play.

  Note that the feature A9 “a specific game ball that has entered the first ball entrance portion is configured to be able to reach the specific area” is “the first ball entrance portion as a passage portion through which the game ball can pass”. And the specific game ball that has passed through the passage part is configured to be able to reach the specific area.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, further comprising means (gaming nails 69a to 69d) for guiding the specific game ball to the specific area.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball that has entered the entrance portion can be made to stably reach the specific area, and the player can easily play with peace of mind. In addition, it is possible to stabilize the arrival interval of the game balls to the specific area, and to make it easier to grasp the entrance rate to the second entrance part at the design stage.

  Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, further comprising means (game nails 69a to 69d) for preventing a game ball different from the specific game ball from reaching the specific area.

  According to the above configuration, a game ball different from the specific game ball is prevented from entering the arrival route to the specific area. This prevents other game balls from colliding with the specific game ball to prevent the game from reaching the specific area, or prevents a game ball other than the specific game ball from entering the second entrance part. It is possible to improve the sense of security of the person and the stability of the arrival interval. In addition, the necessity of considering the entrance of game balls other than the specific game ball into the second entrance part at the design stage is alleviated, and the design load can be reduced.

Feature A12. The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) capable of receiving a game ball in a specific area (specific area RA2) when the second state is switched to the first state, and the receiving area Is configured to receive the game ball received in the second entrance part,
The specific game ball that has entered the first entrance part is configured to be able to reach the specific area, and the specific game ball reaches the specific area after completion of the variable acceptance control corresponding to the entrance. As described above, the game machine according to any one of features A4 to A11, wherein a required period until the specific game ball reaches the specific area is set.

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where there is no reserve memory, a game ball cannot be entered (or difficult to enter) in the second entrance part, while the on-hold memory is generated in the second entrance part. The game ball can be changed to a state where it can be entered (or easy to enter). That is, it is possible to achieve a gameability that shifts to the easy-to-enter state due to the on-hold storage. This not only provides an opportunity to play in an easy-to-enter state for players who have not had a special game result, but can also increase their willingness to generate a hold memory, It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A13. The first game executing means starts a game turning operation by a predetermined notifying means (a display unit for an accessory 44), and ends the game turning operation as a notice result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means. Equipped with a turn control means (function to execute a general game play control process by the main controller 162),
In the case where the first period is shorter than the second period, the variable reception means in the variable reception control is more than the first period of the game rotation operation period (usually variable display time) in the game time control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A12, characterized in that the period (the opening time of the electric accessory 66) in which the state is set to 1 is increased.

  According to the above configuration, since the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is longer than the period of the game turning operation, the first period is shorter than the second period and is used for the first and second games. Even when the possible period is limited, the state in which the variable receiving means is in the first state can be conspicuous. Thereby, it is possible to easily give the player an impression that it is easy to enter the second entrance part, and it is possible to appropriately arouse game motivation.

Feature A14. The first game executing means starts a game turning operation by a predetermined notifying means (a display unit for an accessory 44), and ends the game turning operation as a notice result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means. Equipped with a turn control means (function to execute a general game play control process by the main controller 162),
In the case where the first period is shorter than the second period, the game times control means is longer than the period during which the variable acceptance means is in the first state (opening time of the electric accessory 66) in the variable acceptance control. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A13, wherein the notification period of the notification result in is configured to be long.

  Although it can be grasped in a relatively short time that the variable receiving means is moving, it is assumed that a certain period is required for recognizing the notification content. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification period of the notification result is longer than the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, the first period is shorter than the second period and is used for the first and second games. Even when the possible period is limited, it is possible to facilitate the recognition of the notification result and suppress the confusion of the player.

Feature A15. Launching means capable of launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 110);
The entrance part (through gate 35) in which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (common figure variation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit (function for executing a lottery for lottery by main controller 162);
Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for through by the main control device 162);
First game execution means (function to execute the general figure game times control process by the main controller 162) for executing the first game (general figure game times) based on the fact that the lottery process is performed by the lottery means;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined result, a second game (transition to the support state of the electric accessory 66) different from the first game is executed after the first game is executed. Game execution means (function to execute the general game state transition process by the main controller 162);
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry part during execution of the first game or the second game, a hold storage means for storing lottery information corresponding to that ball (electric service reservation area) 643),
With
In a predetermined case, a first period (a general game period) from when a game ball enters the entrance to the end of the second game corresponding to the entrance is a A gaming machine configured to be shorter than a second period corresponding to a pitching interval of game balls.

  According to the said structure, the effect similar to the said characteristic A1 is anticipated. Note that the “interval of the game balls entering the entrance part” of the feature A15 is “the period from the preceding game ball entering the entrance part to the subsequent game ball entering the entrance part”. It may be read as “a certain pitch interval”. In addition, each configuration described in any of the features A2 to A14 may be applied to the feature A15.

Feature A16. Launching means capable of launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 110);
The entrance part (through gate 35) in which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (common figure variation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit (function for executing a lottery for lottery by main controller 162);
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game (transition to the support state of the general game game and the electric accessory 66) based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means (general game game control by the main controller 162) Processing and a function to execute ordinary game state transition processing),
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part during execution of the specific game, a storage unit for storing lottery information corresponding to the entrance (electric service reservation area 643);
With
In a predetermined case, a specific period (ordinary game period) from when a game ball enters the entrance part to the end of the specific game corresponding to the entrance is a predetermined period (game ball firing cycle) A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be shorter.

  According to the above configuration, since the specific period from when the game ball enters the entrance part to the end of the specific game corresponding to the entrance is configured to be shorter than the predetermined period, The specific game is finished earlier than the next entry to the club occurs. As a result, it becomes a state where the reserved memory where the specific game has not yet started is not added (or difficult to be added), and if there is no reserved memory, a series of games from entering the pitching club to the specific game It is possible to maintain a state in which there is no pending storage while repeating.

  Further, in the above configuration, the specific game is finished earlier than the next entry to the entry unit is generated, so that the standby for waiting for the next entry to occur is executed when the next specific game is executed. A period occurs. As a result, the start timing of the specific game depends on the entrance timing to the entrance portion. Such a relationship can be established in the same way for any entry to the entry part while the state without the holding memory is maintained, and the start timing of the specific game is always entered into the entry part. It becomes possible to associate with the sphere timing. On the other hand, when the on-hold storage occurs, the specific game is started without waiting for the next ball entry to the ball entry unit, and thus the specific game is executed regardless of the ball entry timing. In this case, for example, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the case where the specific game is started depending on the timing of entering the pitching portion and the case where the specific game is started regardless of the timing of entering the ball. Then, it becomes possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state according to the holding situation. Thereby, even if it does not become special game results, such as jackpot, the opportunity to transfer to an advantageous game state can be provided, and interest property improves.

  Note that the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, the features H1 to H10, and the features for each configuration of the features A1 to A16. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. The entrance part (through gate 35) in which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information (common figure variation type counter C5) based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit (function for executing a lottery for lottery by main controller 162);
Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for executing a lottery for determining whether or not the main control device 162 is executed);
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game (transition to the general game game time and the support state of the electric accessory 66) according to the lottery result of the lottery means (a general game game time control process by the main controller 162 and a general game) A function for executing the game state transition process), and
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part during execution of the specific game, a storage unit for storing lottery information corresponding to the entrance (electric service reservation area 643);
With
A first gaming state (first normal gaming state, low frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (second normal gaming state, medium frequency support mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low as the gaming state. Have
Based on the fact that the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (1 or more), the second gaming state is advantageous to the player from the first gaming state to the first gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for making it (a function to enter the second normal gaming state or the medium frequency support mode when the usual figure storage number FN is 1 or more).

  According to the above configuration, when the number of reserved memories is increased, it is possible not only to secure the number of lotteries corresponding to the increased amount but also to provide an advantage of changing to an advantageous second gaming state. As a result, the fun of increasing the number of reserved memories is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably arouse the desire to enter the entrance part. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity to play in an advantageous second game state even if a special game result such as jackpot is not obtained. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being concentrated only on the special game result and to provide various ways of enjoying.

  Note that in feature B1, “the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means... Means for entering the second gaming state” is “the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means is a predetermined number or more (1 or more). Based on the above, a transition means for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (when the number of reserved memory FN is 1 or more) 2) “the function of shifting to the normal gaming state or the medium frequency support mode)”.

Feature B2. The first entrance part includes the entrance part,
A second ball entry portion (second operation port 63) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first ball entry portion;
Privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit (the function of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode for the second operation port 63 by the main control device 162, the payout control device A prize ball function based on winning in the second operating port 63 by 181),
With
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the second gaming state has a lower difficulty of entering the second entering part than the first gaming state.

  According to the said structure, it will become easy to enter a game ball into a 2nd entrance part by becoming a 2nd game state, and it will become easy to obtain the privilege based on the said entrance. Thereby, when the number of reserved memories is increased, it is possible to provide not only the number of lotteries corresponding to the increased amount but also the advantage that the privilege can be easily obtained.

Feature B3. A second lottery means (a function for executing a special figure determination lottery by the main controller 162) for executing a lottery process based on a game ball entering the second pitching unit;
Special game execution means for executing a special game (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery processing by the second lottery means being a specific result (execution of game state transition processing by the main controller 162) The gaming machine according to Feature B2, further comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the special game is easily executed by entering the second game state. Thereby, when the number of reserved memories is increased, it is possible not only to secure the number of lotteries corresponding to the increased amount, but also to provide an advantage that special games are easily executed.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

  For example, if the number of reserved memory that is the trigger for the second gaming state is 1, the second gaming state is immediately entered when the reserved memory is generated due to an event that could not be assumed at the design stage, and is used for operation at the game hall. May cause trouble. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the predetermined number is set to a number of 2 or more, so that a margin can be secured, and it is possible to suppress the second gaming state due to an unexpected hold occurrence. Become.

  Feature B5. Means for continuing the second gaming state on condition that the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number when the second gaming state is reached (the second normal as long as the usual reserved memory number FN is 1 or more) The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, further comprising a function of continuing a gaming state or a medium frequency support state.

  According to the above configuration, the second gaming state is continued as long as the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Therefore, after entering the second gaming state, the willingness to maintain the number of reserved memories can be strongly urged. it can. As a result, the player's interest in whether or not a game ball enters the pitching portion is increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature B6. Switchable between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first state. A variable pitching portion (variable winning device 65);
Switching means for switching the variable pitching portion from the second state to the first state based on the fact that a predetermined condition (big win winning) is established (function to execute a game state transition process by the main control device 162) )When,
Privilege granting means (awarding ball function based on winning to the variable winning device 65 by the payout control device 181) for giving a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching unit;
With
When a game ball enters the variable entry portion, entry into the entry portion is avoided, or when the variable entry portion is switched to the first state, a game ball enters the entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5, wherein the ball is prevented from entering.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the variable entry portion, avoidance of entering the entry portion, or when the variable entry portion is switched to the first state, a game to enter the entry portion. Since the entry of the sphere is inhibited, the number of reserved memories can be reduced by switching the variable entry portion to the first state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the second gaming state can be ended, and the state can be prevented from lasting. At that time, since the second gaming state ends in exchange for granting a privilege based on entering the variable pitching portion, it is easier to obtain the player's understanding than when the second gaming state only ends. It becomes possible to reduce dissatisfaction and discouragement of the player.

  In addition, when the feature B6 is applied to the feature B2, “a privilege corresponding to the entry to the variable entry portion is more advantageous to the player than a privilege corresponding to the entry to the second entry portion. May be added. As a result, when the variable pitching portion is switched to the first state, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the variable pitching portion than to enter the pitching portion. It becomes possible to prompt the ball appropriately.

  Further, in the case of applying the feature B6 to the feature B3, after deleting the configuration of the “special game execution means” of the feature B3, the configuration relating to the switching means of the feature B6 is changed to “result of lottery processing of the second lottery means”. May be switched from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the result is a specific result. The second gaming state is a state in which entry into the second entering part is facilitated, and the end timing of the second gaming state is triggered according to the result of the lottery process based on entering the second entering part. By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult to play while avoiding the end of the second gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to reliably end the second gaming state.

Feature B7. As the switching means, the variable entry control is performed at least once to change the variable entry portion from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and then to change to the second state. Special game execution means for executing a game (open / close execution mode) (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 162),
When the special game is executed by the special game execution means, the specific game execution means sets the execution period of the specific game to be longer than the execution period of the special game based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, comprising means for lengthening (a function for setting the normal map display time to 200 sec).

  In the above configuration, when the execution of the special game triggers the end of the second game state, the execution period of the specific game is set longer than the execution period of the special game when the specific condition is satisfied. In this case, a decrease in the number of reserved memories during execution of the special game is suppressed, and the number of reserved memories can be maintained across the special games. As a result, when the predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the special game is established under the second game state, it is possible to continue the transition to the second game state even after the end of the special game, and to continue the second game state. It becomes possible.

Feature B8. As the special game, it is configured to be able to execute a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed by the special game execution means, the specific game execution means sets the execution period of the specific game based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature B7, further comprising means for making the time longer (a function for setting the normal map change display time to 200 sec).

  In the above configuration, the second gaming state can be continued when the former is executed while there are the disadvantaged first special game and the advantageous second special game. Thereby, the continuous execution of the second game state can be utilized as a rescue means when the first special game on the disadvantageous side is executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest.

Feature B9. The first entrance part includes the entrance part,
A second ball entry portion (second operation port 63) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first ball entry portion;
Privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit (the function of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode for the second operation port 63 by the main control device 162, the payout control device A prize ball function based on winning in the second operating port 63 by 181),
A third entrance portion (first operation port 62) disposed downstream of the second entrance portion and capable of entering a non-entered game ball into the second entrance portion;
The privilege granting means is a means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the third pitching part (a winning ball function based on a winning at the first operating port 62 by the payout control device 181). A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, since the game ball that has not entered the second entrance part can enter the third entrance part, it is not necessary to enter the second entrance part. The opportunity to get it will be left. Thereby, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation even after the player does not enter the second entrance part, and the player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball is suppressed from disappearing quickly.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to Feature B9, wherein a probability of entering a game ball into the first ball entering unit is higher than a probability of entering the third ball entering unit.

  According to the above-described configuration, the game ball can be entered into the first ball entry part by making the game ball entry into the first ball entry part easier than that into the third ball entry part. Can reduce the attention of a person. As a result, the player's consciousness can be easily directed to the third pitching part, and as a result, the reserved memory number has become a predetermined number or more, and the player can hardly notice the process up to that point. it can. Thereby, it becomes easy to give the player the impression that the second gaming state suddenly occurs, and it is possible to suitably realize the player's surprise and joy.

Feature B11. A second lottery means (a function for executing a special-design lottery lottery by the main control device 162) for executing a lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the second pitching part or the third pitching part;
Special game execution means (game by the main controller 162) for executing a special game (open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result) advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery processing by the second lottery means being a specific result A game machine according to the feature B9 or B10.

  According to the above configuration, an opportunity to execute a special game is left without entering the second entrance. Thereby, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation even after the player does not enter the second entrance part, and the player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball is suppressed from disappearing quickly.

  Here, the “lottery process” and the “special game” in the feature B8 may be the same in type and degree of advantage in the one corresponding to the second pitching portion and the one corresponding to the third pitching portion. May be different.

  Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11, wherein the player has the second entrance portion more advantageous than the third entrance portion.

  According to the above configuration, even when game balls that have not entered the second entrance part are allowed to enter the third entrance part, the degree of advantage between the first game state and the second game state is clear. Differences can be made. As a result, it is possible to suitably arouse a sense of expectation for shifting to the second gaming state, and at the same time, it is possible to further increase the willingness to increase the number of reserved memories.

Feature B13. A payout means (payout control device 181) capable of paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion of the second ball entrance portion and the third ball entrance portion;
The payout means is means for increasing the number of game balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second entrance part more than the number of game balls to be delivered based on the entrance to the third entrance part (the number of payouts of the former The gaming machine according to any one of the features B9 to B12, characterized in that the number of payouts is 10 and the payout number of the latter is 3).

  According to the above configuration, since the number of payouts based on the entrance to the second entrance is larger than the number of payouts based on the entrance to the 3rd entrance, the entrance to the second entrance By shifting to the second gaming state in which the game is facilitated, it becomes possible to play with fewer balls than in the first gaming state. As a result, even if game balls that have not entered the second entrance part can enter the third entrance part, there is a clear difference in the degree of advantage between the first game state and the second game state. Can be provided.

Feature B14. The first entrance part includes the entrance part,
A second ball entry portion (second operation port 63) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first ball entry portion;
A second lottery means (a function for executing a special figure determination lottery by the main controller 162) for executing a lottery process based on a game ball entering the second pitching unit;
Special game execution means (game by the main controller 162) for executing a special game (open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result) advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery processing by the second lottery means being a specific result State transition process), and
After the execution of the special game, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state or the third gaming state, which has a different degree of advantage from the second gaming state and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B13, further comprising: a function (a function of shifting to the high-frequency support mode with a jackpot as a trigger).

  According to the above configuration, as a transition route to an advantageous gaming state, a lottery result becomes a specific result (for example, a jackpot result) separately from a route that is triggered when the number of reserved memories becomes a predetermined number or more. A route can be provided. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition to an advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to expand the range of ways to enjoy.

  Feature B15. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B14, further comprising notification means (general-purpose number-of-holds display section FM) for notifying the number of reserved storage of the reservation storage means.

  In the configuration in which the second gaming state is advantageous based on the reserved memory number being equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the player's interest in the reserved memory number is dramatically increased. Even if the number of memories is not remembered, it is possible to easily grasp the number of reserved memories each time. Thereby, it is suppressed that the player is distracted by the number of reserved memories and distracts attention to the game.

  Note that for each configuration of the features B1 to B15, the features A1 to A16, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, the features H1 to H10, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A passing portion (through gate 35) through which a game ball can pass;
Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on a game ball passing through the passage section (function for executing a lottery for a normal game by the main control device 162);
A ball entry part (second operation port 63) in which a game ball can enter;
A first state (open state) in which the game ball can be received or easily received in the entrance part, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be received in the entrance part or is less likely to be received than the first state; Variable receiving means (electrical accessory 66) that can be switched to,
Variable acceptance control means (main control) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a predetermined result. A function of executing a general game state transition process by the device 162);
A privilege granting means (a function for executing a game ball payout) for granting a privilege to a player based on the entrance of the game ball to the entrance part;
With
The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) that can receive a game ball when the second state is switched to the first state, and the received game ball is received in the receiving area. Configured to accept the sphere,
The game ball that has passed through the passing portion is configured to be able to reach a specific area (specific area RA2) in which the receiving area is formed by the variable receiving means,
In a predetermined state, the game ball passes through the passage part during a specific period (ordinary game period) from when the game ball passes through the passage part to when the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage ends. The game ball that has passed through the passing section reaches the specific area after the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage is completed because the period is shorter than the required period until the specific area is reached. A gaming machine characterized by being said to be.

  According to the above configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the specific area (the area where the receiving area is formed) after completion of the variable receiving control corresponding to the passing, the variable receiving means is switched to the first state. Even if it is controlled, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the entrance part. For this reason, although it is the structure which provides a privilege based on the entrance to a entrance part, it becomes possible to raise the frequency which makes a variable acceptance means a 1st state. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that it is easy to enter the entrance part while suppressing an excessive benefit from being given to the player, and to incite the player's interest or arouse game motivation. It becomes possible to do. In addition, the movement of the variable receiving means can be used as one of the game effects, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Feature C2. The game ball that has passed through the passing section can reach the specific area after the end of the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage and before the start of the variable acceptance control next time for the variable acceptance control. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that.

  According to the said structure, the game ball which passed the passage part will reach | attain a specific area | region using the gap | interval period of the variable acceptance control which moves back and forth. Thereby, not only does the game ball not enter the entrance part or difficult to enter in the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage, but also it becomes impossible to enter or enter the next variable acceptance control. It becomes possible to realize the configuration of C1 in a practically preferable aspect.

  Feature C3. The game ball that has passed through the passage part can reach the specific area after the end of the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage and before the next pass of the game ball to the passage part occurs. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or C2, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, the game ball related to the current pass reaches the specific area between the time when the game ball passes to the current passing portion and the time when the next pass occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the design load by making it unnecessary to consider the previously passed game ball and the next passed game ball when making the game ball impossible to enter the entrance area, etc. become.

  Note that the feature C3 is “providing a launching means capable of launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the game ball that has passed through the passing portion is after the end of the variable acceptance control corresponding to the passage, and It may be read that “the specific area can be reached before a period corresponding to the launching period of the game ball in the launching means has passed since the passage”.

  Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising guidance means (gaming nails 69a to 69d) for guiding the game ball that has passed through the passage portion to the specific area.

  According to the said structure, the flow of the game ball from a passage part to a specific area | region can be stabilized. This facilitates the constant duration of the game ball from the passage part to the specific area, and the game ball reaches the specific area after completion of the variable acceptance control for any entry to the passage part. Can be suitably maintained.

  Feature C5. Any of the features C1 to C4, comprising inhibition means (game nails 69a to 69d) for preventing a game ball different from the game ball that has passed through the passing portion from reaching the specific area The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, a game ball different from the specific game ball that has passed through the passage portion is prevented from entering the arrival route to the specific area. This prevents other game balls from colliding with the specific game ball to prevent the game from reaching the specific area, or prevents a game ball other than the specific game ball from entering the entrance part. It becomes possible to improve the sense of security and the stability of the arrival interval. In addition, the necessity of considering the entry of a game ball other than the specific game ball into the specific area at the design stage is alleviated, and the design load can be reduced.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the specific area is provided below the passage section, and the specific area and the passage section are arranged in a vertical row.

  According to the above configuration, the route to reach the specific area of the game ball that has passed through the passage portion is simplified, and it is easy to give the player an impression that a ball easily enters the specific area. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the passage portion can be moved to a specific area by the free fall of the game ball. In this case, since the change in the moving speed of the game ball due to contact with other members or the like can be suppressed, it is possible to contribute to the stabilization of the required period of the game ball up to the specific area.

  Feature C7. Means for making the probability of the predetermined result in the lottery process higher than the probability of being a result different from the predetermined result (function of making the probability of being an open result higher than the probability of being an off result); The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

  For example, if the probability of a predetermined result is lower than the probability of a different result, even if the execution frequency of the lottery process is increased, the frequency of switching to the first state in the variable accepting means tends to be low and variable. There is a concern that the effect of the receiving means cannot be fully exhibited. In this regard, in this configuration, since the probability of a predetermined result is higher than the probability of a different result, it is possible to increase the frequency of switching to the first state and improve the production effect. become.

Feature C8. A game ball can be entered and includes a specific entrance part (first operation port 62) different from the entrance part,
Any of the features C1 to C7, wherein the specific entry portion is arranged on the downstream side of the passage portion, and the game ball that has passed through the passage portion can reach the specific entry portion. The gaming machine described in 1.

  From the viewpoint of increasing the performance effect by increasing the execution frequency of the variable acceptance control, it is desirable to direct more game balls to the passing portion. Under such circumstances, in the above-described configuration, the game ball that has passed through the passage portion can reach not only the specific area but also the specific entrance portion. For example, if the arrival route of the game ball to the specific entrance part is independent of the route from the pass part to the specific area, when the entrance rate to the specific entrance part is to be secured to some extent, You will be forced to earn an entry rate by lowering the passing rate of game balls to. In this regard, according to the present configuration, it is possible to secure a rate of entry to the specific entrance without reducing the rate of passage of game balls to the passage, and to direct more game balls to the passage. It becomes possible to set it as a preferable aspect above.

Feature C9. The specific ball portion is arranged on the downstream side of the specific region, and the game ball that has not been received by the variable receiving means among the game balls that have passed through the passage portion can reach the specific ball portion And
The privilege granting means includes means for granting a privilege to the player based on the entrance to the specific entrance part (a prize ball function based on a winning to the first operation port 62 by the payout control device 181). The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a specific grant opportunity twice for each game ball. In other words, even if the game ball that has passed through the passing part is not accepted by the variable receiving means (when the ball has not entered the ball entering part), an opportunity for granting a privilege remains, and the game ball is accepted by the variable receiving means. Even after passing without being passed, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the granting of benefits. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior and whereabouts of the game ball is prevented from fading quickly, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein a gaming ball is not paid out based on the passage to the passage portion.

  According to the above configuration, since there is no payout of game balls for passing to the passing part, it is possible to increase the passing rate of game balls to the passing part while suppressing the trouble in operation at the game hall. Become. Thereby, the execution frequency of the lottery process by the lottery means can be increased, and further, the frequency of switching to the first state in the variable receiving means can be increased.

  In feature C10, “no game ball is paid out” may be read as “no privilege is given”.

Feature C11. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation;
Guidance means (guidance part 77) capable of guiding the game ball launched by the launching means to the passage part,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C10, wherein the guiding unit includes a buffer unit (buffer member 78) at a location where the game ball abuts.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball can be guided to the passing portion by the guiding means, and the passing frequency of the game ball with respect to the passing portion can be suitably increased. In addition, since the buffering means is provided at the location where the game ball abuts on the guidance means, the rebound of the game ball abutting on the guidance means can be suppressed to stabilize the guidance of the game ball, and the guidance means by the collision of the game balls Can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C12. Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A ball entry part (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the game balls entering the ball-entry unit (a function of executing a normal lottery lottery by the main controller 162);
A ball entry part (second operation port 63) in which a game ball can enter;
A first state (open state) in which the game ball can be received or easily received in the entrance part, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be received in the entrance part or is less likely to be received than the first state; Variable receiving means (electrical accessory 66) that can be switched to,
Variable acceptance control means (main control) for performing variable acceptance control to change the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a predetermined result. A function of executing a general game state transition process by the device 162);
A privilege granting means (a function for executing a game ball payout) for granting a privilege to a player based on the entrance of the game ball to the entrance part;
With
The variable receiving means forms a receiving area (receiving area RA1) that can receive a game ball when the second state is switched to the first state, and the received game ball is received in the receiving area. Configured to accept the sphere,
A game ball that has passed through a predetermined location in the game area is configured to be able to reach a specific area (specific area RA2) in which the reception area is formed by the variable receiving means,
When it is in a predetermined state, a specific period (common game period) from when the game ball enters the entrance part to when the variable acceptance control corresponding to the entrance is completed passes through the predetermined part. Then, the gaming machine is configured to be shorter than the required period of the game ball from reaching the specific area.

  According to the said structure, the effect similar to the said characteristic C1 is anticipated. Each configuration described in any of the features C2 to C11 may be applied to the feature C12.

  Note that, for each configuration of the features C1 to C12, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, the features H1 to H10, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A game operation executing means (a function for periodically opening the electric actor 66 at a period of 0.6 sec or 1.1 sec) for periodically executing a predetermined game operation (opening of the electric actor 66);
A privilege granting means (paying out game balls) for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that a predetermined privilege granting condition (winning to the second operating port 63) is established while the predetermined game operation is performed. Function)
With
The gaming operation executing means sets the cycle of the predetermined gaming operation to the first cycle (0.6 sec) when the gaming status is the first status (the number of usual reserved memories FN is 0), and the gaming status is the first Means for setting the period of the predetermined gaming operation to a second period (1.1 sec) different from the first period when the second situation is different from the situation (the usual figure storage number FN is 4) A gaming machine having a function of changing an opening cycle of the electric accessory 66 in accordance with the reserved storage number FN.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined game operation is periodically performed, and the cycle of the periodic operation changes according to the game situation. On top of that, a bonus is granted when a bonus grant condition is established while a predetermined game action is being performed, and a correlation is given between the periodic action and the ease of obtaining the bonus. . Thereby, the easiness of establishment of grant conditions can be changed by changing the cycle, and thus the easiness of obtaining a privilege can be changed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game as compared with the case where it operates permanently with a certain regularity, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature D2. A game operation executing means (electric player) that periodically executes a predetermined game operation (opening of the electric accessory 66) under the condition of a predetermined game operation by the player (a launch operation for winning through the through gate 35). The function of periodically opening the object 66 with a period of 0.6 sec or 1.1 sec),
A privilege granting means (paying out game balls) for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that a predetermined privilege granting condition (winning to the second operating port 63) is established while the predetermined game operation is performed. Function)
With
The gaming operation executing means sets the cycle of the predetermined gaming operation to the first cycle (0.6 sec) when the gaming status is the first status (the number of usual reserved memories FN is 0), and the gaming status is the first Means for setting the period of the predetermined game operation to a second period (1.1 sec) different from the first period when the second situation is different from the situation (ordinary reserved memory number FN is 4);
The gaming machine is configured such that a benefit is more easily given in the second cycle than in the first cycle, or the benefit is advantageous to the player.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined game operation is periodically performed, and the cycle of the periodic operation changes according to the game situation. On top of that, a bonus is granted when a bonus grant condition is established while a predetermined game action is being performed, and a correlation is given between the periodic action and the ease of obtaining the bonus. . Thereby, the easiness of establishment of grant conditions can be changed by changing the cycle, and thus the easiness of obtaining a privilege can be changed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game as compared with the case where it operates permanently with a certain regularity, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, in this configuration, the player is required to perform a predetermined game operation for the execution of the game operation, and the privilege granting condition is not satisfied unless the game operation is performed. For this reason, execution significance of a predetermined game operation occurs, and the willingness to perform the operation can be increased. In addition, in this configuration, when the period of the game operation is the second period, it becomes easier to give a privilege or the advantage is advantageous to the player than when the period is the first period. Since it is necessary to continuously perform the game operation in order to continue executing the game operation in the second cycle, not only the player's interest in the operation cycle of the game operation is increased, but also the significance of continuing the predetermined game operation is It can also be generated. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate, and to promote the player's active participation in the game.

Feature D3. A change from the first situation to the second situation occurs on the basis that a predetermined condition set in advance is established (the 10-second normal variable display time is set);
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the predetermined condition can be established by performing the predetermined game operation.

  According to the said structure, the period of game operation | movement can change to a 2nd period by performing predetermined | prescribed game operation. For this reason, the player's willingness to operate is further enhanced, and active participation in the game can be favorably promoted.

  Feature D4. The feature D2 or D3 is characterized in that when the second situation is reached, the second situation is continued on the condition that the predetermined game operation is continuously performed thereafter. Game machines.

  With the above configuration, when the gaming situation changes to the second situation, the second situation is continued on the condition that the predetermined gaming operation is continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the willingness to continue the gaming operation. In addition, since the possibility of returning to the first situation arises depending on the player's operating situation, it is possible to face the game with a certain sense of tension and to improve the interest.

Feature D5. Means for generating a special state (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to jackpot) based on the establishment of a specific condition (jackpot),
When the special state occurs under the second situation, by performing a specific game operation different from the predetermined game operation (a launch operation for trying to win the variable winning device 65), the predetermined game operation is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that a privilege can be obtained more easily than when a game operation is performed, or an advantageous privilege is obtained.

  According to the above configuration, since a specific operation different from the predetermined game operation is required to obtain a privilege when a special state occurs, the player is requested to switch the operation mode. Monotonicity is suppressed. In addition, since it is possible for the player to naturally stop the continuation of the predetermined gaming operation, it is possible to end the state in which the period of the gaming operation is the second period, and it is preferable that the state is permanent Can be avoided.

  Feature D6. By performing the specific game operation when the special state occurs, it becomes easier to obtain a privilege than performing the predetermined game operation when the cycle of the predetermined game operation is the second cycle. Or it is set as the structure from which an advantageous privilege is acquired, The game machine as described in the characteristic D5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the above configuration, since the special state occurs, it becomes easier to obtain a privilege than the state in which the period of the gaming operation is the second cycle, or the privilege is advantageous. It can be used as an element of promotion from a certain state, and it becomes possible to improve interest. In addition, since the state can be configured to end in exchange for the occurrence of a special state that is more advantageous than the state that is in the second cycle, the player's understanding compared to the case in which the state in the second cycle only ends Can be easily obtained, and the dissatisfaction and discouragement of the player can be reduced.

Feature D7. A movable body (a receiving member 245 of the electric accessory 66) with which a game ball can abut is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the predetermined game operation is an operation of the movable body.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible not only to correlate the periodic motion and the ease of obtaining a privilege, but also to establish a correlation with the movement and flow of the game ball. Thereby, not only the operation cycle of the movable body but also the movement and flow of the game ball can attract the player's interest, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature D8. A ball entry part (second operation port 63) in which a game ball can enter;
The movable body has a first state (open state) that allows the game ball to be received or easily received by the entrance part, and the game part cannot be received by the entrance part or the A variable receiving means (electric component 66) that can be switched to a second state (closed state) that is harder to accept than the first state;
The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the privilege granting unit includes a unit that grants a privilege (payout of a game ball) based on a game ball entering the ball entrance unit.

  According to the said structure, according to the operation | movement period of a movable body, the ease of entering a game ball to a ball-entry part can be changed, and the ease of provision of a privilege can also be changed in connection with it. Thereby, it becomes possible to implement | achieve the structure which concerns on the said characteristic D1 in a practically preferable aspect.

  Note that, for each configuration of the features D1 to D8, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, the features H1 to H10, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. The entrance part (through gate 35) in which a game ball can enter,
An acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for through by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for determination (ordinary figure hold information) based on a game ball entering the pitching section;
Storage means (electrical holding area Rc) for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Whether or not the determination information stored in the storage unit corresponds to the allocation information is determined. If a plurality of determination information is stored in the storage unit, the determination information is stored in the plurality of determination information. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the aforementioned grant determination (function for executing a general-purpose determination determination process by the main control device 162);
Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a game notification operation is started by a predetermined notification means (the accessory display unit 44), and a game is obtained as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game turning operation of each game time is performed according to the determination information stored in the storage means, with the end of the turning action as one game time. Game time control means (function to execute a general game time control process by the main controller 162),
With
When the number of determination information stored in the storage means is the first number, the game number control means performs the game number operation more than when it is a second number smaller than the first number. Execution period means for extending the execution period (when the common figure reserved memory number FN is 0, the normal figure variable display time is 0.05 sec, and when the general figure reserved memory number FN is four, the common figure variable display time A gaming machine characterized by having a function of setting 0.6 sec.

  Since the determination information is stored separately from the currently used game times, the determination process and the game times are guaranteed to be executed after the next time, so that the game generally continues as the number of determination information stored increases. It becomes possible to give a sense of security. Under such circumstances, the above-described configuration is configured such that the execution period of the game rotation operation becomes longer as the number of pieces of determination information stored increases. For this reason, it is possible to maintain the number of memories or further increase the number of memories simply by continuing the natural launch operation. That is, since a special operation is not required, the number of memories can be easily maintained or increased even by a non-expert, and anyone can play with peace of mind.

Feature E2. A second game state (second normal state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (first normal game state, low-frequency support mode) in a predetermined case (when the usual figure storage number FN is 1 or more) Gaming state, medium frequency support mode),
Means for continuing the second gaming state on condition that the stored number is not less than a predetermined number equal to or less than the first number when the second gaming state is entered (the reserved figure number FN is 1 or more) As long as the second normal gaming state or the medium frequency support state is maintained).

  When the number of memories becomes the first number, it can be easily maintained thereafter, but this configuration is advantageous on the condition that the number of memories is not less than a predetermined number equal to or less than the first number. The second gaming state is configured to continue. In this case, the stored number can be maintained with a margin with respect to the predetermined number that is the continuation condition of the second gaming state, and the second gaming state can be easily continued. That is, according to the present configuration, it is possible to create an advantageous state that is difficult to remove once entering, and it is possible to improve interest.

Feature E3. A specific ball entry part (second operation port 63) that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the ball entry part;
A privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry unit (the function of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode for the second operating port 63 by the main control device 162, the payout control device 181 A prize ball function based on winning in the second operating port 63 by)
With
The gaming machine according to Feature E2, wherein in the second gaming state, the difficulty of entering the specific entering part is lower than in the first gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, when the gaming state changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it becomes easier for the gaming ball to enter the specific entrance portion, and a privilege based on the entrance can be easily obtained. That is, according to the present configuration, the state in which the second game state can be continued stably can easily make it possible to continue the state in which it is easy to obtain a privilege based on the entry to the specific entry portion. Thereby, the acquisition opportunity of a privilege can be provided suitably and interest property improves.

  Feature E4. As the means for execution period, an average period of the execution period of the game turning operation set when the number of pieces of determination information stored is the first number, and the number of pieces of determination information stored is the second number. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising means for making the period longer than the average period of the game-turning operations set when the number is a number.

  According to the above-described configuration, the execution period of the game turning operation is not lengthened only in a special case under the situation where the number of memories is the first number, but the number of memories is the first number throughout the game. As a result, the execution period of the game re-use operation becomes longer. That is, according to the present configuration, the effect brought about by the configuration of the feature E1 is always secured, and the player can play with peace of mind.

  Feature E5. The execution period means executes the game turn operation set when the number of determination information stored is the second number, based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, further comprising means for setting an execution period that is longer than an average period of the period (a function for setting a normal fluctuation display time of 10 sec).

  According to the above configuration, the execution period of the game turning operation is lengthened when the predetermined condition is satisfied even when the stored number is the second number. Thereby, not only can the opportunity to increase the number of memories be suitably provided, it is also possible to diversify the time length of the game turning operation when the number of memories is the second number and to suppress the monotony of the game. .

Feature E6. The first entrance part includes the entrance part,
A second ball entry portion (first operation port 62) different from the first ball entry portion, in which a game ball can be entered;
Second acquisition means for acquiring second determination information based on a game ball entering the second pitching section (function of executing a winning process for the operation port by the main controller 162);
Second storage means for storing the second determination information acquired by the second acquisition means, with the predetermined number or a number different from the predetermined number and a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit 1 result display area reservation area Ra),
Whether or not the second determination information stored in the second storage means corresponds to the assignment information is determined. If a plurality of second determination information is stored in the storage means, these are determined. Second grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on a plurality of second determination information (a function for executing a first special figure determination determination process by the main control device 162);
Based on the determination of grant by the second grant determining means, a second notifying operation is started by a predetermined notifying means or notifying means (symbol display device 75) different from the predetermined notifying means, According to the second determination information stored in the second storage means, the end of the second game rotation operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the second grant determination means. Second game time control means for controlling the predetermined notifying means or the different notifying means so that the second game turning operation of each game time is performed (the game time control process for the first special figure by the main controller 162) Function to execute)
With
The second game number control means is a second type number smaller than the first type number when the number of second determination information stored in the second storage means is the first type number. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, further comprising means for shortening an execution period of the second game turning operation.

  The above configuration includes the second lottery system in which the relationship between the number of memories and the time length of the game turning operation is reversed. Some players want to enjoy a game for a long time, while others want time-efficient games, and multiple lottery systems with different game tempos as described above coexist to meet their needs. Can do.

  In applying the feature E6 to the feature E1, the “determination information”, “acquisition unit”, “storage unit”, “granting determination unit”, “game play operation”, and “game play control unit” of the feature E1 "First determination information", "first acquisition means", "first storage means", "first grant determination means", "first game turn operation" and "first game turn control means", respectively. Can be read as This is the same when the feature E6 is applied to the features E2 to E5. Further, when the feature E6 is applied to the feature E3, the “second entrance portion” of the feature E6 may be read as “the specific entrance portion”.

Feature E7. The game time control means executes a first game time operation as the game time operation,
The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein one of the first game turning operation and the second game turning operation can be executed while the other is being executed.

  In the above configuration, since the first and second game turning operations can be executed in parallel, the execution timing of the second game turning operation occurs during the execution of the first game turning operation. In addition, the second game turning operation can be started without waiting for the end of the first game turning operation. For this reason, even if the execution period of the first game turning operation becomes longer and the pace of game progress becomes slow based on the fact that the number of stored first determination information becomes the first number, The inconvenience that a person waits for the start of the second game turning operation for a long time is avoided, and a slow impression is suppressed.

Feature E8. The grant determining means is provided as a first grant determining means,
The feature E7 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player to perform the grant determination by the second grant determination means than to perform the grant determination by the first grant determination means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above-described configuration, since the grant determination by the second grant determination unit is more advantageous than the first grant determination unit, the player's consciousness is easily directed to the second game turning operation. As a result, attention to the first game turning operation is lessened, and even if the execution period of the first game turning operation becomes longer, the player can hardly notice it. Combined with the fact that the first game turning operation and the second game turning operation can be executed in parallel, it is possible to more suitably suppress giving a slow impression.

Feature E9. A launch operation means (game ball launch handle 41) in which a predetermined launch operation is performed by the player;
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball into the game area based on the predetermined launch operation;
With
The launching means launches a game ball so that the game ball flows down the first area (left route) in the game area when the launch operation is performed with the first operation amount with respect to the launch operation means. When the launch operation is performed with the second operation amount on the launch operation means, the game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down the second area (right route) in the game area,
The gaming machine according to feature E7 or E8, wherein the first and second balls are provided in the first region.

  According to the above configuration, if the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the first area, the game ball is allowed to naturally enter both the first and second balls. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only the first game turning operation is executed, and it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of the feature E7 or E8.

  Note that the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, the features H1 to H10, and the features for each configuration of the features E1 to E9. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Launching means capable of launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 110);
A first incoming ball portion (second operating port 63) and a second incoming ball portion (through gate 35) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
Switchable between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter or easy to enter and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first mode. A variable pitching portion (second variable winning device 500);
Lottery means for executing lottery processing based on the entry of game balls into the first pitching unit (function for executing special figure determination processing by the main control device 162);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (special hit result), the variable pitch control is changed from the second mode to the first mode and the second mode thereafter. Variable pitch control means to execute (function to execute game state transition processing by the main controller 162);
A special game that executes a special game (open / close execution mode corresponding to V jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of a specific event (V winning) that occurs based on the game ball entering the variable pitching portion. Execution means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 162);
With
As a gaming state, there are a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (second normal gaming state) in which the difficulty of entering a game ball into the first entering part is relatively high or low. Have
Specific number means for changing specific numerical value information (ordinary reserved memory number FN) on the basis of the game ball entering the second pitching unit (function for executing through winning process by the main controller 162) When,
Based on the value of the specific numerical information being a predetermined value, the second game has a lower difficulty in entering the first ball entering portion from the first game state than the first game state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the game machine has a state means (a function to enter a second normal gaming state when the usual figure reserved storage number FN is 1 or more).

  In the above configuration, the lottery process is executed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit, and the variable ball entry unit is switched from the second state to the first state according to the result. A specific event can be generated when the game ball enters the variable pitching portion, and a special game is executed when the specific event occurs. For this reason, in order to generate a special game, it is indispensable to enter a game ball into the first ball-entry part. In general, in a gaming machine having a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a gaming ball can more easily enter the first pitching portion, the first game is triggered by a special gaming result such as a big hit. A transition from the state to the second gaming state occurs. In this case, it is difficult to expect to enter the first entrance unless the above-mentioned special game result is obtained, so there is a possibility that the player's interest may be concentrated only on the above-mentioned special game result, There is a concern that a player who has a special game result and is unable to complete the game without experiencing the real fun. In this regard, in this configuration, the specific numerical value information is changed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit, and the value of the information becomes a predetermined value (predetermined number). It is comprised so that. For this reason, even if it does not become a special game result, the opportunity to play a game in a 2nd game state can be provided, and it becomes possible to suppress generation | occurrence | production of the said disadvantage suitably. In addition, since the specific numerical information is configured to be changed by entering the game ball into the second entrance part, the player has the impression that the occurrence of the second game state is acquired by his / her skill. It is easy to give it to the audience and the interest is improved.

  Feature F2. The state means is a means for temporarily changing the gaming state to the second gaming state (temporarily changing the second normal gaming state based on the value of the specific numerical information being the predetermined value). The gaming machine according to feature F1, further comprising a function to be generated).

  According to the above configuration, since the second gaming state remains temporary, it is possible to limit the excessive gaming such that the generation of the special game is oversimplified. In addition, in this configuration, even if the second gaming state is entered, the entry of the game ball into the variable pitching portion and the occurrence of the specific event are not guaranteed, so that the second gaming state remains ungenerated. Can be played under a sense of tension that may end, and it will be possible to improve interest.

  Feature F3. The state means is based on the fact that, when the gaming state is the second gaming state, the value of the specific numerical value information is less than the number as the predetermined value or less than the number as the predetermined value. And a means for causing the gaming state to become the first gaming state (a function for ending the second normal gaming state based on the fact that the predetermined value is 1 and the usual figure reserved memory number FN is 0). The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2.

  According to the said structure, it can be set as the structure suitable when putting the structure of the said characteristic F1 or F2 into practical use. Furthermore, according to this configuration, the execution period of the second gaming state is not predetermined, but changes in a fluid manner depending on the state of entry into the second entry portion. That is, while the player is in the second gaming state, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the state will continue, so that a sense of tension can be further increased, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

Feature F4. Specific game execution means for executing a specific game (a general game game, a general game) based on the game ball entering the second game unit (a general game game control process by the main controller 162, a general game) A function to execute a game state transition process)
The specific number means is:
Means for increasing the value of the specific numerical information on the basis of a game ball entering the second pitching unit (function of executing a winning process for through by the main controller 162);
Means for reducing the value of the specific numerical information based on the execution of the specific game (function of executing a normal data setting process by the main control device 162); Gaming machine.

  For example, if the player cannot grasp the regularity regarding the change of specific numerical information, or if it is difficult to grasp, what should the player realize to make the specific numerical information a predetermined value, We do not know what to expect, and there is concern that the game before entering the second gaming state is less likely to be interesting, and that it is forced to know in advance the gaming properties and the gaming method. In this configuration, in the present configuration, the specific game is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit, and then the second game entry and the specific game are executed respectively. The increase and decrease of the specific numerical information value is assigned. Thereby, it becomes easy to perceive regularity regarding the change of the specific numerical information while the player is playing, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  Feature F5. The specific game execution means sets the execution period of the specific game to a period (10 sec or 10.5 sec) longer than a period corresponding to the game ball firing period in the launch means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature F4, further comprising: a function (function of setting the normal map change display time to 10 seconds).

  According to the above configuration, the execution interval of the specific game is made longer than the period corresponding to the launching period of the game ball, so that the interval between the game balls entering the entrance portion is shorter than the execution interval of the specific game. The change tendency of the specific numerical information tends to increase. For this reason, it is possible to appropriately secure an opportunity for the specific numerical value information to reach the predetermined value, and to avoid the perpetuation of the unachieved state.

  Feature F6. When the gaming state is the second gaming state, the specific game executing means sets the execution period of the specific game to a period (0.05 sec or 0 seconds) shorter than a period corresponding to the game ball firing period in the launching means. .55 sec), the game machine according to F4 or F5.

  According to the above configuration, the execution period of the specific game is shorter than the period corresponding to the launch period of the game ball, so that the execution interval of the specific game is shorter than the pitch of the game ball entering the entrance part, The value of specific numerical information is likely to decrease. As a result, after the value of the specific numerical information reaches a predetermined value and enters the second gaming state, the value can be reduced naturally and returned to the first gaming state. In this case, if the game ball is refrained from launching, the frequency of entering the game ball into the entrance part is lower than that in the case where the launch operation is continued, and the decrease in the specific numerical information is accelerated. The gaming state will end early. Thereby, the willingness to perform the launch operation is strongly aroused, and it becomes possible to favorably promote active participation in the game.

  Feature F7. When the value of the specific numerical information becomes the predetermined value, the predetermined notification (character display 522) is performed so as to prompt the execution of the firing operation by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75). The gaming machine according to feature F6, further comprising notification control means (function for executing special effect processing by the notification / effect control device 143) for controlling the notification means.

  According to the above configuration, it is suppressed that the player refrains from the launch operation without noticing that the value of the specific numerical information has reached the predetermined value, in other words, the gaming state is the second gaming state. The Thereby, it is suppressed that the 2nd game state ends unreasonably early, and play ease improves.

Feature F8. A game ball launched by the launching means can be entered, and includes a third entrance part (first operation port 62) different from the first entrance part and the second entrance part,
The lottery means is configured to perform a lottery process based on the occurrence of a game ball entering either the second ball entry unit or the third ball entry unit,
As a gaming state, a first type gaming state (low frequency support mode) and a second type gaming state (high frequency support mode) having a lower difficulty in entering the first pitching part than the first type gaming state. Have
The gaming state is changed from the first type gaming state to the second type gaming state based on the fact that the result of the lottery process based on the entering of the gaming ball into the third entering part is a specific result (a jackpot result). A game state transition means for shifting (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main controller 162);
The first type gaming state includes the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second type gaming state is closer to the first pitching part than the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the difficulty of entering a ball is low.

  According to the above configuration, the specific numerical information is used as a transition route to a game state (second game state or second type game state) in which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball entry part and a special game is expected to occur. In addition to the first route triggered by the value of the value being a predetermined value, a second route triggered by the lottery result being a specific result (for example, a jackpot result) can be provided. As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of transition to an advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to expand the range of ways to enjoy. Furthermore, since the second game state is included in the first type game state, it is possible to provide an opportunity to play in a state in which a game ball can easily enter the first ball-entry part without having a special game result. In addition, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state that shifts through the first route (ease of entering the first pitching portion) is kept lower than that of the second type gaming state that shifts through the second route. It is configured. Thereby, it is possible to expand the opportunities to play the game in a state in which the game ball can easily enter the first ball entry part while suppressing the reduction in the attractiveness of winning the specific result.

Feature F9. A passing portion through which a game ball can pass as the second entrance portion;
The gaming machine according to Feature F8, wherein the gaming ball that has passed through the passing portion is configured to be able to enter the third entering portion.

  According to the said structure, a game ball can be made to enter a 3rd entrance part, passing a passage part. In this case, a game that aims to pass the game ball through the passage part and the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value, and a game that aims to win the specific result by entering the game ball in the third ball entry part. It becomes possible to make it parallel. Thereby, a plurality of types of games having different game characteristics can be enjoyed simultaneously, and the interest is improved.

  Feature F10. The gaming machine according to Feature F8 or F9, wherein a probability of entering a game ball into the second ball entering part is higher than a probability of entering the third ball entering part.

  According to the above configuration, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entry part by simplifying the game ball entry to the third ball entry part, thereby making the former routine and playing games against the second ball entry part. Can reduce the attention of a person. Accordingly, the player's consciousness can be easily directed to the third pitching portion, and as a result, the specific numerical value information has become a predetermined value, and the player can hardly notice the process up to that point. . Thereby, it becomes easy to give the player the impression that the second gaming state suddenly occurs, and it is possible to suitably realize the player's surprise and joy.

  Feature F11. Based on the value of the specific numerical information being the predetermined value, the predetermined notification means is controlled so that the specific notification (character display 523, 525) is performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75). The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, further comprising specific notification control means (a function of executing a special effect process by the notification / effect control device 143).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the specific numerical value information has become a predetermined value, in other words, that the gaming state has become the second gaming state. Note that when this feature is applied to the feature F10, the player's awareness tends to be directed to the third pitching portion, so that the player can be aware of it, and the effect of this feature can be more beneficial. Can be.

Feature F12. As the predetermined result, a first result and a second result different from the first result are set,
The variable pitch control means executes the variable pitch control in a first mode (high allocation mode) on the basis that the lottery result of the lottery unit becomes the first result (advantageous special hit result), Means for executing the variable pitch control in a second mode (low sorting mode) different from the first mode based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery unit becomes the second result (unfavorable special hit result) ( A function of executing a special prize opening / closing process by the main controller 162),
The feature F1 is characterized in that the ease of occurrence of the specific event differs between the case where the variable entry control is executed in the first mode and the case where it is executed in the second mode. Thru | or the game machine in any one of F11.

  According to the above configuration, since the probability of occurrence of a specific event changes depending on the execution mode of variable entry control, the result of lottery processing based on the entry of game balls into the first entry part, The player's interest in the execution mode of the ball control is increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature F13. Distributing means (shutter 508) for distributing the specific game ball that has entered the variable pitching portion into a first area (V winning area 506) and a second area (discharge area 507) different from the first area. )
When the variable pitch control is executed in the first mode, the specific game ball is more easily distributed to the first area than the second area by the distribution means, and the variable pitch control is the first mode. When executed in two modes, the specific game ball is more easily distributed to the second area than the first area by the distributing means,
The gaming machine according to Feature F12, wherein the specific event occurs when the specific game ball is distributed to the first region.

  According to the above configuration, even if a game ball enters the variable entry portion, a specific event does not always occur. As a result, the player is relieved at the time when the game ball enters the variable ball entry section, and the subsequent interest in the game ball is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature F2 through the feature F12, it is possible to further increase a sense of tension that may cause the second gaming state to end without a specific event occurring. As a result, when a specific event occurs, the sense of accomplishment and fulfillment are enhanced, and it is possible to contribute to further enhancement of interest.

  In these cases, a feature that “the player can visually recognize the distribution means” may be added. As a result, the player can visually grasp the status of the distribution means, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention with respect to the game ball that has entered the variable entry portion. Further, instead of or in addition to the additional feature, a feature that “the player can visually recognize at least a part of the first region” may be added. As a result, the player can visually recognize whether or not the game balls that have entered the variable entry portion have been distributed to the first area, and the degree of attention to the game balls that have entered the variable entry portion is favorable. It becomes possible to increase to.

Feature F14. Launching means capable of launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 110);
A first incoming ball portion (second operating port 63) and a second incoming ball portion (through gate 35) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
Switchable between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter or easy to enter and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the first mode. A variable pitching portion (second variable winning device 500);
Lottery means for executing lottery processing based on the entry of game balls into the first pitching unit (function for executing special figure determination processing by the main control device 162);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (special hit result), the variable pitch control is changed from the second mode to the first mode and the second mode thereafter. Variable pitch control means to execute (function to execute game state transition processing by the main controller 162);
A special game that executes a special game (open / close execution mode corresponding to V jackpot) that is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of a specific event (V winning) that occurs based on the game ball entering the variable pitching portion. Execution means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 162);
With
The game state has a first game state (first normal game state) and a second game state (second normal game state) that are different in the likelihood of occurrence of the specific event,
Specific number means for changing specific numerical value information (ordinary reserved memory number FN) on the basis of the game ball entering the second pitching unit (function for executing through winning process by the main controller 162) When,
Based on the value of the specific numerical information being a predetermined value, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state in which the specific event is more likely to occur than the first gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising state means (a function to enter the second normal gaming state when the usual figure storage number FN is 1 or more).

  According to the said structure, the effect similar to the said characteristic F1 is anticipated. Each configuration described in any of the features F2 to F13 may be applied to the feature F14.

  Note that, for each configuration of the features F1 to F14, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features G1 to G13, the features H1 to H10, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entering part (fourth working port 720, fifth working port 730) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
Special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entrance unit;
Special information storage means (holding ball storage area 642) for storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Variable input that can be switched between a first mode (open state) in which game balls launched by the launching means can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first mode. Ball means (lower variable winning device 700, upper variable winning device 710);
The variable pitching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the variable pitching control unit for executing the variable pitching control according to the second mode (the big winning opening opening / closing process by the main controller 162 is executed). Function)
Transition determination means for determining whether to shift the gaming state to a special state in which the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means for the special information stored in the special information storage means ( A function for executing the first / second special figure variation start process and the second special figure fluctuation start process by the main control device 162, and a determination process)
Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being a transition response result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state to the special state, the gaming state transition means (mainly for shifting the gaming state to the special state) A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 162);
A payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a specific number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means;
A gaming machine comprising
A special entry part (through gate 35) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
Receiving means (an electric accessory) that is displaceable between a first state (accepting state) in which a game ball is received at the starting entrance part and a second state (non-accepting state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than in the first state. 66)
Have
A process that is performed based on a game ball entering the special pitching unit, and includes a specifying unit that executes a specifying process related to control of the receiving unit;
As the transition response result, the first transition response result (big hit result) so that the advantage for the player is relatively high and the second transition response that is more disadvantageous for the player than the first transition response result. Results (special hit results) are set,
A special gaming state (a winning easy state in the fourth embodiment) in which the determination result by the transition determining means is more likely to be the second transition corresponding result than the normal gaming state is set,
Based on the specifying process, the specifying means is a state means for causing the gaming state to be the special gaming state (in the main control device 162, the variable display time when the usual reserved memory number FN is 4 is displayed. A gaming machine having a function of executing processing to be set).

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the special entrance part, the acceptance rate of the game ball to the start entrance part can be improved, and when the game ball enters the start entrance part, the variable entrance In a configuration in which a game ball is allowed to enter the ball means and a special state in which the winning ball is made by the payout means is changed to a special state where the advantage is relatively high or low as the special state. A special game state in which a transition response result (so-called jackpot result) and a second transition response result (so-called small hit result) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first transition response result are set, and the small hit result is likely to be achieved. Is a new game that makes it possible to obtain prize balls by variable entry control based on small hit results that can occur frequently, even if it does not result in big hit results as in conventional gaming machines Sex is realized.

  On the other hand, if it is configured to shift to such a special gaming state that is likely to be a jackpot result based on the result of the determination of whether or not it will be a jackpot result or a jackpot result, eventually it will be a conventional game waiting for the jackpot result There is not much difference from the playability of the game, and it can be a gameplay that lacks novelty. Moreover, if the transition to the special gaming state is made based on the result of the transition determination, the transition to the special gaming state is normally made via the variable pitch control. If it is inserted, there is a possibility that it will be difficult to feel the appreciation of the special gaming state that makes it easier to shift to a more disadvantageous special state.

  Therefore, as in the above configuration, it is possible to make the transition to the special gaming state regardless of the result of the transition determination by adopting a configuration that becomes the special gaming state based on the specifying process on the receiving and specifying means side. It becomes possible to provide a novel gameability completely different from the conventional gameplay.

  For the first transition response result and the second transition response result, “as the transition response result, the advantage for the player in the control mode of the variable pitch control performed during the special state is relatively high or low. The first transition response result (big hit result) and the second transition response result (special hit result) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the first transition response result are set. " It may be expressed. In addition, “the special state is set so that a round game can be performed a predetermined number of times with a predetermined number (10) of game balls entering as one end condition. In addition, “as the transition response result, the first transition response result (big hit result) in which the round game can be performed a plurality of times and the second transition response result (special hit in which the round game is performed once). And (result) are set, "may be expressed.

Feature G2. The specifying means is a means for executing the specifying process.
An acceptance information acquisition means (a function for executing a through-winning process by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for acceptance based on a game ball entering the special entry portion;
Receiving information storage means (electrical power holding area 643) for storing the receiving information acquired by the receiving information acquiring means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process by the main control device 162) for performing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
With respect to the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means, acceptance determination means for performing acceptance determination as to whether or not the acceptance control means performs the acceptance control (in the general game game control process by the main controller 162). A function for executing the determination processing)
With
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the state means is configured to change the gaming state to the special gaming state based on at least a part of the specific processing.

  According to the above configuration, the specific configuration of the specific process is clarified in the configuration of the feature G1.

  Feature G3. The state means is configured so that, compared with the normal gaming state, the probability that the result of the acceptance determination by the acceptance determination unit becomes the acceptance result that causes the acceptance control to be performed by the acceptance control unit is not changed. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the gaming machine is in a special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming state becomes the special gaming state without changing the probability that the result of the acceptance determination by the acceptance determining means is the acceptance result. By doing in this way, the freedom degree when it becomes a special game state improves. In other words, when changing the probability of acceptance determination, it is preferable from the viewpoint of gaming transparency to change the result of the transition determination side as an opportunity, and based on that premise, the probability of acceptance determination when entering the special gaming state If a change is made, it may eventually become a game that is not so different from the conventional game waiting for the result of the transition determination. Therefore, if it is configured as a special gaming state without requiring a change in the probability of acceptance determination as in the above configuration, the relationship with the transition determination side can be reduced, and the original route on the acceptance determination side It becomes possible to be in a special game state.

  Feature G4. In the feature G2 or G3, the state means is the special game state so that the mode of the acceptance control by the acceptance control unit does not change compared to the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the gaming state becomes the special gaming state without changing the mode of acceptance control. By doing in this way, the freedom degree when it becomes a special game state improves. In other words, when the mode of acceptance control is different between the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, it is preferable from the viewpoint of the transparency of the game to change the result of the transition determination side as a trigger. If the mode of acceptance control is changed in this case, eventually, the gameability that is not so different from the conventional game waiting for the result of the shift determination can be obtained. Therefore, if it is configured as a special gaming state without requiring a change in the mode of acceptance control as in the above configuration, the relationship with the transition determination side can be reduced, and the original route on the acceptance determination side It becomes possible to enter a special gaming state.

Feature G5. Based on the transition determination performed by the transition determination unit, the game stage effect is started by a predetermined effect unit, and after the effect period has elapsed, a result notification corresponding to the result of the transition determination is performed and the game time effect is performed. A game turn control means (a function for executing a game turn control process by the main controller 162),
When the game time effect is performed by the game time control means, effect period setting means for setting the effect period in accordance with the result of the transition determination (function for executing variable display time setting processing by the main control device 162) When,
With
Any one of the characteristics G1 to G4, wherein when the special game state is set by the state means, the effect period set by the effect period setting means does not change from the normal game state. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, even when the special game state is likely to be a so-called small hit result as the second transition correspondence result, the length of the effect period of the game turn effect accompanying each transition determination does not change from the normal game state. When creating a special gaming state that is more likely to result in a small hit result than in the normal gaming state, for example, in the normal gaming state, the period of the game round effect that results in a small hit result is lengthened so that the game round effect does not end. However, it is possible to make it possible to receive the benefit of the small hit result by shortening the effect period of the game round effect that becomes the small hit result in the special gaming state. However, with such a configuration, there is a scene where the game round effect based on the small hit result is not ended even if the player tries to end the game due to the increase in the effect period in the normal game state as described above. There may be a problem that the number will increase and it will be difficult to stop. Therefore, the above-described problem does not occur if the configuration is such that the benefit of the small hit result is easily obtained without using the length of the effect period of the game round effect as in the above configuration.

  Feature G6. Based on the specific process, a ending means for setting the special gaming state to the normal gaming state (in the main control device 162, a variable display time is set for the case where the number of reserved maps FN is 3 or less. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the above configuration, the special gaming state is entered based on the specific process related to the control of the receiving means, and the special gaming state is terminated based on the specific process. By doing in this way, regarding the transition to the special game state and the end, there is no involvement of the processing on the starting and entering part, and it is possible to completely set the route on the receiving means side.

Feature G7. The specifying means is a means for executing the specifying process.
An acceptance information acquisition means (a function for executing a through-winning process by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for acceptance based on a game ball entering the special entry portion;
Receiving information storage means (electrical power holding area 643) for storing the receiving information acquired by the receiving information acquiring means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process by the main control device 162) for performing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
With respect to the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means, acceptance determination means for performing acceptance determination as to whether or not the acceptance control means performs the acceptance control (in the general game game control process by the main controller 162). A function for executing the determination processing)
With
The state means is configured to change the gaming state to the special gaming state based on at least a part of the specific processing.
Any one of the characteristics G1 to G6, wherein the state means is configured to enter the special gaming state using the number of pieces of the reception information stored in the reception information storage unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In a game where acceptance information is acquired based on the entrance to the special entrance club and acceptance is determined based on the acceptance information, the acceptance information waiting for acceptance judgment (waiting for digestion) is stored in the receipt information. The information for receiving is stored in the means, and the number of memories increases when the balance between the speed of entering the special entrance part and the digestion of the information for receiving is tilted toward the entrance side, and the number of memories is increased when tilting toward the digest side. Decrease. Based on this premise, the above configuration makes it possible to shift to the special gaming state by utilizing the balance of the speed of entering the special entry club and digesting the information for acceptance. It is possible to greatly increase interest in entering the ball and digesting the information for acceptance.

Feature G8. When the player's launch operation is in a predetermined mode, the game ball launched from the launch means is configured to reach the special entrance part,
In the situation where the firing operation of the predetermined mode is continued, the state means is configured to select a predetermined predetermined condition (a long variable display time is selected in a situation where the number of reserved maps FN is 1 to 3). ) Is established, the means for making the number of the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means easy to become a predetermined specific number (4) (the hold on the normal map side during a long variable display time) A function to execute processing to acquire information)
The gaming machine according to Feature G7, characterized in that the special gaming state can be established when the number of the information for acceptance stored by the acceptance information storage means becomes the specific number.

  According to the above configuration, when the number of pieces of receiving information stored in the receiving information storage means reaches a specific number, a special gaming state is likely to result in a so-called small hit result. In this case, since the specific number is not obtained unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in a situation where the firing operation of the predetermined mode is continued, the continuous execution of the firing operation of the predetermined mode is prompted. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a so-called stopping operation that repeats firing and stopping or a launching operation that aims at a location that is not intended by the designer.

Feature G9. Based on the acceptance determination performed by the acceptance determination unit, the reception effect is started by a predetermined effect unit, and after the passage of the reception effect period, a result notification corresponding to the result of the reception determination is performed to perform the reception effect. An acceptance effect control means for terminating (a function of executing a general game play control process by the main controller 162);
When the acceptance effect is performed by the acceptance effect control means, the acceptance effect period setting means for setting the acceptance effect period according to the result of the acceptance determination (set of the normal figure variable display time by the main control device 162 is executed. Function)
With
The means for state can establish that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined reception effect period is set by the reception effect period setting unit, and can store the specific number of the reception information in the reception information storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature G8, wherein

  According to the said structure, the number of information for acceptance memorize | stored in an acceptance information storage means changes with the setting of the acceptance effect period of an acceptance effect based on acceptance determination, and a specific number is memorize | stored. If it does in this way, it can be made to change to a special game state by the setting of an acceptance production period, and it can utilize an existing composition well and can realize novel game nature, without requiring a big design change.

  Feature G10. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of the reception information stored in the reception information storage unit can be the specific number by continuing the launch operation in the predetermined mode. Or the gaming machine according to Feature G9.

  According to the above configuration, the special gaming state is not achieved simply by satisfying the predetermined condition, and the special gaming state is not achieved unless the firing operation of the predetermined mode is continued. By doing in this way, compared with the structure which transfers by the one-side lottery by the side of a game machine, a player's game operation (launch operation) and the transition of a game state are closely linked, and an interest improvement is achieved.

  Feature G11. In the situation where the firing operation of the predetermined mode is continued, the state means is configured to select a predetermined predetermined condition (a long variable display time is selected in a situation where the number of reserved maps FN is 1 to 3). ) Is not established, means for limiting that the number of the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means becomes the specific number (relationship between the short fluctuation display time on the normal side and the firing period) The gaming machine according to any one of features G8 to G10, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature G8 can be more suitably achieved. Specifically, since the number of receiving information pieces stored is limited to a specific number without satisfying the predetermined condition, the special gaming state is not established without the predetermined condition being satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid an event that causes a special gaming state on a route unintended by the designer, and to suppress an action that intentionally causes the route.

  Feature G12. In the special gaming state, the special gaming state is continued in a situation where the number of pieces of receiving information stored in the receiving information storage means is a predetermined number (3) or more. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G11.

  According to the above-described configuration, even if the special game state is set using the stored number of information for acceptance, the special game state is ended unless the stored number is maintained at a predetermined number or more. In this way, by associating the start condition and the continuation condition of the special game state with the storage number of the information for acceptance, it is possible to achieve a novel game that makes good use of the processing information on the acceptance determination side.

  When applied to the feature G8, the “predetermined number” may be expressed in more detail as “a predetermined number that is smaller than the specific number”.

  Feature G13. Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means, means for causing an event to reduce the number of the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means (execution of the big prize opening / closing process by the main control device 162) The gaming machine according to any one of features G8 to G12, wherein

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a special gaming state is achieved by increasing the storage number of the reception information (becomes a specific number), the storage number of the reception information can be reduced depending on the result of the transition determination. Therefore, with regard to the number of information stored for acceptance, not only the speed balance between the entry to the special entry part and the digestion of the information for acceptance, but also the result of the transition determination can be involved, thereby diversifying the game. It is done.

  Note that the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features H1 to H10, and the features are included in each configuration of the features G1 to G13. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance part (fifth operating port 730) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
Special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entrance unit;
Special information storage means (holding ball storage area 642) for storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
About the special information stored in the special information storage means, grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player (first special figure change start process or second special figure by the main control device 162). A function to execute the success / failure determination process in the fluctuation start process), and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player, a privilege granting unit (game by the main control device 162) that grants a privilege to the player State transition process), and
A special entry part (through gate 35) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
Receiving means (an electric accessory) that is displaceable between a first state (accepting state) in which a game ball is received at the starting entrance part and a second state (non-accepting state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than in the first state. 66)
An acceptance information acquisition means (a function for executing a through-winning process by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for acceptance based on a game ball entering the special entry portion;
Receiving information storage means (electrical power holding area 643) for storing the receiving information acquired by the receiving information acquiring means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process by the main control device 162) for performing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
With respect to the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means, acceptance determination means for performing acceptance determination as to whether or not the acceptance control means performs the acceptance control (in the general game game control process by the main controller 162). A function for executing the determination processing)
With
In a first mode (for example, with the upper variable prize winning device 710, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entry portion at a position where the game ball launched by the launching unit reaches before the special ball entry portion. Closed state) and the second mode (for example, the open state in the case of the top variable prize winning device 710) that allows the game ball to enter the special pitching portion is not possible or difficult to enter than the first mode. A game machine characterized in that a movable movable object (for example, an upper variable prize winning device 710) is provided.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the acceptance control is performed in which the entrance rate to the starting entrance part where the bonus grant determination is performed based on the entrance to the special entrance part, the special entrance part is performed. If the movable accessory is in the first mode, entry into the special entry portion is permitted, while if the movable accessory is in the second mode, the special combination is provided. Entering the ball is restricted. Therefore, the entrance rate to the starting entrance part varies depending not only on the result of the acceptance determination based on the entrance to the special entrance part but also on the state of the movable accessory. In this way, for example, even without changing the probability that the result of the acceptance determination is the result of executing the acceptance control, the entrance rate to the special entry portion by the change in the state of the movable accessory, that is, the acceptance determination It becomes possible to change the execution frequency, and it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which the entrance rate to the starting entrance part is changed without changing the probability of acceptance determination or the manner of acceptance control. .

  Feature H2. When the movable accessory becomes the second aspect, the movable accessory and the special entrance portion are provided so that the distance from the special entrance portion is less than the diameter of the game ball. The gaming machine according to Feature H1.

  According to the above configuration, when the movable accessory enters the second state, there is no event that the game ball slips between the movable accessory and the special entry portion and enters the special entry portion. It becomes like this. Thereby, when changing the execution frequency of the acceptance determination due to the change in the state of the movable accessory, it is possible to avoid the execution frequency different from the design due to the flow of the game ball.

  Feature H3. The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2, wherein the acceptance determination unit is configured to perform the acceptance determination even in a situation where the movable accessory is in the second mode.

  According to the above configuration, if the movable accessory is in the second mode, no entry to the special entry portion occurs, and the acceptance determination is performed although the acceptance information is not acquired. In this configuration, only the acceptance information stored in the storage device is digested and not replenished. By doing so, for example, when it is desired to reduce the number of information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means, the number of pieces of information for acceptance is set to the movable combination by setting the movable combination as the second mode. It becomes possible to adjust using things.

  Feature H4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3, wherein the movable accessory periodically operates in the first mode and the second mode from a predetermined start timing.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the entrance rate to the special entrance portion is changed by the movement of the movable accessory, the operation timing of the movable accessory becomes periodic, which is compared with the non-periodic one. Thus, the transparency of the game is ensured. That is, if it is non-periodic, for example, even though the game ball is flowing down at the timing when it is likely to enter the special entry part, the movable accessory suddenly becomes the second mode and becomes special. If an unfavorable event occurs for a player, for example, the entry to the entrance club has been blocked, it may cause distrust if the action of the movable accessory is intentionally structured. Absent. Therefore, by adopting a periodic operation as in the above configuration, it is possible to change the entrance rate to the special entry unit without causing distrust to the player.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to Feature H4, wherein a cycle in which the movable accessory operates in the first mode and the second mode is shorter than a shooting cycle of a game ball by the launching unit.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation cycle of the movable accessory is shorter than the firing cycle, it is difficult to perform an act of aiming at a state in which the movable accessory is in the first mode and can enter the special entry portion. can do.

  In addition, regarding “the period in which the movable combination operates in the first mode and the second mode”, “the first mode after the movable combination operates from the first mode to the second mode”. It may be expressed as “period until operation”.

  Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the movable accessory is the second aspect when the privilege is given by the privilege granting unit.

  According to the said structure, when a privilege will be provided by the grant determination based on the entrance to a starting entrance part, since a movable accessory becomes a 2nd aspect, it is glad that a privilege is provided. And the sadness of no longer entering the special entry portion can be provided simultaneously through the determination of grant. In this way, in particular, if the entrance to the special entrance portion does not occur, the acceptance determination will not be performed, so the entrance rate to the start entrance portion will eventually decrease, and the next time As a result, the granting of benefits is far away. In this way, using the relationship between the grant determination based on the entrance to the starting entrance club and the entrance rate to the special entrance club, an image of the privilege granted based on the result of the grant determination is used. It can be a novelty that has never existed before.

Feature H7. When the movable accessory is in the second mode, a game ball can be entered, and in the first mode, the game ball is less likely to enter than the second mode (upper size) A prize opening 710a),
A feature H6 is provided with a payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls having entered the ball-entry portion of the movable accessory. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the entrance part of the movable accessory based on the grant of the privilege by the privilege granting means, and obtain a prize ball for paying out a predetermined number of game balls be able to. Therefore, based on the privilege grant, although the entry to the special entry part will not occur, the entry to the movable accessory will occur, and the acquisition of the receiving information will be obtained but the prize ball can be obtained It becomes possible. By doing in this way, it is possible to balance the loss that does not occur when entering the special entry portion and the benefits obtained by the movable combination being in the second mode.

  Feature H8. Based on the provision of the privilege by the privilege granting means, the movable accessory is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and then the unit operation of the first mode is performed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to Feature H7, wherein the gaming machine is configured to shift to a specific gaming state that can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the game state is shifted to the specific gaming state, a plurality of unit operations are performed. In this case, since the timing at which the movable accessory becomes the first mode occurs between the unit motions and the unit motions, compared to the configuration maintained in the second mode, the entrance to the special pitching portion is less There will be room to arise. Thus, it may be possible to generate a special ball entering portion while paying out a prize ball as a privilege.

  Feature H9. The gaming machine according to claim H8, wherein a waiting period between the unit motions during the specific gaming state may be longer than a game ball firing cycle by the launching means.

  According to the above configuration, even when the movable accessory is in the special game state that is the second mode, the entry to the special entry part can occur during the standby period between the unit action and the unit action. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to perform a different time in the specific gaming state between the entry into the movable combination serving as an opportunity for paying out a prize ball as a privilege grant and the entry into a special entry club serving as an opportunity for obtaining information for acceptance. Each can be generated.

Feature H10. In the specific gaming state, the movable accessory changes from the first mode to the second mode in one unit operation, and then the movable combination changes from the first mode to the first mode in the next unit operation. The period until it becomes two modes is predetermined,
After the movable combination becomes the second aspect, the movable combination moves to the first aspect when a predetermined number of balls are generated in the moving portion of the movable combination. The gaming machine according to Feature H9, which is characterized.

  According to the above configuration, since the period from the second mode to the next mode is fixed, a predetermined number of balls are entered as soon as possible after the movable accessory is in the second mode. As the first mode is generated, the period of the first mode becomes longer. That is, the earlier a predetermined number of balls are generated in the movable accessory, the easier it is to generate a ball into the special ball portion. If it does in this way, it will become possible to realize the game nature which linked the entrance to a movable accessory and the entrance to a special entrance part during a specific game state.

  Note that, for each configuration of the features H1 to H10, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations I1 to I12, the features J1 to J8, the features K1 to K13, and the features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Variable entry means (upper variable prize winning device 710) that can be switched between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. )When,
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (the large winning opening opening / closing process by the main controller 162 is executed) Function)
Based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition, specific state transition means (game by the main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state to a specific state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch means. State transition process), and
A payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising
Based on the fact that the variable pitching means is set to the first mode by the variable pitching control unit, a specific event that is disadvantageous as compared with the case where the variable pitching unit is not set to the first mode is generated. A gaming machine comprising a possible specific event means (function of executing a general game game control process by the main controller 162).

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a predetermined number of game balls as award balls are paid out when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means that controls opening and closing like a so-called electric chew or attacker, the variable ball entry means is the first. If it becomes an aspect, the specific event which becomes disadvantageous rather than the case where it does not become a 1st aspect may arise. In other words, when the variable pitching means becomes the first mode, it becomes possible to obtain a prize ball, but a specific event that is disadvantageous occurs, so that the player has a complicated feeling that joy and sadness are complicated Can be. By doing in this way, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that is significantly different from the conventional gameability of simply obtaining a prize ball based on the jackpot result.

  The specific event means (main control device capable of causing a specific event that is disadvantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable pitching means is set to the first mode by the variable pitching control means. 162 ”, the variable pitching means is set to the first mode by the variable pitching control means. It may be expressed as “specific event means (a function for executing a general game game control process by the main control device 162) capable of causing a specific event that is more disadvantageous than the case where it is not set as one mode”.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the specific event means causes the specific event to occur during the specific state in which the variable pitching means is in the first mode.

  According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs in a specific state, and compared with a configuration in which a disadvantageous event occurs after the specific state, the complex emotions that are complicated by joy and sadness shown in the feature I1 are more complicated. It becomes possible to hold it suitably. That is, the variable entry means becomes the first mode, and a game ball is entered into the variable entry means to obtain a prize ball, but at the same time, a disadvantageous specific event occurs. In this way, it is possible to experience a specific phenomenon that is disadvantageous while obtaining a prize ball, and it is possible to make a game with a novel sense.

  Feature I3. The gaming machine according to claim I2, wherein the specific event means causes the specific event to occur according to a length of a period during which the variable pitching means is in the first mode.

  According to the above configuration, the specific event may occur according to the length of the period during which the variable pitching means becomes the first mode and the prize ball can be obtained. Therefore, if a large number of prize balls are obtained, a specific event that is disadvantageous to the player can be more closely related.

  Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the specific event means is more likely to cause the specific event as the period during which the variable pitching means is in the first mode is longer.

  According to the above configuration, the more prize balls that are obtained, the easier it is for a specific event to be disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to provide conflicting feelings at the same time, such as feelings of being pleased with the number of prize balls, and feelings of sadness that more adverse prizes are likely to occur as the number of prize balls increases. Can be sex.

  Feature I5. The specific event means can prevent the specific event from occurring when the period during which the variable pitching means is in the first mode is shorter than a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Feature I3 or Feature I4.

  According to the said structure, if the period made into the 1st aspect is shorter than a predetermined period, the specific event which becomes disadvantageous for a player will not arise. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous specific event from occurring until there are few prize balls to be obtained, and it is possible to avoid an event in which the player becomes extremely disadvantageous.

  Feature I6. The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the predetermined period is a period longer than a firing period of game balls.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined period is a period during which at least one ball can enter the variable ball entry means. That is, there is a scene where a specific event does not occur while obtaining a prize ball suitable for it. In this way, it is possible to provide a specific state in which a specific event occurs and a specific event in which a specific event does not occur while giving a prize ball, which can greatly contribute to diversification of games.

Feature I7. A privilege granting means (main control device) for granting a privilege (supported state by the electric accessory 66) to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition (the result of the lottery on the normal map side being an open result) 162, a function for executing a general game play control process by 162),
A high grant state (winning easy state) and a low grant state (normal game state) are set so that the ease of granting the privilege by the privilege granting unit is relatively high and low.
From the high grant state to the low grant state, from the low grant state to the high grant state, provided with grant state setting means (normal number reservation storage number FN stored in the electrical role reservation area 643),
The grant state setting means can be configured to be in the high grant state or the low grant state independently of the specific state transition means,
The predetermined granting condition can be established during the specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the specific event is an event that causes the high grant state to shift to the low grant state during the specific state.

  According to the above configuration, since the predetermined provision condition can be established even during the specific state, the ease of establishment of the predetermined provision condition during the specific state changes during the specific state. By doing in this way, in one specific state, it becomes possible to change the easiness of giving a privilege without changing the ease of entering the variable ball entry means, and to make a novel specific state It becomes possible.

Feature I8. It has a special entry part (through gate 35) where game balls can enter,
The grant state setting means is configured to be able to continue the high grant state on condition that the entrance to the special entrance part occurs at a predetermined frequency,
The gaming machine according to the feature I7, wherein the specific event occurs when the frequency of entering the special pitching portion decreases during the specific state.

  According to the above configuration, a specific event occurs when the frequency of entering the special pitching portion decreases during the specific state in the configuration in which the high grant state continues as long as the ball enters the special pitching portion with a predetermined frequency. Low grant state. In this way, by associating a specific event or a high grant state / low grant state with an event that is easily recognized by a player, such as entering a special entry portion, the understanding of the game is improved, and thus the characteristic I1 It is possible to fully enjoy the innovative gameplay.

  Feature I9. The special pitching portion can be pitched when the variable pitching means is the second mode, and the variable pitching means is the first mode, so that the special pitching unit is the second mode. The gaming machine according to Feature I8, wherein the ball is difficult to enter.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific state, when the variable entry means becomes the first mode and the entry is possible, it is difficult to enter the special entry portion, and the entry frequency decreases. In this way, by using the displacement of the variable pitching means for the pitching frequency of the special pitching part, the variable pitching means has not only a function for obtaining a prize ball during a specific state, but also the special pitching part. It is not necessary to provide a function to change the frequency of entering the ball and to change the frequency of entering the special ball, so that the number of members can be reduced by integrating the functions. It is possible to reduce the installation area.

Feature I10. Variable ball entry means (lower variable prize winning device 700) that can be switched between a first mode (open state) in which game balls can be entered and a second mode (closed state) in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first mode. , An upper variable winning device 710),
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (the large winning opening opening / closing process by the main controller 162 is executed) Function)
Based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition, specific state transition means (game by the main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state to a specific state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch means. State transition process), and
A payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising
A plurality of the variable pitching means;
The variable entry control means includes a first means for performing the variable entry control by the first variable entry means (the lower variable prize winning device 700) among the plurality of variable entry means in the specific state; Of the variable pitching means, second means for performing the variable pitching control by a second variable pitching means (upper variable winning device 710) different from the first variable pitching means, the first means, Setting means for setting which of the second means to perform the variable pitch control (function to execute a big prize opening and closing process by the main control device 162),
While the variable entry means is in the first mode, the specific event that is disadvantageous for the player is not caused when the variable entry control is performed by the first means, while the second means is not used. A gaming machine comprising a specific event generating means (a function of executing a general game game control process by the main control device 162) that can be generated when the variable pitch control is performed.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters a variable ball entry means that controls opening and closing like a so-called electric chew or attacker, a predetermined number of game balls as award balls are paid out. Although the specific event that is disadvantageous to the player does not occur in the first mode, the specific event may occur when the second variable entry means becomes the first mode. That is, when the variable pitching means is in the first mode, it is possible to obtain a prize ball, while a specific event that is disadvantageous by the variable pitching mode in the first mode may or may not occur. As a result, it is basically nice to have the variable pitching means in the first mode, but depending on the variable pitching means in the first mode, the joyful and sad feelings are complicated. Can be a thing. By doing in this way, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that is significantly different from the conventional gameability of simply obtaining a prize ball based on the jackpot result.

Feature I11. Variable entry means (upper variable prize winning device 710) that can be switched between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. )When,
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the variable entry control means for executing variable entry control according to the second aspect (the large winning opening opening / closing process by the main controller 162 is executed) Function)
Based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition, specific state transition means (game by the main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state to a specific state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch means. State transition process), and
A payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means;
In a gaming machine comprising
The variable pitch control means can maintain the variable pitch means as the first mode over a first period in the predetermined specific state, and the variable pitch control means is in the first period. Can be maintained as the first aspect over a shorter second period,
When the variable pitching means is maintained as the first mode over the second period, rather than when the variable pitching means is maintained as the first mode over the first period. A gaming machine that is advantageous to the player.

  According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the variable pitching means becomes the first mode so that the variable pitching means can enter the variable pitching means, and the prize ball is paid out in accordance with the pitch. And, it is more advantageous for the player than the first period to be open when the second period is the first period. In other words, the ease of paying out the winning ball and the advantage for the player are contradictory to each other. By doing in this way, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that is significantly different from the conventional gameability of simply obtaining a prize ball based on the jackpot result.

Feature I12. Based on a predetermined start opportunity, a special effect is started by a predetermined effect means, and the special effect is ended based on the passage of a preset effect continuation period. Control processing)
Based on a predetermined first opportunity, the game mode is switched to a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter, and based on a predetermined second event, the game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. Variable pitching means (upper variable winning device 710) switched to two modes (closed state);
Payout means (payout control device 181) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means;
With
The effect continuation period of the special effect in which the first mode continuation period from when the predetermined first trigger occurs until the predetermined second trigger occurs is performed in a situation where the predetermined first trigger occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that the player who is shorter than the remaining period is more advantageous to the player than the case where the remaining period is longer than the remaining period.

  According to the above-described configuration, the first mode continues in which the variable pitching means is the first mode on the assumption that when a game ball enters the variable pitching means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Advantages and disadvantages are set in relation to the remaining period of the production continuation period of the special performance, and for the player when the first mode continuation period is shorter than the remaining period of the special production is longer than the remaining period It will be advantageous. In other words, if the first mode continuation period is longer, it is advantageous for the player because there is a possibility that a prize ball may be awarded, but the first mode continuation period is short in consideration of special effects. Can be advantageous to the player. In this way, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that is significantly different from the conventional gameplay, in which a game ball is simply inserted into the variable ball entry means to obtain a prize ball.

  In addition, with respect to the above-described features I10 to I12, the configurations shown by the features I1 to I9 may be applied individually or in combination.

  Further, for each configuration of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of H1 to H10, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on a launch operation by a player;
A special pitching part (upper variable prize winning device 710, through gate 35) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
Predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75);
Effect execution means (notification / effect control device 143) for executing a notification effect by the predetermined notification means;
A gaming machine comprising
A special state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the probability of entering the special entrance portion changes is set,
The production execution means
In the special state, after executing a predetermined effect (battle effect), an advantageous content (victory effect) suggesting that it is advantageous to the player, and an unfavorable content (defeat effect) indicating that it is disadvantageous for the player ) Including a first special effect that can be executed by the predetermined notification means (a battle effect by the notification / effect control device 143). Function to execute processing for)
An effect that is started at an execution opportunity different from the first special effect, and a second special effect (ordinary game times) that ends when a predetermined execution period elapses is the predetermined notification means or Second special effect execution means (function to execute a general game game control process by the main control device 162) that can be executed by a different notification means;
Advantageous means for facilitating selection of the advantageous content as the result content in the first special performance based on the occurrence of the entry to the special entry portion (winning based on winning in the upper prize winning opening 710a) A process for generating an effect: a function for executing S3708 to S3713, and an HP display setting process (a function for executing S3706 according to the number of holds based on winning through the through gate 35),
Disadvantage means for making it easier to select the disadvantage content as the result content in the first special effect according to the passage of the execution period of the second special effect being executed during the first special effect A process of generating an HP reduction effect according to the number FN and the fluctuation state: a function of executing S3714 to S3718),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the advantageous content is easily selected as the result content in the first special effect by causing the game ball to enter the special ball entering part during the first special effect. On the other hand, the disadvantageous content is easily selected as the result content in the first special effect according to the passage of the execution period of the second special effect that is performed during the execution of the first special effect. In other words, when the first special effect occurs during the special state, it is not necessary to simply enter the game ball into the special ball-entry part, and a time factor is also added. Can be improved.

  In particular, since the temporal element is the progress of the execution period of the second special effect that starts at a different start timing from the first special effect, it is not related to the progress of the execution period of the first special effect. Disadvantage content can be easily selected by element. Therefore, it is possible to select an advantageous content if the second special effect has not ended even if no entry to the special entry part has occurred before the end of the first special effect, and the first special effect can be selected. Even if the entry into the special entry portion occurs, the disadvantageous content can be selected if the second special effect has been completed.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to make the first special performance in the special state an effect according to the game content in the special state, not the effect like a so-called race where the result is determined in advance. It is possible to greatly improve the game play inside.

  Feature J2. The second special effect executing means is configured to start the second special effect based on a game ball fired by the launching means entering a predetermined entrance part. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part, the second special effect that is related to the disadvantageous content being easily selected in the first special effect is started. Since the disadvantageous content is easily selected according to the passage of the execution period of the second special performance that is being executed during the first special performance, it is more disadvantageous if the second special performance is started at the latest timing. Since it becomes difficult to select, it is preferable that the timing of entering the predetermined entrance that is the start of the second special effect is also late. On the other hand, when the entry to the special entry portion occurs, the advantageous contents are easily selected, so that the selected result contents can be made different using the respective entry timings.

Feature J3. A starting ball entrance (first working port 62, fifth working port 730) into which a game ball launched by the launching unit can enter;
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting entrance part, a transition determination means for executing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the special state (the first special figure variation start process by the main controller 162 or the first 2) a function for executing the success / failure determination process in the special figure variation start process),
A variable ball that is displaceable between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. Means (upper variable prize winning device 710);
The variable entry means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect, and then the special control means (function for executing the special winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 162) is executed. ,
With
The special state is a configuration in which the special control by the special control means is executed,
Receiving means (an electric accessory) that is displaceable between a first state (accepting state) in which a game ball is received at the starting entrance part and a second state (non-accepting state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received than in the first state. 66)
An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process by the main control device 162) for performing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
An acceptance information acquisition means (a function for executing a through-winning process by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for acceptance based on the game ball entering the predetermined entrance part;
With respect to the information for acceptance acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means, acceptance determination means for executing acceptance determination as to whether or not to perform the acceptance control by the acceptance control means (a general game game control process by the main controller 162) A function for executing the pass / fail determination process in FIG.
With
The second special effect execution means starts the second special effect based on the acceptance determination performed by the acceptance determination means, and the result of the acceptance determination based on the elapse of the predetermined execution period. And the second special performance is ended, and the gaming machine according to Feature J2.

  According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the entrance to the starting entrance section, and the entrance to the variable entrance means is likely to occur when the transition is made to the special state based on the result of the transition determination. The first special effect executed during the special state is started on the basis of the entrance to a predetermined entrance portion that triggers the acceptance determination to change the entrance rate to the start entrance portion. 2 It becomes easy to select disadvantageous content according to the progress of the execution period of special effects. In this way, by associating the first special effect in the special state based on the entry to the starting entry part with the second special effect on the acceptance determination side, simply causing the entry to the variable entry means. Not only is it good, but the advantage / disadvantage changes due to the balance with the second special performance on the acceptance judgment side, so that the acceptance judgment has a new role beyond the role of changing the entrance rate to the starting entrance club. This makes it possible to achieve a novel gameplay that has never been achieved before.

Feature J4. The special state is a configuration in which the special control by the special control means is executed a plurality of times,
The predetermined entrance portion can enter a ball when the variable entrance means is in the second mode, and the variable entrance means is in the first mode than the 2nd mode. The gaming machine according to Feature J3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be difficult to perform.

  According to the above configuration, during a special state in which entry into the variable entry means is allowed, to a predetermined entry part serving as an execution opportunity of the second special effect related to the disadvantage content of the first special effect, When the variable pitching means is in the second mode, it is possible to enter the ball, and when the variable pitching means is in the first mode, it is difficult to enter the ball. By doing in this way, the first special effect is closely related to the second special effect, but the timing at which entry into the variable pitching means is likely to occur and a predetermined trigger that triggers the start of the second special effect. It is possible to divide the timing at which entrance to the entrance part is likely to occur. This makes it possible to divide the timing to be noted in a configuration where the portions to be noted are different from each other, and to appropriately avoid an event in which the degree of attention is dispersed by simultaneously paying attention to a plurality of locations. .

Feature J5. A first special ball entry part (through gate 35) as the special ball entry part;
The predetermined entrance portion is the first special entrance portion,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous means is capable of facilitating selection of the advantageous content on the basis of the entry into the first special entry portion. .

  According to the above configuration, the second special effect is started based on the entry to the first special entry part for acceptance determination, and the first special effect is disadvantageous as the execution period of the second special effect elapses. In the configuration in which the content is easily selected, the advantageous content can be easily selected when a ball enters the first special ball entering portion. In this way, the content of the result of the first special effect in the special state in which the entry to the variable entry means is permitted is advantageous depending on the element based on the entry to the first special entry part for acceptance determination. The special state can be a novel game that is completely different from the game that only causes the variable ball entry means to enter the ball.

Feature J6. A starting ball entrance (first working port 62, fifth working port 730) into which a game ball launched by the launching unit can enter;
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting entrance part, a transition determination means for executing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the special state (the first special figure variation start process by the main controller 162 or the first 2) a function for executing the success / failure determination process in the special figure variation start process),
With
A second special entrance portion as the special entrance portion;
The second special entrance portion is configured to be displaceable between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. And
Special control means for executing the special control according to the second mode from the second mode to the first mode from the second mode (the function of executing the big prize opening / closing process by the main controller 162) )
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the special state is a configuration in which the special control by the special control unit is executed.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration that shifts to a special state in which the entry to the second special entry portion is allowed based on the result of the transition determination based on the entry to the start entry portion, the second state in the special state In the 1 special effect, when the entrance to the second special entrance portion occurs, the advantageous content is easily selected. On the other hand, since it becomes easy to select disadvantageous contents according to the progress of the execution period of the second special effect, the entry to the second special entry part is generated as early as possible in combination with the second special effect. This makes it easy to select advantageous contents and makes it difficult to select disadvantageous contents. By doing so, it is possible to make the significance of entering the second special entry part during the special state more than simply obtaining a prize ball based on the entry, and during the special state It is possible to improve the playability.

Feature J7. In the special state, the number of balls entered into the second special ball entering portion as the first mode has reached a predetermined number, or a predetermined period has elapsed since the first mode. And a ending means (a function for executing a big winning opening closing process by the main control device 162) in which the second special pitching portion is based on the second aspect.
The disadvantage means is that the execution period of the second special effect has elapsed even when the number of balls entering the second special ball-throwing portion that is the first mode by the ending means has reached the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Feature J6, wherein the disadvantageous content can be selected according to the game.

  As in the above configuration, in the special state, when the number of balls entered into the second special pitching portion reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined period elapses, the second special pitching portion is simply configured in the second mode. Even if the number of entered balls reaches a predetermined number, depending on the execution period of the second special effect, the advantageous content is not necessarily selected, and the disadvantageous content may be selected. As a result, it is possible to add a game of generating a ball in balance with the execution period of the second special effect to a game of generating a predetermined number of balls in a special state, thereby improving the gameability. It becomes possible.

Feature J8. A starting ball entrance (first working port 62, fifth working port 730) into which a game ball launched by the launching unit can enter;
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting entrance part, a transition determination means for executing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to the special state (the first special figure variation start process by the main controller 162 or the first 2) a function for executing the success / failure determination process in the special figure variation start process),
Receiving means (an electric accessory) that is displaceable between a first state (accepting state) for accepting a game ball to the starting entrance portion and a second state (non-accepting state) that makes it difficult to accept a game ball than the first state. 66)
An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power support process by the main control device 162) for performing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
With
As the special pitching portion, a first special pitching portion (through gate 35) and a second special pitching portion (upper variable winning device 710) different from the first special pitching portion are provided,
An acceptance information acquisition means (a function for executing a through-winning process by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for acceptance based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first special entry portion;
With respect to the information for acceptance acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means, acceptance determination means for executing acceptance determination as to whether or not to perform the acceptance control by the acceptance control means (a general game game control process by the main controller 162) A function for executing the pass / fail determination process in FIG.
With
The second special effect execution means starts the second special effect based on the acceptance determination performed by the acceptance determination means, and the result of the acceptance determination based on the elapse of the predetermined execution period. To end the second special performance,
The second special entrance portion is configured to be displaceable between a first mode (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second mode (closed state) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first mode. And
Special control means for executing the special control according to the second mode from the second mode to the first mode from the second mode (the function of executing the big prize opening / closing process by the main controller 162) )
The special state is a configuration in which the special control by the special control means is executed,
The advantageous means facilitates selection of the advantageous content based on the entry into the first special entry part or the second special entry part,
Any of the features J1 to J7, wherein the disadvantageous means makes it easy to select the disadvantageous content according to the elapse of the execution period of the second special effect based on the entry to the first special entry portion. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the entrance to the starting entrance part, and when the transition is made to the special state based on the result of the transition determination, the entrance to the second special entrance part is likely to occur. In the configuration, the first special effect executed during the special state is based on the entry to the second special entry part or the entry to the first special entry part that is an opportunity for acceptance determination. The advantageous contents are easily selected, and the disadvantageous contents are easily selected according to the passage of the execution period of the second special effect started based on the entry to the first special entry portion. In this way, by associating the first special effect in the special state based on the entrance to the starting entrance part with the second special effect on the acceptance determination side, the entry to the second special entrance part is simply generated. Not only that, it is possible to change the advantage and disadvantage in balance with the entry into the first special entry part on the acceptance determination side and the second special effect based on the entry. As a result, the acceptance determination can be given a new role that exceeds the role of changing the entrance rate to the starting entrance part, and it is possible to achieve a novel gameability that has not existed before.

  Note that, for each configuration of the features J1 to J8, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H10, features I1 to I12, features K1 to K13, and features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A ball entrance portion (through gate 35, second through gate 850, etc.) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for through by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for determination based on a game ball entering the pitching section;
Information storage means (electrical power holding area 643) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Specific determination means for performing a specific determination as to whether or not to execute specific control for the determination information stored in the information storage means (a function for executing the game-use game control process in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine comprising
As the entrance part, it has a first entrance part (through gate 35) and a second entrance part (second through gate 850),
The game area is provided with a first route that allows a single game ball fired from the launching means to enter the first entrance part and then enter the second entrance part. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the above configuration, when one game ball launched from the launching unit flows down on the first route, information for determining whether or not to execute the specific control can be acquired a plurality of times (twice). In this way, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that has not been achieved so far, such as a duplicate lottery performed by one game ball.

  Moreover, in the above-described configuration, the determination information is not necessarily acquired for the amount of balls entered into the plurality of ball-entry portions depending on the number of pieces of determination information stored in the information storage unit. For example, in a situation where a predetermined number of determination information is stored as an upper limit, even if a player enters a plurality of balls, no determination information is acquired, and only determination information is acquired In order to do this, it is a condition that there is a space in the stored number. If there is a vacancy in the stored number, but the vacancy is less than the incoming ball, the determination information is acquired for the vacant portion.

  That is, in the configuration in which the player can enter the second entrance after entering the first entrance, if there are two vacant numbers in the information for determination, both entrances can be made by flowing down the first route. Two pieces of determination information, which are the amount of entry into the sphere, are acquired. In this configuration, when there is one vacancy in the number of determination information stored, one determination information is acquired instead of two, and when there is no vacancy in the number of determination information stored, one is also determined. Information is not acquired. In this way, by determining routes that can be entered into a plurality of entrance parts, the judgment information is not a 0/1 result indicating whether or not judgment information is acquired by the flow of one game ball. Even in the case where is acquired, it is possible to make a difference in the number, which can greatly contribute to diversification of games.

  The “first route” may be referred to as a “specific route”.

  Feature K2. The game area is provided with a second route in which one game ball launched from the launching unit enters the first entrance part and then does not enter the second entrance part. The gaming machine described in the characteristic K1.

  According to the above configuration, the number of determination information acquisitions differs between when the first route is caused to flow down and when the second route is caused to flow down. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the game nature in the gaming machine of the characteristic K1.

  Feature K3. A game ball fired at a predetermined launch intensity that can flow down the first route can flow down the second route, and a game ball launched at a predetermined launch intensity that can flow down the second route The gaming machine according to Feature K2, wherein the first route and the second route are set so that the first route can flow down.

  According to the above configuration, it is impossible to aim at the first route and the second route. Thereby, it is possible to realize the gameability of expecting to flow down the first route out of the first route and the second route due to variations in flow and the like.

  Feature K4. The gaming machine according to Feature K3, wherein when the game ball is fired at the predetermined launch intensity, the game ball is more likely to flow down in the second route than in the first route.

  According to the above configuration, since the second route is more likely to flow down than the first route, the game ball is less likely to enter the second entrance after entering the first entrance. As a result, it is possible to realize a game that makes it possible to expect the flow down to the first route while preventing the number of acquisition of the determination information from being increased unnecessarily and suppressing an increase in the starting rate.

  Feature K5. The first route enters the first entrance portion before the specific determination and the notification of the result made based on the game ball entering the first entrance portion are completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics K1 to K4, wherein the gaming ball thus entered enters the second entrance part.

  According to the above configuration, when the first route is caused to flow down, a plurality of pieces of determination information are acquired, but the determination information acquired based on the previous entry into the first entry portion is digested. After that, when the next determination information is acquired, such an event does not occur, and it is possible to suitably realize the gameability utilizing the fact that a plurality of determination information is stored.

  The above-described configuration is as follows: “The first route is the information for determination stored in the information storage means after the specific determination performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance portion is completed. It may be expressed that a game ball that has entered the first ball entry part enters the second ball entry part before the specific determination is made.

  Feature K6. The gaming machine according to Feature K5, wherein in the first route, the first incoming ball portion and the second incoming ball portion are arranged at an interval shorter than the diameter of the game ball.

  According to the above configuration, since the game ball cannot move between the first and second pitching portions, the game ball that has entered the first pitching portion when flowing down the first route. Does not enter the second entrance part, or does not enter the second entrance part without entering the first entrance part. Thereby, it becomes easy to realize the gameability as designed.

Feature K7. A plurality of nails are embedded in the game area, and the flow-down mode of the game ball can be changed by the plurality of nails,
The gaming machine according to Feature K6, wherein in the first route, the nail is embedded between the first and second balls.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to diversify the flow mode of the first route that continuously enters the first and second entrance portions. That is, unlike a configuration in which the first and second balls are simply connected, a nail is embedded between the first and second balls, The movement of the game ball can be changed by the nail.

Feature K8. A starting entrance part (second operation port 63) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball;
Displaceable between a first state (acceptance state) in which a game ball is received at the start entrance ball portion and a second state (non-acceptance state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received at the start entrance ball portion than the first state. A receiving means (electric appliance 66);
Acceptance control means for executing acceptance control for displacing the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then displacing to the second state (function for executing processing for supporting electric power by the main controller 162) When,
With
The specific control is the acceptance control by the acceptance control means,
The receiving means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first route is received after entering the first and second balls. The gaming machine according to any one of K7.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball is caused to flow down the first route, the game ball enters the first and second entrance parts and is then received by the receiving means to the start entrance part. You can enter the ball. Thereby, the information for determination is acquired based on entering into the 1st entrance part and the 2nd entrance part, and a receiving means is made into the 1st state by specific determination, and a game ball is entered into the start entrance part. It becomes possible to complete a series of games of making a ball in the flow of one ball. In particular, since the first route is a route through which game balls enter the first and second entrance portions, the possibility that the game balls flowing down the first route are received by the receiving means is the first. It becomes higher compared with the case where the entry is made only to the entry part (the case where the second route referred to as the characteristic K2 is caused to flow down). Therefore, the possibility of completing the series of games with one game ball is increased, and the game performance can be improved.

  Feature K9. In any one of the characteristics K1 to K8, the number of pieces of the determination information stored in the information storage unit becomes a specific number that is advantageous to the player by being a plurality of specific numbers. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the significance of acquiring a plurality of pieces of determination information by flowing down the first route is improved. In particular, in a configuration in which there is a route for acquiring one piece of determination information, such as the configuration of the feature K2, a configuration in which the determination information is digested before flowing down the route again after flowing down the route. That is, in the configuration in which the determination information is difficult to accumulate, the number of determination information stored is difficult to be a specific number, and is difficult to be in a specific state. If such a configuration has a configuration capable of storing determination information at a time like the first route, it is usually difficult to accumulate determination information, but it can be stored if the first route flows down. Therefore, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristics of the feature K1 while having the fun of the gaming machine inherently enjoying the flow-down mode of the game balls, while increasing interest in the flow-down destination of the game balls. It becomes.

  Feature K10. The number of pieces of information for determination stored in the information storage means is a number that allows one game ball to enter the entrance part when one game ball flows down to the first route. A first specifying means for making it easy to generate a first specific situation (a situation in which the general-purpose reserved storage number FN is 2) that is less than or equal to the number divided from the predetermined number is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of thru K9.

  According to the above configuration, if the information storage means is empty in the first specific situation, there is a part for entering the entrance part. Therefore, by flowing down the first route, the number corresponding to the part entered It is possible to acquire the determination information. Therefore, in the first specific situation, it can be said that the merit of flowing down the first route can be enjoyed to the maximum extent.

  Feature K11. The number of pieces of information for determination stored in the information storage means is a number that allows one game ball to enter the entrance part when one game ball flows down to the first route. Second specifying means for facilitating the occurrence of a second specific situation (situation in which the number of ordinary reserved memories FN is 3) that is larger than the predetermined number and smaller than the predetermined number The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K10, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the second specific situation, although there is no vacant part of the information storage means in the entrance part, there is one or more, so by flowing down the first route, Although it is not possible to acquire the number of pieces of determination information corresponding to the amount of balls that have entered the ball entry section, at least one piece of determination information can be acquired. Therefore, in the second specific situation, it is possible to secure at least the significance of flowing down the first route, although it is not possible to fully enjoy the merit of flowing down the first route.

Feature K12. Based on the fact that the specific determination is performed by the specific determination unit, a specific notification unit that starts a notification effect by a predetermined notification unit, notifies the result of the specific determination, and ends the notification effect ( A function of executing a general game play control process by the main controller 162);
When the notification effect is performed by the specific notification means, period setting means for setting the effect continuation period of the notification effect (a process for setting the normal map variable display time in the general game play control process by the main controller 162) Function to execute)
With
The specific notification means performs the notification effect over the effect continuation period set in the period setting means,
The first specifying means sets the duration of the notification effect to be started in the second specific situation (FN = 3) for the notification effect to be started in the first specific situation (FN = 2). By making it easier to be shorter than the production continuation period, the first specific situation is likely to occur,
The second specifying means determines the effect duration period of the notification effect started in a situation where the number of pieces of determination information stored in the information storage means is the predetermined number as the second specifying situation (FN). The feature described in Feature K10 or Feature K11, wherein the second specific situation is likely to occur by making the notification effect started at = 3) easier to be shorter than the effect duration. Gaming machine.

  According to the said structure, it becomes possible to produce the 1st specific situation and the 2nd specific situation using the length of the production continuation period. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to change the presence / absence of acquisition of the determination information by changing the entrance rate to the entrance part, and the effects of the features M10 and M11 can be achieved with a simple configuration. It becomes.

Feature K13. A starting entrance portion (first operation port 62, second operation port 63) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
Special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entrance unit;
With respect to the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, a grant determination means (a first special figure change start process or a second special figure by the main control device 162) that executes a grant judgment as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player. A function to execute the success / failure determination process in the fluctuation start process), and
Displaceable between a first state (acceptance state) in which a game ball is received at the start entrance ball portion and a second state (non-acceptance state) in which the game ball is less likely to be received at the start entrance ball portion than the first state. A receiving means (electric appliance 66);
An acceptance information acquisition means (a function for executing a through-winning process by the main control device 162) for acquiring information for acceptance based on a game ball entering the entrance portion;
Receiving information storage means (electrical power holding area 643) for storing the receiving information acquired by the receiving information acquiring means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process by the main control device 162) for performing acceptance control to change the acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state;
With respect to the information for acceptance stored in the acceptance information storage means, acceptance judgment means for sequentially performing acceptance judgment as to whether or not the acceptance control means performs the acceptance control (a general game game control process by the main controller 162) A function for executing the pass / fail determination process in FIG.
With
The specific control is the acceptance control by the acceptance control means,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means, the first specifying situation in which the effect continuation period is set by the first specifying means and the effect continuation period by the second specifying means are set. The gaming machine according to feature K12, further comprising means for performing switching to the second specific situation.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first specific situation and the second specific situation are generated by using the length of the production continuation period, the lottery system based on the entrance to the entrance section is referred to as the lottery system. It can be switched according to the result of different lottery systems (lottery systems based on the entrance of the starting entrance part). If it does in this way, the result of a plurality of lottery systems will be concerned with the 1st specific situation and the 2nd specific situation, and the monotonization of a game will be controlled and interest improvement will be achieved.

  Note that, for each configuration of the features K1 to K13, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, and the features It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of H1 to H10, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, and features L1 to L9. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
A receiving portion (for example, a continuous through formed by the tenth through gate 858 and the eleventh through gate 858, the through gate 35, the second through gate 850, etc.) provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game ball;
Based on the fact that the game ball has been received by the receiving unit, a grant determination means for executing a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege (opening of the electric accessory 66) to the player (usually by the main controller 162). A function to execute the success / failure determination process in the game times control process),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player, the privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (the main control device 162 A function to execute the game state transition process), and
Based on the fact that one game ball is received by the receiving unit, a first execution state (for example, a single lottery state) in which the grant determination by the grant determination unit is executed a first number of times, and one by the receiving unit. Switching that switches between a second execution state (for example, a double lottery state) in which the grant determination by the grant determination unit is executed a second number of times greater than the first number based on the acceptance of the game ball Means (function for executing a general game game control process by the main controller 162);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the grant determination is performed based on the game ball being received by the receiving unit, and the privilege is granted based on the result, the grant determination is executed the first time. An execution state and a second execution state that is executed a second number of times greater than the first number are provided, and the first execution state and the second execution state are switched by the switching means. As a player who wants to be given a privilege, he / she wants to be switched from the first execution state to the second execution state because the player who has been executed a second number of times more than the first number of times can obtain. Unlike the conventional game in which the player simply determines the grant and obtains a privilege, it is possible to realize a novel gameability of increasing the number of grant determinations executed in one acceptance.

Feature L2. Based on the fact that a game ball is received by the receiving unit, information acquisition means (a function for executing a through winning process by the main controller 162) that acquires determination information is provided.
The grant determination means determines whether the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means is the grant information corresponding to the grant correspondence result by performing the grant once for each determination information. It is a configuration that makes a judgment,
The information acquisition means acquires a first number of the determination information corresponding to the first number in the first execution state, and a second number of the determinations corresponding to the second number in the second execution state. The gaming machine according to Feature L1, wherein the gaming machine is for acquiring business information.

  According to the configuration described above, the number of times of determination of grant is not only different between the first execution state and the second execution state, but the number of acquisition of determination information used for the determination of grant is also different. For this reason, for example, switching between the first execution state and the second execution state is performed without requiring a processing change as in the configuration in which the assignment determination is performed a plurality of times using one determination information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature L3. The receiving part has a plurality of passing regions (through gates 858, 859, 35, 850),
The information acquisition means includes
When the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the first execution state, the determination information is acquired in the first number of passage areas of the plurality of passage areas;
When the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the second execution state, the determination information is acquired in the second number of passage areas among the plurality of passage areas. The gaming machine according to Feature L2.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the first execution state and the second execution state only by changing the passage area in which the determination information is acquired by passing. By doing so, for example, the existing configuration can be used effectively without adding a new configuration, such as making the flow path different or providing a sorting device therefor, and the effect of the feature L1 can be achieved. be able to.

Feature L4. The receiving part has the second number of passing regions (through gates 858, 859, 35, 850),
The information acquisition means includes
When the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the first execution state, the determination information is acquired in the first number of passage areas of the second number of passage areas,
When the game ball passes through the plurality of passage areas in the second execution state, the determination information is acquired in any passage area of the second number of passage areas. A gaming machine according to L3.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the first execution state and the second execution state only by changing the passage area in which the determination information is acquired by passing. By doing in this way, the effect of the characteristic L1 can be show | played, for example, without adding a new structure, such as making a flow path different or providing the distribution apparatus for it.

  In particular, according to the above-described configuration, the plurality of passage areas is the second number, and the configuration is such that the determination information is acquired by the passage of all the passage areas and the case where it is not the case. Therefore, compared with the feature L3, the difference in acquisition processing between the first execution state and the second execution state can be reduced, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature L5. Comprising information storage means (electrical power holding area 643) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
In the first execution state, the number of the determination information stored by the information storage unit is likely to be less than the second number, and in the second execution state, the number of the determination information stored by the information storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4, wherein the second number of vacant numbers is likely to occur.

  According to the above configuration, the first execution state and the second execution state can be realized by using the number of empty spaces that can be stored by the information storage unit. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature L2 without requiring a significant change from the existing configuration of storing a plurality of pieces of determination information. Also, for example, if the first execution state and the second execution state are realized by changing the processing inside the gaming machine, for a player who cannot understand or know the internal processing, There is a possibility that an opacity can be felt. On that point, if the number of free memory is used, the player can understand the first execution state and the second execution state, and can realize the innovative gameplay of the feature L2 while eliminating the unclear feeling. It becomes.

  Feature L6. The switching means includes an acquisition frequency at which the determination information is acquired by the information acquisition means in a situation in which the game ball is continuously emitted from the emission means, and an object on which the determination information is a target of the grant determination. The gaming machine according to Feature L5, wherein the first execution state and the second execution state are switched using a relationship with frequency.

  If the acquisition frequency at which the determination information is acquired is high, the number of pieces of determination information stored in the information storage means is likely to increase. Conversely, if the target frequency to be given is determined, the storage number is likely to decrease. In the above-described configuration, this relationship is used to set the number of empty spaces in the first execution state and the number of empty spaces in the second execution state. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to show the effect of characteristic L5 well.

Feature L7. Based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, a game notification effect is executed by a predetermined notification means, and the game effect effect is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination after the effect period has elapsed. Game time control means (function to execute a general game time control process by the main controller 162);
When the game times effect is performed by the game time control means, effect period setting means for setting the effect period according to the result of the grant determination (a process of setting a normal figure variable display time by the main control device 162 is executed. Function)
With
The production period setting means, as the production period,
The target frequency at which the determination information is the target of the grant determination is greater than the acquisition frequency at which the determination information is acquired by the information acquisition means in a situation where the game ball is continuously emitted from the discharge means. A first production period that increases,
The acquisition frequency at which the information for determination is acquired by the information acquisition means in a situation in which the game ball is continuously discharged from the discharge means is higher than the target frequency at which the information for determination is the target of the grant determination. A second production period that increases,
Can be set,
The switching means switches between the first execution state and the second execution state using the relationship between the first effect period and the second effect period set by the effect period setting means. The gaming machine according to Feature L6.

  According to the said structure, it becomes possible to implement | achieve the structure of the characteristic L6 by simple deformation | transformation of the length of an effect period. Thereby, when producing the effect of the feature L6, it is not necessary to add complicated control and configuration, and a wonderful effect can be expected with a simple configuration.

  Feature L8. In the first execution state, the effect period setting means, when the game times effect by the game time control means is performed in a situation where the number of information for determination by the information storage means is the predetermined number, By the game times control means in a situation where the production period is the first production period, and the number of determination information is one more than the number obtained by dividing the second number from the predetermined number. When the game times effect is performed, the effect period is set as the second effect period, and the vacant number of the stored number is smaller than the second number. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, by setting the first effect period and the second effect period, it is possible to make the number of vacant numbers in the first execution state smaller than the second number. More specifically, for example, if the predetermined number is 4, the first number is 1, and the second number is 2, the first effect in which the target frequency is higher than the acquisition frequency in the situation where the storage number is 4 The number of memories is easily changed from 4 to 3 as a period, and in the situation where the number of memories is 3, the number of memories is less likely to become 3 to 2 as the second effect period in which the acquisition frequency is higher than the target frequency. As a result, the first execution state in which the number of memories is 3 and one piece of determination information is easily obtained is obtained. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to implement | achieve a 1st execution state using simple structures, such as a combination of production periods.

  Feature L9. In the second execution state, the effect period setting means, when the game times effect by the game time control means is performed in a situation where the number of information for determination by the information storage means is the predetermined number, By the game times control means in a situation where the production period is the first production period, and the number of determination information is one more than the number obtained by dividing the second number from the predetermined number. The game according to Feature L7 or Feature L8, wherein when the game time effect is performed, the effect period is set as the first effect period, and the number of vacant memory numbers is set to the second number. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, by setting the first effect period and the second effect period, it is possible to set the number of vacant numbers in the second execution state to the second number. More specifically, for example, if the predetermined number is 4, the first number is 1, and the second number is 2, the first effect in which the target frequency is higher than the acquisition frequency in the situation where the storage number is 4 The number of memories is easily changed from 4 to 3 as a period, and the number of memories is easily changed from 3 to 2 as the first effect period in which the target frequency is higher than the acquisition frequency even in a situation where the number of memories is 3. Thereby, it will be in the 2nd execution state in which the number of memory is 2 or less, and two information for judgment is easy to be acquired. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to implement | achieve a 2nd execution state using simple structures, such as a combination of production periods.

  Note that for each configuration of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F14, the features G1 to G13, and the features It is possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of H1 to H10, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J8, and features K1 to K13. It is also possible to apply in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  The technical ideas shown in the configurations of the other features A to L can be applied individually to the configurations of the features A to L described in detail above. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  Moreover, when applying each technical idea mutually or in combination as mentioned above, it is good to apply after correcting the expression of each structure within the range of each technical idea.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (guide path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, each of these game parts Among these, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 61 or the like).

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... Through gate, 41 ... Game ball launch handle, 62 ... First operation port, 63 ... Second operation port, 64 ... Third operation port, 65 ... Variable winning device, 65a ... Grand prize port, DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 66 ... Electric accessory, 75 ... Symbol display device, 75a ... Display screen, 77 ... Guidance part, 78 ... Buffering member, 162 ... Main control device, 500 ... Second variable winning device, 506 ... V winning area, 651 ... Information / production control device, 660... Display control device, 710 .. upper variable winning device, 710 a .. upper prize winning port, 720... Fourth operating port, 730 .. fifth operating port, 850. 4 variable winning devices, 910... Third variable winning device, PE... Gaming area, RA1 receiving area, RA2 specific area.

Claims (8)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball;
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined lottery information based on the entrance of a game ball to the entrance part;
Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the lottery information acquired by the information acquisition means;
First game execution means for executing a first game based on the fact that lottery processing is performed by the lottery means;
Second game execution means for executing a second game different from the first game after execution of the first game based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A holding storage means for holding and storing lottery information corresponding to the incoming ball based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered the incoming ball part during execution of the first game or the second game;
With
In a predetermined case, a first period from when a game ball enters the ball entry part to when the second game corresponding to the ball entry ends corresponds to a game ball firing cycle in the launching means. A gaming machine configured to be shorter than the second period.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising means for setting the first period to be longer than the second period based on a predetermined condition established.   The game according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising means for setting the first period to be longer than the second period when the number of reserved memories in the holding storage means is a predetermined number or more. Machine. The entrance part is provided as a first entrance part,
A second pitching portion that is capable of entering a game ball and is different from the first pitching portion;
Variable acceptance that can be switched between a first state in which a game ball can be received or easily accepted in the second entrance part and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted or is less likely to be accepted in the entrance part. Means, and
As the second game execution means, variable acceptance control is performed in which the variable acceptance means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and thereafter the second state is set. 4. A gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising variable acceptance control means for performing. The variable receiving means forms a receiving area that can receive a game ball in a specific area when the second state is switched from the second state to the first state, and receives the game ball received in the receiving area in the entrance part Is configured to accept
When the number of reserved memories in the reserved storage means is a predetermined number or more, the length of the execution interval of the variable acceptance control and the arrival interval of the game ball to the specific area are different. The gaming machine according to claim 4.   The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein one length of the execution interval and the arrival interval is a non-integer multiple of the other length of the execution interval and the arrival interval.   The length of the period in which the variable acceptance means is in the first state in the variable acceptance control is set to be equal to or longer than the difference between the execution interval and the arrival interval. The gaming machine described in 1. The specific game ball that has entered the first entrance part is configured to be able to reach the specific area,
The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the arrival interval is an arrival interval of the specific game ball to the specific area.

Images